CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Financial Statements

The Chapter Preview describes the purpose of the chapter and highlights major topics.

Chapter Preview

If you own a business, how do you determine whether it is making or losing money? How should you finance expansion—should you borrow, should you issue stock, should you use your own funds? How do you convince banks to lend you money or investors to buy your stock? Success in business requires making countless decisions, and decisions require financial information.

The purpose of this chapter is to show you what role accounting plays in providing financial information.

The Feature Story helps you picture how the chapter topic relates to the real world of accounting and business.

Feature Story

Knowing the Numbers

Many students who take this course do not plan to be accountants. If you are in that group, you might be thinking, “If I’m not going to be an accountant, why do I need to know accounting?” Well, consider this quote from Harold Geneen, the former chairman of IT&T: “To be good at your business, you have to know the numbers—cold.” In business, accounting financial statements are the means for communicating the numbers. If you don’t know how to read financial statements, you can’t really know your business.

Knowing the numbers is sometimes even a matter of corporate survival. Consider the story of Columbia Sportswear Company, headquartered in Portland, Oregon. Gert Boyle’s family fled Nazi Germany when she was 13 years old and then purchased a small hat company in Oregon, Columbia Hat Company. In 1971, Gert’s husband, who was then running the company, died suddenly. Gert took over the small, struggling company with help from her son Tim, who was then a senior at the University of Oregon. Somehow, they kept the company afloat. Today, Columbia has more than 4,000 employees and annual sales in excess of $1 billion. Its brands include Columbia, Mountain Hardwear, Sorel, and Montrail.

Employers such as Columbia Sportswear generally assume that managers in all areas of the company are “financially literate.” To help prepare you for that, in this text you will learn how to read and prepare financial statements, and how to use key tools to evaluate financial results using basic data analytics.

The Chapter Outline presents the chapter’s topics and subtopics, as well as practice opportunities.

Chapter Outline

LEARNING OBJECTIVES REVIEW PRACTICE
LO 1 Identify the forms of business organization and the uses of accounting information.
  • Forms of business organization
  • Users and uses of financial information
  • Data analytics
  • Ethics in financial reporting

DO IT! 1a Business Organization Forms

1b Using Financial Information

LO 2 Explain the three principal types of business activity.
  • Financing activities
  • Investing activities
  • Operating activities
DO IT! 2 Business Activities
LO 3 Describe the four financial statements and how they are prepared.
  • Income statement
  • Retained earnings statement
  • Balance sheet
  • Statement of cash flows
  • Interrelationships of statements
  • Elements of an annual report

DO IT! 3a Financial Statements: Parts 1–4

3b Components of Annual Reports

Go to the Review and Practice section at the end of the chapter for a targeted summary and practice applications with solutions.
Visit Wiley Course Resources for additional tutorials and practice opportunities.

1.1 Business Organization and Accounting Information Uses

Suppose you graduate with a business degree and decide you want to start your own business. But what kind of business? You enjoy working with people, especially teaching them new skills. You spend most of your free time outdoors, kayaking, backpacking, skiing, rock climbing, and mountain biking. You think you might successfully combine your teaching skills and outdoor interest by starting an outdoor guide service.

Forms of Business Organization

What organizational form should you choose for your business? You have three choices—sole proprietorship, partnership, or corporation.

Sole Proprietorship

You might choose the sole proprietorship form for your outdoor guide service.

  • A business owned by one person is a sole proprietorship.
  • It is simple to set up and gives you control over the business.
An illustration displays a textbox titled, Sole Proprietorship, with an illustration of a cyclist on the left and a list on the right that reads as follows: Simple to establish; Owner-controlled; Tax advantages.

Small owner-operated businesses such as barber shops, law offices, and auto repair shops are often sole proprietorships, as are farms and small retail stores.

Partnership

Another possibility is for you to join forces with other individuals to form a partnership.

  • A business owned by two or more persons associated as partners is a partnership.
  • Partnerships often are formed because one individual does not have enough economic resources or other unique skills or resources to initiate or expand the business.
An illustration displays a textbox titled, Partnership, with an illustration of two tennis players, followed by a list at the bottom that reads as follows: Simple to establish; Shared control; Broader skills and resources; Tax advantages.

You and your partners should formalize your duties and contributions in a written partnership agreement. Retail and service-type businesses, including professional practices (lawyers, doctors, architects, and certified public accountants), often organize as partnerships.

Corporation

As a third alternative, you might organize as a corporation.

  • A business organized as a separate legal entity owned by stockholders is a corporation.
  • Investors in a corporation receive shares of stock to indicate their ownership claim.
An illustration displays a textbox titled, Corporation, with an illustration of a football team, followed by a list at the bottom that reads as follows: Easier to transfer ownership; Easier to raise funds; No personal liability.

Buying stock in a corporation is often more attractive than investing in a partnership because shares of stock are easy to sell (transfer ownership). Selling a proprietorship or partnership interest is much more involved. Also, individuals can become stockholders by investing relatively small amounts of money (see Alternative Terminology).

Alternative Terminology notes present synonymous terms that you may come across in practice.

Therefore, it is easier for corporations to raise funds compared to sole proprietorships or partnerships. Successful corporations often have thousands of stockholders, and their stock is traded on organized stock exchanges like the New York Stock Exchange. Many businesses start as sole proprietorships or partnerships and eventually incorporate.

Other factors to consider in deciding which organizational form to choose are taxes and legal liability. Sole proprietorships or partnerships, generally receive more favorable tax treatment than corporations. However, proprietors and partners are personally liable for all debts and legal obligations of the business; corporate stockholders are not. In other words, corporate stockholders generally pay higher taxes but have no personal legal liability. We will discuss these issues in more depth in a later chapter.

Hybrid Forms of Organization

Finally, while sole proprietorships, partnerships, and corporations represent the main types of business organizations, hybrid forms are now allowed in all states.

  • Hybrid business forms combine the tax advantages of partnerships with the limited liability of corporations.
  • Probably the most common among these hybrid types are limited liability companies (LLCs) and subchapter S corporations (these forms are discussed extensively in business law classes).

The combined number of proprietorships and partnerships in the United States far exceeds the number of corporations. However, the revenue produced by corporations is many times greater. Most of the largest businesses in the United States—for example, Apple, Google, Verizon, Visa, and Microsoft—are corporations. Because the majority of U.S. business is done by corporations, the emphasis in this text is on the corporate form of organization.

DO IT! exercises prompt you to stop and review the key points you have just studied. The Action Plan offers you tips about how to approach the problem.

Users and Uses of Financial Information

The purpose of financial information is to provide inputs for decision-making.

  • Accounting is the information system that identifies, records, and communicates the economic events of an organization to interested users.
  • Users of accounting information can be divided broadly into two groups: internal users and external users.

Internal Users

Internal users of accounting information are managers who plan, organize, and run a business. These include marketing managers, production supervisors, finance directors, and company officers. In running a business, managers must answer many important questions, as shown in Illustration 1.1.

ILLUSTRATION 1.1 Questions that internal users ask

A question asked by an internal user in the finance department is: Is cash sufficient to pay dividends to our stockholders? Illustrated by a woman wearing a t-shirt bearing an apple logo and sitting in front of a laptop.  A question asked by an internal user in the marketing department is: What price should we charge for an iPhone to maximize the company's net income? Illustrated by a man wearing a t-shirt bearing an apple logo and sitting at a table.  A question asked by an internal user in the human resources department is: Can we afford to give its employees pay raises this year? Illustrated by a woman wearing a t-shirt bearing an apple logo and sitting at a table.  Questions asked by an internal user that are part of management include, Which product line is the most profitable? Should any product lines be eliminated? Illustrated by a man wearing a t-shirt bearing an apple logo and sitting at a table.

To answer these and other questions, you need detailed information on a timely basis. For internal users, accounting provides internal reports, such as financial comparisons of operating alternatives, projections of income from new sales campaigns, and forecasts of cash needs for the next year. In addition, companies present summarized financial information in the form of financial statements.

Accounting Across the Organization boxes show applications of accounting information in various business functions.

External Users

There are several types of external users of accounting information. Investors (owners) use accounting information to make decisions to buy, hold, or sell stock. Creditors, such as suppliers and bankers, use accounting information to evaluate the risks of selling on credit or lending money. Some questions that investors and creditors may ask about a company are shown in Illustration 1.2.

ILLUSTRATION 1.2 Questions that external users ask

An illustration shows three questions asked by external users. The first is asked by investors and is illustrated by two investors in conversation with another. A man asks the question, Is Apple earning satisfactory income? The woman asks the question, How does Apple compare in size and profitability with Microsoft? The third question is asked by creditors and is illustrated by a bank. The question asked is, Will Apple be able to pay its debts as they come due? An illustration of the apple headquarters is in between the investors and creditors.

The information needs and questions of other external users vary considerably.

  • Taxing authorities, such as the Internal Revenue Service, want to know whether the company complies with the tax laws.
  • Customers are interested in whether a company like Tesla will be able to honor product warranties and otherwise support its product lines.
  • Labor unions, such as the Major League Baseball Players Association, want to know whether the owners have the ability to pay increased wages and benefits.
  • Regulatory agencies, such as the Securities and Exchange Commission or the Federal Trade Commission, want to know whether the company is operating within prescribed rules.

For example, Enron, Dynegy, Duke Energy, and other big energy-trading companies reported record profits at the same time as California was paying extremely high prices for energy and suffering from blackouts. This disparity caused regulators to investigate the energy traders to make sure that the profits were earned by legitimate and fair practices.

Data Analytics

Accounting software systems collect vast amounts of data about a company’s economic events as well as its suppliers and customers. Business decision-makers take advantage of this wealth of data by using data analytics to gain insights and therefore make more informed business decisions.

  • Data analytics involves analyzing data, often employing both software and statistics, to draw inferences.
  • As both data access and analytical software improve, the use of data analytics to support decisions is becoming increasingly common at virtually all types of companies (see Helpful Hint).

Helpful Hints further clarify concepts being discussed.

Illustration 1.3 shows the four most common types of data analytics that help answer questions ranging from what happened and why did it happen, to what is likely to happen and what should we do about it? Analytics range from simple analysis that can be performed using spreadsheets with tools like pivot tables and graphs, to complex statistical software and even artificial intelligence. More complex analysis provides greater value to the business.

ILLUSTRATION 1.3 Four types of data analytics

A graph titled, Four Types of Data Analytics compares value to complexity. The vertical axis labeled, Values, ranges from bottom to top as follows: Less, and Greater. The horizontal axis labeled, Complexity, ranges from left to right as follows:  Less, and Greater. An upward sloping arrow divided into three equal halves is labeled from left to right as: Hindsight, Insight, and Foresight, and starts from less value and less complexity and rises up to terminate at greater value and greater complexity. A textbox titled, Past, is plotted at less complexity and medium value, and comprises of two questions. A past descriptive question reads, What happened? and a past diagnostic question reads, Why did it happen?  A textbox titled, Future, is plotted at greater complexity and greater value, and comprises of two questions. A future predictive question reads, What is likely to happen? and a future prescriptive question reads, What should we do about it?

Insight boxes provide examples of business situations from various perspectives—ethics, investor, international, corporate social responsibility, and data analytics.

Ethics in Financial Reporting

People won’t gamble in a casino if they think it is “rigged.” Similarly, people won’t “play” the stock market if they think stock prices are rigged. At one time, major financial scandals at Enron, WorldCom, HealthSouth, and AIG led to a mistrust of financial reporting in general.

A Wall Street Journal article noted that “repeated disclosures about questionable accounting practices have bruised investors’ faith in the reliability of earnings reports, which in turn has sent stock prices tumbling.” Imagine trying to carry on a business or invest money if you could not depend on the financial statements to be honestly prepared. Information would have no credibility. A well-functioning economy depends on accurate and reliable financial reporting.

U.S. regulators and lawmakers were very concerned that the economy would suffer if investors lost confidence in corporate accounting because of unethical financial reporting.

  • Congress passed the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) to reduce unethical corporate behavior and decrease the likelihood of future corporate scandals (see Ethics Note).
  • As a result of SOX, top management must now certify the fairness of financial information.
  • In addition, penalties for fraudulent financial activity are much more severe.
  • Also, SOX increased both the independence of the outside auditors who review the accuracy of corporate financial statements and the oversight role of boards of directors.

Ethics Notes help sensitize you to some of the ethical issues in accounting.

Effective financial reporting depends on sound ethical behavior. When analyzing ethics cases and your own ethical experiences, you should apply the three steps outlined in Illustration 1.4.

ILLUSTRATION 1.4 Steps in analyzing ethics cases

An illustration displays a balance scale with one scale labeled A L T and another scale labeled A L T 2. Three paragraphs are displayed beside the scales and are as follows: The first paragraph is titled 1, Recognize an ethical situation and the ethical issues involved, and reads, Use your personal ethics to identify ethical situations and issues. Some businesses and professional organizations provide written codes of ethics for guidance in some business situations. The second paragraph is titled 2, Identify and analyze the principal elements in the situation, and reads, Identify the stakeholders— persons or groups who may be harmed or benefited. Ask the question: What are the responsibilities and obligations of the parties involved? The third paragraph is titled 3, Identify the alternatives, and weigh the impact of each alternative on various stakeholders, and reads, Select the most ethical alternative, considering all the consequences. Sometimes there will be one right answer. Other situations involve more than one right solution; these situations require you to evaluate each alternative and select the best one.

1.2 The Three Types of Business Activity

Businesses engage in three types of activity—financing, investing, and operating. For example, consider Gert Boyle’s parents, the founders of Columbia Sportswear.

  1. The Boyles obtained cash through financing (from personal savings and outside sources like banks) to start and grow their business.
  2. The family then invested the cash in equipment to run the business, such as sewing equipment and delivery vehicles.
  3. Once this equipment was in place, they began the operating activities of making and selling clothing.

The accounting information system keeps track of the results of each of the various business activities—financing, investing, and operating. Let’s look at each type of business activity in more detail.

Financing Activities

It takes money to make money. Financing activities involve raising money from outside sources. The two primary sources of outside funds for corporations are borrowing money (debt financing) and issuing (selling) shares of stock in exchange for cash (equity financing).

An illustration depicting financing activities is titled, Equity Financing and shows three people; a man in the center ringing a gong; with a woman and a man standing on either side, applauding.    An illustration depicting financing activities is titled, Debt Financing and shows a woman and a man having a conversation with an employee of the National Bank.

Columbia Sportswear may borrow money in a variety of ways. For example, it can take out a loan at a bank or borrow directly from investors by issuing debt securities called bonds. Persons or entities to whom Columbia owes money are its creditors.

  • Amounts owed to creditors—in the form of debt and other obligations—are called liabilities.
  • Specific names are given to different types of liabilities, depending on their source. Columbia may have a note payable to a bank for the money borrowed to purchase delivery trucks.
  • Debt securities sold to investors that must be repaid at a particular date some years in the future are bonds payable.

Corporations also obtain funds by selling shares of stock to investors. Common stock is the term used to describe the total amount paid in by stockholders for the shares they purchase.

The claims of creditors differ from those of stockholders. If you loan money to a company, you are one of its creditors. In lending money, you specify a payment schedule (e.g., payment at the end of three months). As a creditor, you have a legal right to be paid at the agreed time. In the event of nonpayment, you may legally force the company to sell property to pay its debts. In the case of financial difficulty, creditor claims must be paid before stockholders’ claims.

Stockholders, on the other hand, have no claim to corporate cash until the claims of creditors are satisfied. Suppose you buy a company’s stock instead of loaning it money. You have no legal right to expect any payments from your stock ownership until all of the company’s creditors are paid amounts currently due. However, many corporations make payments to stockholders on a regular basis as long as there is sufficient cash to cover required payments to creditors. These cash payments to stockholders are called dividends.

Investing Activities

Once the company has raised cash through financing activities, it uses that cash in investing activities. Investing activities involve the purchase of the resources a company needs in order to operate. Resources owned by a business are called assets. A growing company purchases many assets, such as computers, delivery trucks, furniture, and buildings.

  • Different types of assets are given different names; Columbia Sportswear’s sewing equipment is a type of asset referred to as property, plant, and equipment (see Alternative Terminology).
  • Cash is one of the more important assets owned by Columbia or any other business.
  • If a company has excess cash that it does not need for a while, it might choose to invest in securities (stocks or bonds) of other corporations, a type of asset referred to as investments.
An illustration of investing activities shows a van with a logo of a pine tree. The van is parked in front of a building with the same logo.

Operating Activities

Once a business has the assets it needs to get started, it begins operating activities. Operating activities are the day-to-day actions taken by a company to produce and sell a product, or provide a service. Columbia Sportswear is in the business of selling outdoor clothing and footwear. It sells TurboDown jackets, Millennium snowboard pants, Sorel® snow boots, Bugaboots™, rainwear, and anything else you might need to protect you from the elements. We call amounts earned from the sale of these products revenues.

  • Revenue is the increase in assets or decrease in liabilities resulting from the sale of goods or the performance of services in the normal course of business; Columbia records revenue when it sells a footwear product.
  • Revenues arise from different sources and are identified by various names depending on the nature of the business; Columbia’s primary source of revenue is the sale of sportswear (but it also generates interest revenue on debt securities held as investments).
  • Sources of revenue common to many businesses are sales revenue, service revenue, and interest revenue.
An illustration of operating activities shows a female employee stitching and a male employee standing in the background holding a jacket in his hand.

The company purchases its longer-lived assets through investing activities as described earlier. Other assets with shorter lives, however, result from operating activities.

  • Supplies are assets used in day-to-day operations (rather than sold to customers).
  • Goods available for future sales to customers are assets called inventory.
  • The right to receive money in the future is called an account receivable. If Columbia sells goods to a customer and does not receive cash immediately, then the company has a right to expect payment from that customer in the near future.

Before Columbia can sell a single Sorel® boot, it must purchase wool, rubber, leather, metal lace loops, laces, and other materials. It then must process, wrap, and ship the finished product. It also incurs costs like salaries, rents, and utilities. All of these costs, referred to as expenses, are necessary to produce and sell the product.

  • In accounting language, expenses are the cost of assets consumed or services used in the process of generating revenues.
  • Expenses take many forms and are identified by various names depending on the type of asset consumed or service used.

For example, Columbia keeps track of these types of expenses: cost of goods sold (such as the cost of materials), selling expenses (such as the cost of salespersons’ salaries), marketing expenses (such as the cost of advertising), administrative expenses (such as the salaries of administrative staff, and telephone and heating costs incurred at the corporate office), interest expense (amounts of interest paid on various debts), and income tax expense (corporate taxes paid to the government).

Columbia may also have liabilities arising from these expenses.

  • For example, Columbia may purchase goods on credit from suppliers. The obligations to pay for these goods are called accounts payable.
  • Additionally, Columbia may have interest payable on the outstanding amounts owed to the bank.
  • It may also have wages payable to its employees and sales taxes payable, property taxes payable, and income taxes payable to the government.

Columbia compares the revenues of a period with the expenses of that period to determine whether it earned a profit. When revenues exceed expenses, net income results. When expenses exceed revenues, a net loss results.

1.3 The Four Financial Statements

Assets, liabilities, expenses, and revenues are of interest to users of accounting information. This information is arranged in the format of four different financial statements, which form the backbone of financial accounting:

  1. Income statement. Shows how successfully your business performed during a period of time, by subtracting expenses from revenues.
  2. Retained earnings statement. Indicates how much of previous income was distributed to owners of your business in the form of dividends, and how much was retained in the business to allow for future growth.
  3. Balance sheet. Presents a picture at a point in time of what your business owns (its assets) and what it owes (its liabilities).
  4. Statement of cash flows. Shows where your business obtained cash during a period of time and how that cash was used.

To introduce you to these statements, we have prepared the financial statements for your outdoor guide service, Sierra Corporation, after your first month of operations (see International Note).

International Notes highlight differences between U.S. and international accounting standards.

To summarize, you officially started your business in Truckee, California, on October 1, 2025. Sierra provides guide services in the Lake Tahoe area of the Sierra Nevada mountains. Its promotional materials describe outdoor day trips, such as rafting, snowshoeing, and hiking, as well as multi-day backcountry experiences. To minimize your initial investment, your customers either bring their own equipment or rent equipment through local outfitters. The financial statements for Sierra’s first month of business are provided in the following pages.

Income Statement

The income statement reports a company’s revenues and expenses and resulting net income or loss for a period of time (see Decision Tools). To indicate that its income statement reports the results of operations for a specific period of time, Sierra Corporation dates the income statement “For the Month Ended October 31, 2025.” The income statement lists the company’s revenues followed by its expenses. Finally, Sierra determines the net income (or net loss) by deducting expenses from revenues. Sierra’s income statement is shown in Illustration 1.5 (see Helpful Hint). Congratulations, you are already showing a profit!

Decision Tools that are useful for business decision-making are highlighted throughout the text. A summary of the Decision Tools is also provided in each chapter.

ILLUSTRATION 1.5 Sierra Corporation’s income statement

Sierra Corporation
Income Statement
For the Month Ended October 31, 2025
  Revenues      
  Service revenue   $10,600  
  Expenses      
  Salaries and wages expense $5,200    
  Supplies expense 1,500    
  Rent expense 900    
  Interest expense 50    
  Insurance expense 50    
  Depreciation expense 40    
  Total expenses   7,740  
  Net income   $ 2,860  

Why are financial statement users interested in net income?

  • Investors are interested in a company’s past net income because it provides useful information for predicting future net income. Investors buy and sell stock based on their beliefs about a company’s future performance. If investors believe that Sierra will be successful in the future and that this will result in a higher stock price, they will buy its stock.
  • Creditors use the income statement to predict future earnings. When a bank loans money to a company, it believes that it will be repaid in the future. If it didn’t think it would be repaid, it wouldn’t loan the money. Therefore, prior to making the loan the bank loan officer uses the income statement as a source of information to predict whether the company will be profitable enough to repay its loan.

Thus, reporting a strong profit will make it easier for Sierra to raise additional cash either by issuing shares of stock or borrowing.

Amounts received from issuing stock are not revenues, and amounts paid out as dividends are not expenses. As a result, they are not reported on the income statement. For example, Sierra Corporation does not treat as revenue the $10,000 of cash received from issuing new stock (see Illustration 1.8), nor does it regard as a business expense the $500 of dividends paid (see Illustration 1.6) (see Ethics Note).

Retained Earnings Statement

If Sierra Corporation is profitable, at the end of each period it must decide what portion of profits to pay to shareholders in dividends. In theory, it could pay all of its current-period profits, but few companies do this. Why? Because they want to retain part of the profits to allow for further expansion. High-growth companies, such as Google and Facebook, often pay no dividends. Retained earnings is the net income retained in the corporation.

The retained earnings statement shows the amounts and causes of changes in retained earnings for a specific time period (see Decision Tools). The time period is the same as that covered by the income statement. The beginning retained earnings amount appears on the first line of the statement. Then, the company adds net income and deducts dividends to determine the retained earnings at the end of the period. If a company has a net loss, it deducts (rather than adds) that amount in the retained earnings statement. Illustration 1.6 presents Sierra’s retained earnings statement (see Helpful Hint).

ILLUSTRATION 1.6 Sierra Corporation’s retained earnings statement

Sierra Corporation
Retained Earnings Statement
For the Month Ended October 31, 2025
  Retained earnings, October 1 $0
  Add: Net income 2,860  
    2,860  
  Less: Dividends 500  
  Retained earnings, October 31 $2,360  

By monitoring the retained earnings statement, financial statement users can evaluate dividend payment practices.

  • Some investors seek companies, such as Dow Chemical, that have a history of paying high dividends.
  • Other investors seek companies, such as Amazon.com, that reinvest earnings to increase the company’s growth instead of paying dividends.
  • Lenders monitor their corporate customers’ dividend payments because any money paid in dividends reduces a company’s ability to repay its debts.

Balance Sheet

The balance sheet reports assets and claims to assets at a specific point in time (see Decision Tools). Claims to assets are subdivided into two categories: claims of creditors and claims of owners. As noted earlier, claims of creditors are called liabilities. The owners’ claim to assets is called stockholders’ equity.

Illustration 1.7 shows the relationship among the categories on the balance sheet in equation form.

  • This equation is referred to as the basic accounting equation.
  • This relationship is where the name “balance sheet” comes from. Assets must balance with the claims to assets.

ILLUSTRATION 1.7 Basic accounting equation

Assets=Liabilities+StockholdersEquity

As you can see from looking at Sierra Corporation’s balance sheet in Illustration 1.8, the balance sheet presents the company’s financial position as of a specific date—in this case, October 31, 2025 (see Helpful Hint). It lists assets first. Assets are listed in the order of their liquidity, that is, how quickly they could be converted to cash.

Assets are followed by liabilities and stockholders’ equity (see Alternative Terminology). Stockholders’ equity is comprised of two parts: (1) common stock and (2) retained earnings. As noted earlier, common stock results when the company sells new shares of stock; retained earnings is the net income retained in the corporation. Sierra has common stock of $10,000 and retained earnings of $2,360, for total stockholders’ equity of $12,360.

ILLUSTRATION 1.8 Sierra Corporation’s balance sheet

Sierra Corporation
Balance Sheet
October 31, 2025
  Assets  
  Cash   $15,200  
  Accounts receivable   200  
  Supplies   1,000  
  Prepaid insurance   550  
  Equipment, net   4,960  
  Total assets   $21,910  
  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity  
  Liabilities      
  Notes payable $ 5,000    
  Accounts payable 2,500    
  Unearned service revenue 800    
  Salaries and wages payable 1,200    
  Interest payable 50    
  Total liabilities   $ 9,550  
  Stockholders’ equity      
  Common stock 10,000    
  Retained earnings 2,360    
  Total stockholders’ equity   12,360  
  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $21,910  

Creditors analyze a company’s balance sheet to determine the likelihood that they will be repaid.

  • Creditors carefully evaluate the nature of the company’s assets and liabilities.
  • In operating Sierra’s guide service, the balance sheet will be used to determine whether cash on hand is sufficient for immediate cash needs.
  • The balance sheet will also be used to evaluate the relationship between debt and stockholders’ equity to determine whether the company has a satisfactory proportion of debt and common stock financing.

Statement of Cash Flows

The primary purpose of a statement of cash flows is to provide financial information about the cash receipts and cash payments of a business for a specific period of time (see Decision Tools). To help investors, creditors, and others in their analysis of a company’s cash position, the statement of cash flows reports the cash effects of a company’s operating, investing, and financing activities. In addition, the statement shows the net increase or decrease in cash during the period, and the amount of cash at the end of the period.

Users are interested in the statement of cash flows because they want to know what is happening to a company’s most important resource. The statement of cash flows provides answers to these simple but important questions:

  • Where did cash come from during the period?
  • How was cash used during the period?
  • What was the change in the cash balance during the period?

The statement of cash flows for Sierra Corporation, in Illustration 1.9, shows that cash increased $15,200 during the month (see Helpful Hint). This increase resulted because operating activities (services to clients) increased cash $5,700, and financing activities increased cash $14,500. Investing activities used $5,000 of cash for the purchase of equipment.

ILLUSTRATION 1.9 Sierra Corporation’s statement of cash flows

Sierra Corporation
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Month Ended October 31, 2025
  Cash flows from operating activities      
  Cash receipts from operating activities $11,200    
  Cash payments for operating activities (5,500)    
  Net cash provided by operating activities   $ 5,700  
  Cash flows from investing activities      
  Purchased office equipment (5,000)    
  Net cash used by investing activities   (5,000)  
  Cash flows from financing activities      
  Issuance of common stock 10,000    
  Issuance of note payable 5,000    
  Payment of dividend (500)    
  Net cash provided by financing activities   14,500  
  Net increase in cash   15,200  
  Cash at beginning of period   0  
  Cash at end of period   $15,200  

Interrelationships of Statements

Illustration 1.10 shows the financial statements of Sierra Corporation (see Helpful Hints). Because the results on some financial statements become inputs to other statements, the statements are interrelated. These interrelationships can be seen in Sierra’s financial statements, as follows.

  1. The retained earnings statement uses the results of the income statement. Sierra reported net income of $2,860 for the period. Net income is added to the beginning amount of retained earnings to determine ending retained earnings.
  2. The balance sheet and retained earnings statement are also interrelated. Sierra reports the ending amount of $2,360 on the retained earnings statement as the retained earnings amount on the balance sheet.
  3. The statement of cash flows relates to information on the balance sheet. The statement of cash flows shows how the Cash account changed during the period. It shows the amount of cash at the beginning of the period, the sources and uses of cash during the period, and the $15,200 of cash at the end of the period. The ending amount of cash shown on the statement of cash flows must agree with the amount of cash on the balance sheet.

Study these interrelationships carefully. To prepare financial statements, you must understand the sequence in which these amounts are determined and how each statement impacts the next.

ILLUSTRATION 1.10 Sierra Corporation’s financial statements

An illustration shows the relationship between the financial statements of Sierra Corporation including the Income Statement, Retained Earnings Statement, Balance Sheet, and Statement of Cash Flows. The first statement displays a three-line heading consisting of name of the company, Sierra Corporation; the type of statement, Income Statement; and the period for which the statement has been made, For the Month Ended October 31, 2025. There are two sections in this statement; the first section, Revenues, has a label, (indented) Service Revenue of $10,600, which is displayed in the far right column. The second section, Expenses, has the following entries under it, which are slightly indented in the next line: Salaries and Wages Expense, $5,200; Supplies Expense, 1,500; Rent Expense, 900; Interest Expense, 50; Insurance Expense, 50; and Depreciation Expense, 40; these amounts are listed in the column second to the right. The sum is entered on the line below the expenses with a label, further indented, of Total Expenses displayed in the far right column as 7,740. The line below is labeled Net income, and is determined by subtracting Total Expenses from Revenues, calculated as $2,860, displayed in the far right column and highlighted. The second statement has a three-line heading consisting of the name of the company, Sierra Corporation; the type of statement, Retained Earnings Statement; and the period for which the statement is prepared, For the Month Ended October 31, 2025. The entries are listed as follows: Retained earnings, October 1 is $0; add net income of $2,860, carried from income statement and highlighted. The sum of the above two terms is calculated to be 2,860; Less: Dividends of amount 500 are subtracted from it, resulting in Retained earnings, October 31 displayed as $2,360, and highlighted.  The third statement has a three-line heading consisting of the name of the company, Sierra Corporation; the type of statement, Balance Sheet; and the period for which the statement is prepared, October 31, 2025. There are two sections in this statement. The first section, Asset shows a list of account titles on the left side with their respective amount on the right side as follows: Cash, $15,200, is highlighted; Accounts Receivable, 200; Advertising Supplies, 1,000; Prepaid insurance, 550; Equipment, net,  4,960; The line below is labeled Total assets with the sum calculated to be $21,910.  The second section, Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity shows a list of account titles on the left side with their respective amount on the right side under liabilities as follows: Notes payable, $5,000; Accounts payable, 2,500; Unearned service revenue, 800; Salaries and wages payable, 1,200; Interest payable, 50. The line below is labeled Total liabilities with the sum calculated to be $9,550. Under Stockholders’ equity, a list of account titles on the left side with their respective amount on the right side as follows: Common stock, 10,000; Retained earnings, 2,360, is highlighted. The line below is labeled Total stockholders’ equity with the sum calculated to be 12,360. The sum, Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity is displayed as $21,910. An arrow from Cash points towards Retained earnings of 2,360. The fourth statement has a three-line heading consisting of the name of the company, Sierra Corporation; the type of statement, Statement of Cash Flows; and the period for which the statement is prepared, For the Month Ended October 31, 2025. This is divided into three sections, cash flows from operating activities, cash flow from investing activities, cash flows from financing activities. The account titles under cash flows from operating activities includes: Cash receipts from operating activities, $11,200 (slightly indented); plus Cash payments from operating activities, negative 5,500 shown in parentheses (slightly indented), with net cash provided by operating activities (further indented) displayed as $5,700 in the far right column. Under cash flows from investing activities, purchased office equipment is displayed as negative 5,000 shown in parentheses (slightly indented), with net cash used by investing activities slightly indented in the next line and displayed as negative 5,000 shown in parentheses in the far right column. Under cash flows from financing activities and slightly indented is, Issuance of common stock displayed as 10,000; Issuance of note payable displayed as 5,000; Payment of dividend displayed as negative 500 shown in parentheses, with net cash provided by financing activities, slightly indented in the next line and displayed as 14,500 on the right side. The sum of the above three subtotals is net increase in cash, displayed as 15,200. Below it, cash at the beginning displayed as 0. The cash at the end of the period displayed as $15,200 and highlighted. An arrow from cash in the balance sheet points towards cash at the end of the period.

Elements of an Annual Report

Publicly traded U.S. companies must provide shareholders with an annual report. The annual report always includes the financial statements introduced in this chapter. The annual report also includes other important information such as a management discussion and analysis section, notes to the financial statements, and an independent auditor’s report. No analysis of a company’s financial situation and performance is complete without a review of these items.

Management Discussion and Analysis

The management discussion and analysis (MD&A) section presents management’s views on the company’s:

  • Ability to pay near-term obligations.
  • Ability to fund operations and expansion.
  • Results of operations.

Management must highlight favorable or unfavorable trends and identify significant events and uncertainties that affect these three factors. This discussion obviously involves a number of subjective estimates and opinions. A brief excerpt from the MD&A section of a recent Columbia Sportswear annual report, which addresses its liquidity requirements, is presented in Illustration 1.11.

ILLUSTRATION 1.11 Columbia Sportswear’s management discussion and analysis

Real World
Columbia Sportswear Company
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of
Seasonality and Variability of Business
  Our business is affected by the general seasonal trends common to the industry, including discretionary consumer shopping and spending patterns, as well as seasonal weather. Our products are marketed on a seasonal basis, and our sales are weighted substantially toward the third and fourth quarters, while our operating costs are more equally distributed throughout the year.  

Notes to the Financial Statements

Explanatory notes and supporting schedules accompany every set of financial statements and are an integral part of the statements. The notes to the financial statements clarify the financial statements and provide additional detail. Information in the notes does not have to be quantifiable (numeric). Examples of notes are:

  • Descriptions of the significant accounting policies and methods used in preparing the statements.
  • Explanations of uncertainties and contingencies.
  • Various statistics and details too voluminous to be included in the statements.

The notes are essential to understanding a company’s operating performance and financial position.

Illustration 1.12 is an excerpt from the notes to recent Columbia Sportswear financial statements. It describes the methods that the company uses to account for revenues.

ILLUSTRATION 1.12 Notes to Columbia Sportswear’s financial statements

Real World
Columbia Sportswear Company
Notes to Financial Statements
Revenue Recognition
  Revenues are recognized when our performance obligations are satisfied as evidenced by transfer of control of promised goods to our customers, in an amount that reflects the consideration we expect to be entitled to receive in exchanges for those goods or services. Within our wholesale channel, control generally transfers to the customer upon shipment to, or upon receipt by, the customer depending on the terms of sale with the customer. Within our DTC channel, control generally transfers to the customer at the time of sale within our retail stores and concession-based arrangements and upon shipment to the customer with respect to e-commerce transactions.  

Auditor’s Report

An auditor’s report is prepared by an independent outside auditor. It states the auditor’s opinion as to the fairness of the presentation of the financial position and results of operations and their conformance with generally accepted accounting principles.

An auditor is an accounting professional who conducts an independent examination of a company’s financial statements. Only accountants who meet certain criteria and thereby attain the designation certified public accountant (CPA) may certify audits.

  • If the auditor is satisfied that the financial statements provide a fair representation of the company’s financial position and results of operations in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, then the auditor expresses an unqualified opinion.
  • If the auditor expresses anything other than an unqualified opinion, then readers should only use the financial statements with caution.
  • That is, without an unqualified opinion, we cannot have complete confidence that the financial statements give a fair picture of the company’s financial health.
  • A new auditing standard requires the auditor to report any critical audit matters. These are items that are material in size that involve challenging, subjective, or complex auditor judgment.

For example, Blockbuster once dominated movie rentals in the United States with over 9,000 stores. But it faltered when the upstart Netflix rapidly took over the movie-rental business. Blockbuster’s auditor then stated that its financial situation raised “substantial doubt about the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern.” Shortly after that, the company filed for bankruptcy.

Illustration 1.13 is an excerpt from the auditor’s report from Columbia Sportswear’s 2019 annual report. Columbia received an unqualified opinion from its auditor, Deloitte & Touche.

ILLUSTRATION 1.13 Excerpt from auditor’s report on Columbia Sportswear’s financial statements

Real World
Columbia Sportswear Company
Excerpt from Auditor’s Report
  We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Columbia Sportswear Company and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2019 and 2018, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2019, and the related notes and schedule listed in the Index at Item 15 (collectively referred to as the “financial statements”). In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2019 and 2018, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years ended December 31, 2019, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.  

Using the Decision Tools comprehensive exercises ask you to apply business information and the decision tools presented in the chapter. Most of these exercises are based on the companies highlighted in the Feature Story.

Appendix 1A Career Opportunities in Accounting

Why is accounting such a popular major and career choice?

  1. There are a lot of jobs. In many cities in recent years, the demand for accountants exceeded the supply. Not only are there a lot of jobs, but there are a wide array of opportunities. As one accounting organization observed, “accounting is one degree with 360 degrees of opportunity.”
  2. Accounting matters. Interest in accounting has increased, ironically, because of the attention caused by the accounting failures of companies such as Enron and WorldCom. These widely publicized scandals revealed the important role that accounting plays in society. Most people want to make a difference, and an accounting career provides many opportunities to contribute to society.
  3. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) significantly increased the accounting and internal control requirements for corporations. This dramatically increased demand for professionals with accounting training.
  4. Emerging technologies such as automation, blockchain, and data analytics are changing the way accountants work. With those skills, accountants add value to business decision-making.

Accountants are in such demand that it is not uncommon for accounting students to have accepted a job offer a year before graduation. As Illustration 1A.1 reveals, the job options of people with accounting degrees are virtually unlimited.

ILLUSTRATION 1A.1 Career options in accounting

Areas of Accounting Careers Type of Work Examples of Employers Certification Opportunities
Public accounting
  • In auditing, accountants examine (audit) the financial statements and issue opinions on the fairness of the financial presentation.
  • In taxation, CPAs offer tax advice and planning.
  • In management consulting, accountants design and install accounting software and enterprise resource planning systems and support mergers and acquisitions.
Deloitte, EY, KPMG, PwC, Grant Thornton, BDO, Baker Tilly Certified public accountants (CPAs), enrolled agent (EA), certified information systems auditor (CISA)
Private accounting
  • Financial accountants manage the accounting information system and prepare financial statements.
  • Managerial accountants manage costs and budgets.
  • Internal auditors ensure compliance with policies and regulations.
For-profit: Starbucks, Google, Under Armour Non-profit: Salvation Army, Red Cross Certified management accountant (CMA), certified internal auditor (CIA)
Governmental accounting
  • There are opportunities in government at the local, state, and federal levels.
Internal Revenue Service (IRS), Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) Certified government financial manager (CGFM)
Forensic accounting Insurance companies, law firms, FBI Certified fraud examiner (CFE)

“Show Me the Money”

How much can a new accountant make? Take a look at the average salaries for college graduates in public and private accounting shown in Illustration 1A.2.1 Keep in mind if you also have a CPA license, you’ll make 10–15% more when you start out.

ILLUSTRATION 1A.2 Salary estimates for jobs in public and corporate accounting

Employer Jr. Level (0–3 yrs.) Sr. Level (4–6 yrs.)
Public accounting (large firm) $63,250–$83,250 $78,500–$106,500
Public accounting (medium firm) $56,500–$67,750 $70,500–$96,000
Public accounting (small company) $51,500–$60,500 $63,750–$81,500
Corporate accounting (large company) $53,750–$69,500 $68,750–$87,750

Illustration 1A.3 lists some examples of upper-level salaries for managers in corporate accounting. Note that geographic region, experience, education, CPA certification, and company size each play a role in determining salary.

ILLUSTRATION 1A.3 Upper-level management salaries in corporate accounting

Position Large Company Small to Medium Company
Chief financial officer $207,000–$465,750 $105,250–$208,750
Corporate controller $140,000–$224,750 $92,000–$161,250
Tax manager $112,000–$158,250 $88,000–$124,750

The Review and Practice section provides opportunities for students to review key concepts and terms as well as complete multiple-choice questions, brief exercises, exercises, and a comprehensive problem. Detailed solutions are also included.

Review and Practice

Learning Objectives Review

A sole proprietorship is a business owned by one person. A partnership is a business owned by two or more people associated as partners. A corporation is a separate legal entity for which evidence of ownership is provided by shares of stock.

Internal users are managers who need accounting information to plan, organize, and run business operations. The primary external users are investors and creditors. Investors (stockholders) use accounting information to decide whether to buy, hold, or sell shares of a company’s stock. Creditors (suppliers and bankers) use accounting information to assess the risk of granting credit or loaning money to a business. Other groups who have an indirect interest in a business are taxing authorities, customers, labor unions, and regulatory agencies.

Financing activities involve collecting the necessary funds to support the business. Investing activities involve acquiring the resources necessary to run the business. Operating activities involve putting the resources of the business into action to generate a profit.

An income statement presents the revenues and expenses of a company for a specific period of time. A retained earnings statement summarizes the changes in retained earnings that have occurred for a specific period of time. A balance sheet reports the assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity of a business at a specific date. A statement of cash flows summarizes information concerning the cash inflows (receipts) and outflows (payments) for a specific period of time.

Assets are resources owned by a business. Liabilities are the debts and obligations of the business. Liabilities represent claims of creditors on the assets of the business. Stockholders’ equity represents the claims of owners on the assets of the business. Stockholders’ equity is subdivided into two parts: common stock and retained earnings. The basic accounting equation is Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity.

Within the annual report, the management discussion and analysis provides management’s interpretation of the company’s results and financial position as well as a discussion of plans for the future. Notes to the financial statements provide additional explanation or detail to make the financial statements more informative. The auditor’s report expresses an opinion as to whether the financial statements present fairly the company’s results of operations and financial position.

Accounting offers many different jobs in fields such as public and private accounting, governmental, and forensic accounting. Accounting is a popular major because there are many different types of jobs, with unlimited potential for career advancement.

Decision Tools Review

Decision Checkpoints Info Needed for Decision Tool to Use for Decision How to Evaluate Results
Are the company’s operations profitable? Income statement The income statement reports a company’s revenues and expenses and resulting net income or loss for a period of time. If the company’s revenues exceed its expenses, it will report net income; otherwise, it will report a net loss.
What is the company’s policy toward dividends and growth? Retained earnings statement The retained earnings statement reports how much of this year’s income the company paid out in dividends to shareholders. A company striving for rapid growth will pay a low (or no) dividend.
Does the company rely primarily on debt or stockholders’ equity to finance its assets? Balance sheet The balance sheet reports the company’s resources and claims to those resources; there are two types of claims: liabilities and stockholders’ equity. Compare the amount of debt versus the amount of stockholders’ equity to determine whether the company relies more on creditors or owners for its financing.
Does the company generate sufficient cash from operations to fund its investing activities? Statement of cash flows The statement of cash flows shows the amount of net cash provided or used by operating activities, investing activities, and financing activities. Compare the amount of net cash provided by operating activities with the amount of net cash used by investing activities. Any deficiency in cash from operating activities must be made up with cash from financing activities.

Glossary Review

Accounting
The information system that identifies, records, and communicates the economic events of an organization to interested users.
Annual report
A report prepared by corporate management that presents financial information including financial statements, a management discussion and analysis section, notes, and an independent auditor’s report.
Assets
Resources owned by a business.
*Auditing
The examination of financial statements by a certified public accountant in order ro express an opinion as to the fairness of presentation.
Auditor’s report
A report prepared by an independent outside auditor stating the auditor’s opinion as to the fairness of the presentation of the financial position and results of operations and their conformance with generally accepted accounting principles.
Balance sheet
A financial statement that reports the assets and claims to those assets at a specific point in time.
Basic accounting equation
Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity.
Certified public accountant (CPA)
An individual who has met certain criteria and is thus allowed to perform audits of corporations.
Common stock
Term used to describe the total amount paid in by stockholders for the shares they purchase.
Corporation
A business organized as a separate legal entity owned by stockholders.
Data analytics
The evaluation of data, often employing both software and statistics, to draw inferences.
Dividends
Payments of cash from a corporation to its stockholders.
Expenses
The cost of assets consumed or services used in the process of generating revenues.
*Forensic accounting
An area of accounting that uses accounting, auditing, and investigative skills to conduct investigations into theft and fraud.
Income statement
A financial statement that reports a company’s revenues and expenses and resulting net income or net loss for a specific period of time.
Liabilities
Amounts owed to creditors in the form of debts and other obligations.
*Management consulting
An area of public accounting ranging from development of accounting and computer systems to support services for marketing projects and merger and acquisition activities.
Management discussion and analysis (MD&A)
A section of the annual report that presents management’s views on the company’s ability to pay near-term obligations, its ability to fund operations and expansion, and its results of operations.
Net income
The amount by which revenues exceed expenses.
Net loss
The amount by which expenses exceed revenues.
Notes to the financial statements
Notes that clarify information presented in the financial statements and provide additional detail.
Partnership
A business owned by two or more persons associated as partners.
Retained earnings
The amount of net income retained in the corporation.
Retained earnings statement
A financial statement that summarizes the amounts and causes of changes in retained earnings for a specific time period.
Revenue
The increase in assets or decrease in liabilities resulting from the sale of goods or the performance of services in the normal course of business.
Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX)
Regulations passed by Congress to reduce unethical corporate behavior.
Sole proprietorship
A business owned by one person.
Statement of cash flows
A financial statement that provides financial information about the cash receipts and cash payments of a business for a specific period of time.
Stockholders’ equity
The owners’ claim to assets.
*Taxation
An area of public accounting involving tax advice, tax planning, preparing tax returns, and representing clients before governmental agencies.

Practice Multiple-Choice Questions

1. (LO 1) Which is not one of the three forms of business organization?

  1. Sole proprietorship.
  2. Creditorship.
  3. Partnership.
  4. Corporation.

Answer

b. Creditorship is not a form of business organization. The other choices are incorrect because (a) sole proprietorship, (c) partnership, and (d) corporation are all forms of business organization.

2. (LO 1) Which is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships?

  1. Lower taxes.
  2. Harder to transfer ownership.
  3. Reduced legal liability for investors.
  4. Most common form of organization.

Answer

c. An advantage of corporations is that investors are not personally liable for debts of the business. The other choices are incorrect because (a) lower taxes, (b) harder to transfer ownership, and (d) most common form of organization are not true of corporations.

3. (LO 1) Which statement about users of accounting information is incorrect?

  1. Management is considered an internal user.
  2. Taxing authorities are considered external users.
  3. Present creditors are considered external users.
  4. Regulatory authorities are considered internal users.

Answer

d. Regulatory authorities are considered external, not internal, users. The other choices are true statements.

4. (LO 1) Which of the following did not result from the Sarbanes-Oxley Act?

  1. Top management must now certify the accuracy of financial information.
  2. Penalties for fraudulent activity increased.
  3. Independence of auditors increased.
  4. Tax rates on corporations increased.

Answer

d. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) was created to reduce unethical corporate behavior and decrease the likelihood of future corporate scandals, not to address tax rates. The other choices are incorrect because (a) top management must now certify the accuracy of financial information, (b) penalties for fraudulent activity increased, and (c) increased independence of auditors all resulted from SOX.

5. (LO 2) Which is not one of the three primary business activities?

  1. Financing.
  2. Operating.
  3. Advertising.
  4. Investing.

Answer

c. Advertising is a type of operating activity. The other choices are incorrect because (a) financing, (b) operating, and (d) investing are the three primary business activities.

6. (LO 2) Which of the following is an example of a financing activity?

  1. Issuing shares of common stock.
  2. Selling goods on account.
  3. Buying delivery equipment.
  4. Buying inventory.

Answer

a. Issuing shares of common stock is a financing activity. The other choices are incorrect because (b) selling goods on account is an operating activity, (c) buying delivery equipment is an investing activity, and (d) buying inventory is an operating activity.

7. (LO 2) Net income will result during a time period when:

  1. assets exceed liabilities.
  2. assets exceed revenues.
  3. expenses exceed revenues.
  4. revenues exceed expenses.

Answer

d. When a company earns more revenues than expenses, it will report net income during a time period. The other choices are incorrect because (a) assets and liabilities are on the balance sheet, not the income statement; (b) assets are on the balance sheet, not the income statement; and (c) net income results when revenues exceed expenses, not when expenses exceed revenues.

8. (LO 3) The financial statements for Macias Corporation contained the following information.

Accounts receivable $ 5,000
Sales revenue 75,000
Cash 15,000
Salaries and wages expense 20,000
Rent expense 10,000

What was Macias Corporation’s net income?

  1. $60,000.
  2. $15,000.
  3. $65,000.
  4. $45,000.

Answer

d. Net income = Sales revenue ($75,000) − Salaries and wages expense ($20,000) − Rent expense ($10,000) = $45,000. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

9. (LO 3) What section of a statement of cash flows indicates the cash spent on new equipment during the past accounting period?

  1. The investing activities section.
  2. The operating activities section.
  3. The financing activities section.
  4. The statement of cash flows does not give this information.

Answer

a. The investing activities section of the statement of cash flows provides information about property, plant, and equipment accounts, not (b) the operating activities section or (c) the financing activities section. Choice (d) is incorrect as the statement of cash flows does provide this information.

10. (LO 3) Which statement presents information as of a specific point in time?

  1. Income statement.
  2. Balance sheet.
  3. Statement of cash flows.
  4. Retained earnings statement.

Answer

b. The balance sheet presents information as of a specific point in time. The other choices are incorrect because the (a) income statement, (c) statement of cash flows, and (d) retained earnings statement all cover a period of time.

11. (LO 3) Which financial statement reports assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity?

  1. Income statement.
  2. Retained earnings statement.
  3. Balance sheet.
  4. Statement of cash flows.

Answer

c. The balance sheet is a formal presentation of the accounting equation, such that Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, not the (a) income statement, (b) retained earnings statement, or (d) statement of cash flows.

12. (LO 3) Stockholders’ equity represents:

  1. claims of creditors.
  2. claims of employees.
  3. the difference between revenues and expenses.
  4. claims of owners.

Answer

d. Stockholders’ equity represents claims of owners. The other choices are incorrect because (a) claims of creditors and (b) claims of employees are liabilities. Choice (c) is incorrect because the difference between revenues and expenses is net income.

13. (LO 3) As of December 31, 2025, Rockford Corporation has assets of $3,500 and stockholders’ equity of $1,500. What are the liabilities for Rockford as of December 31, 2025?

  1. $1,500.
  2. $1,000.
  3. $2,500.
  4. $2,000.

Answer

d. Using the accounting equation, liabilities can be computed by subtracting stockholders’ equity from assets, or $3,500 − $1,500 = $2,000, not (a) $1,500, (b) $1,000, or (c) $2,500.

14. (LO 3) The element of a corporation’s annual report that describes the corporation’s accounting methods is/are the:

  1. notes to the financial statements.
  2. management discussion and analysis.
  3. auditor’s report.
  4. income statement.

Answer

a. The corporation’s accounting methods are described in the notes to the financial statements, not in the (b) management discussion and analysis, (c) auditor’s report, or (d) income statement.

15. (LO 3) The element of the annual report that presents an opinion regarding the fairness of the presentation of the financial position and results of operations is/are the:

  1. income statement.
  2. auditor’s opinion.
  3. balance sheet.
  4. comparative statements.

Answer

b. The element of the annual report that presents an opinion regarding the fairness of the presentation of the financial position and results of operations is the auditor’s opinion, not the (a) income statement, (c) balance sheet, or (d) comparative statements.

Practice Brief Exercises

Use basic accounting equation.

1. (LO 3) At the beginning of the year, Ortiz Company had total assets of $900,000 and total liabilities of $440,000. Answer the following questions.

  1. If total assets decreased $100,000 during the year and total liabilities increased $80,000 during the year, what is the amount of stockholders’ equity at the end of the year?
  2. During the year, total liabilities decreased $100,000 during the year and stockholders’ equity increased $200,000. What is the amount of total assets at the end of the year?
  3. If total assets increased $50,000 during the year and stockholders’ equity increased $60,000 during the year, what is the amount of total liabilities at the end of the year?

Solution

a. Assets Liabilities = Stockholders’ Equity
  ($900,000 – $100,000) ($440,000 + $80,000) = $280,000
b. Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity = Assets
  ($440,000 – $100,000) + ($900,000 – $440,000 + $200,000) = $1,000,000
c. Assets Stockholders’ Equity = Liabilities
  ($900,000 + $50,000) ($900,000 – $440,000 + $60,000) = $430,000

Determine where items appear on financial statements.

2. (LO 3) Indicate whether the following items would appear on the income statement (IS), balance sheet (BS), or retained earnings statement (RES).

  1. ______ Common stock.
  2. ______ Cash.
  3. ______ Salaries and wages expense.
  4. ______ Service revenue.
  5. ______ Accounts payable.

Solution

  1. BS Common stock.
  2. BS Cash.
  3. IS Salaries and wages expense.
  4. IS Service revenue.
  5. BS Accounts payable.

Prepare a balance sheet.

3. (LO 3) Presented below in alphabetical order are balance sheet items for Feagler Company at December 31, 2025. Prepare a balance sheet following the format of Illustration 1.8.

Accounts receivable $12,500
Cash 38,000
Common stock 5,000
Notes payable 40,000
Retained earnings 5,500

Solution

Feagler Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2025
Assets
Cash   $38,000
Accounts receivable   12,500
Total assets   $50,500
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Liabilities    
Notes payable $40,000  
Total liabilities   $40,000
Stockholders’ equity    
Common stock 5,000  
Retained earnings 5,500  
Total stockholders’ equity   10,500
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $50,500

Determine where items appear on financial statements.

4. (LO 3) Identify whether the following items would appear on the balance sheet (BS) or income statement (IS) of a corporation.

  1. ______ Income taxes payable.
  2. ______ Cost of goods sold.
  3. ______ Supplies.
  4. ______ Notes payable.
  5. ______ Salaries and wages expense.
  6. ______ Service revenue.
  7. ______ Depreciation expense.
  8. ______ Prepaid insurance.
  9. ______ Interest payable.

Solution

  1. BS Income taxes payable.
  2. IS Cost of goods sold.
  3. BS Supplies.
  4. BS Notes payable.
  5. IS Salaries and wages expense.
  6. IS Service revenue.
  7. IS Depreciation expense.
  8. BS Prepaid insurance.
  9. BS Interest payable.

Practice Exercises

Prepare an income statement.

1. (LO 3) The following items and amounts were taken from Ricardo Inc.’s 2025 income statement and balance sheet.

Cash $ 84,700 Inventory $ 64,618
Retained earnings 123,192 Accounts receivable 88,419
Cost of goods sold 483,854 Sales revenue 693,485
Salaries and wages expense 125,000 Income taxes payable 6,499
Prepaid insurance 7,818 Accounts payable 49,384
Interest expense 994 Service revenue 8,998

Instructions

Prepare an income statement for Ricardo Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2025.

Solution

Ricardo Inc.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2025
  Revenues      
  Sales revenue $693,485    
  Service revenue 8,998    
  Total revenues   $702,483  
  Expenses      
  Cost of goods sold 483,854    
  Salaries and wages expense 125,000    
  Interest expense 994    
  Total expenses   609,848  
  Net income   $ 92,635  

Compute net income and prepare a balance sheet.

2. (LO 3) Cozy Bear is a private camping ground near the Mountain Home Recreation Area. It has compiled the following financial information as of December 31, 2025.

Service revenue (from camping fees) $148,000 Dividends $9,000
Sales revenue (from general store) 35,000 Bonds payable 50,000
Accounts payable 16,000 Expenses during 2025 135,000
Cash 18,500 Supplies 12,500
Equipment 129,000 Common stock 40,000
    Retained earnings (1/1/2025) 15,000

Instructions

  1. Determine net income from Cozy Bear for 2025.
  2. Prepare a retained earnings statement and a balance sheet for Cozy Bear as of December 31, 2025.

Solution

  1. Service revenue $148,000
    Sales revenues 35,000
    Total revenue 183,000
    Expenses 135,000
    Net income $ 48,000
  2. Cozy Bear
    Retained Earnings Statement
    For the Year Ended December 31, 2025
      Retained earnings, January 1 $15,000  
      Add: Net income 48,000  
        63,000  
      Less: Dividends 9,000  
      Retained earnings, December 31 $54,000  
    Cozy Bear
    Balance Sheet
    December 31, 2025
      Assets  
      Cash   $ 18,500  
      Supplies   12,500  
      Equipment   129,000  
      Total assets   $160,000  
      Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity  
      Liabilities      
      Accounts payable $16,000    
      Bonds payable 50,000    
      Total liabilities   $ 66,000  
      Stockholders’ equity      
      Common stock 40,000    
      Retained earnings 54,000    
      Total stockholders’ equity   94,000  
      Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $160,000  

Practice Problems

Prepare financial statements.

(LO 3) Jeff Andringa, a former college hockey player, quit his job and started Ice Camp, a hockey camp for kids ages 8 to 18. Eventually, he would like to open hockey camps nationwide. Jeff has asked you to help him prepare financial statements at the end of 2025, his first year of operations. He relates the following facts about his business activities.

In order to get the business off the ground, Jeff decided to incorporate. He sold shares of common stock to a few close friends, as well as bought some of the shares himself. He initially raised $25,000 through the sale of these shares. In addition, the company took out a $10,000 loan at a local bank.

Ice Camp purchased, for $12,000 cash, a bus for transporting kids. The company also bought hockey goals and other miscellaneous equipment with $1,500 cash. The company earned camp tuition of $100,000 during the year but had collected only $80,000 of this amount. Thus, at the end of the year, its customers still owed $20,000. The company rents time at a local rink for $50 per hour. Total rink rental costs during the year were $8,000, insurance was $10,000, salary expense was $20,000, and supplies used totaled $9,000, all of which were paid in cash. The company incurred $800 in interest expense on the bank loan, which it still owed at the end of the year.

The company paid dividends during the year of $5,000 cash. The balance in the corporate bank account at December 31, 2025, was $49,500.

Instructions

Using the format of the Sierra Corporation statements in this chapter, prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows. (Hint: Prepare the statements in the order stated to take advantage of the flow of information from one statement to the next, as shown in Illustration 1.10.)

Solution

Ice Camp
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2025
  Revenues      
  Service revenue   $100,000  
  Expenses      
  Salaries and wages expense $20,000    
  Insurance expense 10,000    
  Supplies expense 9,000    
  Rent expense 8,000    
  Interest expense 800    
  Total expenses   47,800  
  Net income   $ 52,200  
Ice Camp
Retained Earnings Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2025
  Retained earnings, January 1, 2025 $0  
  Add: Net income 52,200  
    52,200  
  Less: Dividends 5,000  
  Retained earnings, December 31, 2025 $47,200  
Ice Camp
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2025
  Assets  
  Cash   $49,500  
  Accounts receivable   20,000  
  Equipment ($12,000 + $1,500)   13,500  
  Total assets   $83,000  
  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity  
  Liabilities      
  Notes payable $10,000    
  Interest payable 800    
  Total liabilities   $10,800  
  Stockholders’ equity      
  Common stock 25,000    
  Retained earnings 47,200    
  Total stockholders’ equity   72,200  
  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $83,000  
Ice Camp
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2025
  Cash flows from operating activities      
  Cash receipts from operating activities $80,000    
  Cash payments for operating activities (47,000)    
  Net cash provided by operating activities   $33,000  
  Cash flows from investing activities      
  Purchase of equipment (13,500)    
  Net cash used by investing activities   (13,500)  
  Cash flows from financing activities      
  Issuance of common stock 25,000    
  Issuance of notes payable 10,000    
  Dividends paid (5,000)    
  Net cash provided by financing activities   30,000  
  Net increase in cash   49,500  
  Cash at beginning of period   0  
  Cash at end of period   $49,500  

Questions

1. What are the three basic forms of business organizations?

2. What are the advantages to a business of being formed as a corporation? What are the disadvantages?

3. What are the advantages to a business of being formed as a partnership or sole proprietorship? What are the disadvantages?

4. Is it possible to create a company using an organizational form that has the advantages of both a partnership and a corporation? Explain.

5. “Accounting is ingrained in our society and is vital to our economic system.” Do you agree? Explain.

6. Who are the internal users of accounting data? How does accounting provide relevant data to the internal users?

7. Who are the external users of accounting data? Give examples.

8. What are the four most common types of data analytics, and what basic question does each address?

9. What are the three main types of business activity? Give examples of each activity.

10. Listed here are some items found in the financial statements of Finzelberg. Indicate in which financial statement(s) each item would appear.

  1. Service revenue.
  2. Equipment.
  3. Advertising expense.
  4. Accounts receivable.
  5. Common stock.
  6. Interest payable.

11. Why would a bank want to monitor the dividend payment practices of the corporations to which it lends money?

12. “A company’s net income appears directly on the income statement and the retained earnings statement, and it is included indirectly in the company’s balance sheet.” Do you agree? Explain.

13. What is the primary purpose of the statement of cash flows?

14. What are the three main categories of the statement of cash flows? Why do you think these categories were chosen?

15. What is retained earnings? What items increase the balance in retained earnings? What items decrease the balance in retained earnings?

16. What is the basic accounting equation?

17.

  1. Define the terms assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity.
  2. What items affect stockholders’ equity?

18. Which of these items are liabilities of White Glove Cleaning Service?

  1. Cash.
  2. Accounts payable.
  3. Dividends.
  4. Accounts receivable.
  5. Supplies.
  6. Equipment.
  7. Salaries and wages payable.
  8. Service revenue.
  9. Rent expense.

19. How are each of the following financial statements interrelated? (a) Retained earnings statement and income statement. (b) Retained earnings statement and balance sheet. (c) Balance sheet and statement of cash flows.

20. What is the purpose of the management discussion and analysis section (MD&A)?

21. Why is it important for financial statements to receive an unqualified auditor’s opinion?

22. What types of information are presented in the notes to the financial statements?

23. The accounting equation is Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. Appendix A reproduces Apple’s financial statements. Replacing words in the equation with dollar amounts, what is Apple’s accounting equation at September 26, 2020?

24. What are the characteristics of a “critical audit matter”?

Brief Exercises

Describe forms of business organization.

BE1.1 (LO 1), K Match each of the following forms of business organization with a set of characteristics: sole proprietorship (SP), partnership (P), and corporation (C).

  1. _____ Shared control, tax advantages, increased skills and resources.
  2. _____ Simple to set up and maintains control with owner.
  3. _____ Easier to transfer ownership and raise funds, no personal liability.

Identify users of accounting information.

BE1.2 (LO 1), K The following lists situations that require the use of accounting information.

  1. Trying to determine whether the company complied with tax laws.
  2. Trying to determine whether the company can pay its obligations.
  3. Trying to determine whether an advertising proposal will be cost-effective.
  4. Trying to determine whether the company’s net income will result in a stock price increase.
  5. Trying to determine whether the company should employ debt or equity financing.

Match each of the situations with the following users of accounting information.

  1. _____ Investors in common stock.
  2. _____ Marketing managers.
  3. _____ Creditors.
  4. _____ Chief financial officer.
  5. _____ Internal Revenue Service.

Classify items by activity.

BE1.3 (LO 2), K Indicate to which business activity, operating activity (O), investing activity (I), or financing activity (F), each item relates.

  1. _____ Cash received from customers.
  2. _____ Cash paid to stockholders (dividends).
  3. _____ Cash received from issuing new common stock.
  4. _____ Cash paid to suppliers.
  5. _____ Cash paid to purchase a new office building.

Determine effect of transactions on stockholders’ equity.

BE1.4 (LO 3), C Presented below are a number of transactions. Determine whether each transaction affects common stock (C), dividends (D), revenues (R), expenses (E), or does not affect stockholders’ equity (NSE). Provide titles for the revenues and expenses.

  1. _____ Costs incurred for advertising.
  2. _____ Cash received for services performed.
  3. _____ Costs incurred for insurance.
  4. _____ Amounts paid to employees.
  5. _____ Cash distributed to stockholders.
  6. _____ Cash received in exchange for allowing the use of the company’s building.
  7. _____ Costs incurred for utilities used.
  8. _____ Cash purchase of equipment.
  9. _____ Cash received from investors.

Prepare a balance sheet.

BE1.5 (LO 3), AP In alphabetical order below are balance sheet items for Karol Company at December 31, 2025. Prepare a balance sheet following the format of Illustration 1.8.

Accounts payable $65,000
Accounts receivable 71,000
Cash 22,000
Common stock 18,000
Retained earnings 10,000

Determine where items appear on financial statements.

BE1.6 (LO 3), K Eskimo Pie Corporation markets a broad range of frozen treats, including its famous Eskimo Pie ice cream bars. The following items were taken from a recent income statement and balance sheet. In each case, identify whether the item would appear on the balance sheet (BS) or income statement (IS).

  1. _____ Income tax expense.
  2. _____ Inventory.
  3. _____ Accounts payable.
  4. _____ Retained earnings.
  5. _____ Equipment.
  6. _____ Sales revenue.
  7. _____ Cost of goods sold.
  8. _____ Common stock.
  9. _____ Accounts receivable.
  10. _____ Interest expense.

Determine proper financial statement.

BE1.7 (LO 3), K Indicate which statement you would examine to find each of the following items: income statement (IS), balance sheet (BS), retained earnings statement (RES), or statement of cash flows (SCF).

  1. _____ Revenue during the period.
  2. _____ Supplies on hand at the end of the year.
  3. _____ Cash received from issuing new bonds during the period.
  4. _____ Total debts outstanding at the end of the period.

Use basic accounting equation.

BE1.8 (LO 3), AP Use the basic accounting equation to answer these questions.

  1. The liabilities of Lantz Company are $90,000 and the stockholders’ equity is $230,000. What is the amount of Lantz’s total assets?
  2. The total assets of Salley Company are $170,000 and its stockholders’ equity is $80,000. What is the amount of its total liabilities?
  3. The total assets of Brandon Co. are $800,000 and its liabilities are equal to one-fourth of its total assets. What is the amount of Brandon’s stockholders’ equity?

Use basic accounting equation.

BE1.9 (LO 3), AP At the beginning of the year, Morales Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $500,000. (Treat each item independently.)

  1. If total assets increased $150,000 during the year and total liabilities decreased $80,000, what is the amount of stockholders’ equity at the end of the year?
  2. During the year, total liabilities increased $100,000 and stockholders’ equity decreased $70,000. What is the amount of total assets at the end of the year?
  3. If total assets decreased $80,000 and stockholders’ equity increased $110,000 during the year, what is the amount of total liabilities at the end of the year?

Identify assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity.

BE1.10 (LO 3), K Indicate whether each of these items is an asset (A), a liability (L), or part of stockholders’ equity (SE).

  1. _____ Accounts receivable.
  2. _____ Salaries and wages payable.
  3. _____ Equipment.
  4. _____ Supplies.
  5. _____ Common stock.
  6. _____ Notes payable.

Determine required parts of annual report.

BE1.11 (LO 3), K Which is not a required part of an annual report of a publicly traded company?

  1. Statement of cash flows.
  2. Notes to the financial statements.
  3. Management discussion and analysis.
  4. All of these are required.

DO IT! Exercises

Identify benefits of business organization forms.

DO IT! 1.1a (LO 1), C Identify each of the following organizational characteristics with the business organizational form or forms with which it is associated.

  1. Easier to transfer ownership.
  2. Easier to raise funds.
  3. More owner control.
  4. Tax advantages.
  5. No personal legal liability.

Identify accounting terms.

DO IT 1.1b (LO 1), C Match each of the following terms with its definition, classification type, or associated phrase.

  1. _____ Accounting.
  2. _____ Internal users of financial information.
  3. _____ Element of Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
  4. _____ External users of financial information.
  5. _____ Steps in solving an ethical dilemma.
  1. Creditors, regulatory authorities.
  2. Increased independence of outside auditors.
  3. Information system that identifies, records, and communicates the economic events of an organization to interested users.
  4. Identify the stakeholders.
  5. Production supervisors, company officers.

Classify financial statement elements.

DO IT! 1.2 (LO 2), K Classify each item as an asset, liability, common stock, revenue, or expense.

  1. Issuance of ownership shares.
  2. Land purchased.
  3. Amounts owed to suppliers.
  4. Bonds payable.
  5. Amount recorded from selling a product.
  6. Cost of advertising.

Prepare financial statements.

DO IT! 1.3a (LO 3), AP Gray Corporation began operations on January 1, 2025. The following information is available for Gray on December 31, 2025.

Accounts payable $ 5,000 Notes payable $ 7,000
Accounts receivable 2,000 Rent expense 10,000
Advertising expense 4,000 Retained earnings ?
Cash 3,100 Service revenue 25,000
Common stock 15,000 Supplies 1,900
Dividends 2,500 Supplies expense 1,700
Equipment 26,800    

Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet for Gray Corporation.

Identify components of annual reports.

DO IT! 1.3b (LO 3), K Indicate whether each of the following items is most closely associated with the management discussion and analysis (MD&A), the notes to the financial statements, or the auditor’s report.

  1. Description of ability to pay near-term obligations.
  2. Unqualified opinion.
  3. Details concerning liabilities, too voluminous to be included in the statements.
  4. Description of favorable and unfavorable trends.
  5. Certified public accountant (CPA).
  6. Descriptions of significant accounting policies.

Exercises

Match items with descriptions.

E1.1 (LO 1, 2, 3), K Here is a list of words or phrases discussed in this chapter:

  1. Corporation.
  2. Creditor.
  3. Accounts receivable.
  4. Partnership.
  5. Stockholder.
  6. Common stock.
  7. Accounts payable.
  8. Auditor’s opinion.
  9. Hybrid organizational forms.

Instructions

Match each word or phrase above with the best description of it.

  1. ______ a. An expression about whether financial statements conform with generally accepted accounting principles.
  2. ______ b. A business that raises money by issuing shares of stock.
  3. ______ c. The portion of stockholders’ equity that results from receiving cash from investors.
  4. ______ d. Obligations to suppliers of goods.
  5. ______ e. Amounts due from customers.
  6. ______ f. A party to whom a business owes money.
  7. ______ g. Combines tax advantages with limited liability.
  8. ______ h. A party that invests in common stock.
  9. ______ i. A business that is owned jointly by two or more individuals but does not issue stock.

Identify forms of business organization.

E1.2 (LO 1), C Consider the following statements.

  Sole Proprietorship Partnership Corporation
  1. No personal liability.
  2. Owners pay personal income tax on company income.
  3. Generally the easiest form of organization to raise capital.
  4. Ownership indicated by shares.
  5. Owned by one person.
  6. Limited life.
  7. Usually the easiest form of organization to set up.
     

Instructions

Complete the above by indicating if each of the statements is normally true (T) or false (F) for each type of business organization: sole proprietorship, partnership, and corporation.

Identify users of accounting information.

E1.3 (LO 1), C The following list presents different types of evaluations made by various users of accounting information.

  1. Determining if the company can pay for purchases made on account.
  2. Determining if the company has complied with income tax regulations.
  3. Determining if the company might afford a 1% hourly wage increase.
  4. Determining if an advertising campaign was cost-effective.
  5. Determining if the company’s net income might result in a share price increase.
  6. Determining if the company should use debt or equity financing.

Instructions

Complete the following by indicating (a) the number of the evaluation (1 to 6) that the user would most likely make, and (b) if the user is internal or external.

  (a) Type of Evaluation (b) Type of User
Investor    
Marketing manager    
Creditor    
Chief financial officer    
Internal Revenue Service    
Labor union    

Match items with descriptions.

E1.4 (LO 1, 2, 3), K The following terms or phrases are discussed in this chapter.

  1. Certified public accountant (CPA).
  2. Management discussion and analysis (MD&A).
  3. Revenue.
  4. Dividends.
  5. Stockholders’ equity.
  6. Net loss.
  7. Sole proprietorship.
  8. Basic accounting equation.
  9. Expenses.
  10. Liabilities.
  11. Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX).

Instructions

Match each term or phrase to its description below.

  1. ______ Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity.
  2. ______ An individual who has met certain criteria and is thus allowed to perform audits of corporations.
  3. ______ Payments of cash from a corporation to its stockholders.
  4. ______ The cost of assets consumed or services used in the process of generating revenues.
  5. ______ Amounts owed to creditors in the form of debts and other obligations.
  6. ______ A section of the annual report that presents management’s views on the company’s ability to pay near-term obligations, its ability to fund operations and expansion, and its results of operations.
  7. ______ The amount by which expenses exceed revenues.
  8. ______ The increase in assets or decrease in liabilities resulting from the sale of goods or the performance of services in the normal course of business.
  9. ______ Regulations passed by Congress to reduce unethical corporate behavior.
  10. ______ A business owned by one person.
  11. ______ The owners’ claim to assets.

Identify business activities.

E1.5 (LO 2), C All businesses are involved in three types of activities—financing, investing, and operating. Listed below are the names and descriptions of companies in several different industries.

  1. Abitibi-Consolidated Inc.—manufacturer and marketer of newsprint
  2. California State University—Northridge Student Union—university student union
  3. Oracle Corporation—computer software developer and retailer
  4. Aquilini Investment Group—owner of the Vancouver Canucks ice hockey team
  5. Grant Thornton LLP—professional accounting and business advisory firm
  6. Southwest Airlines—low-cost airline

Instructions

  1. For each of the above companies, provide examples of (1) a financing activity, (2) an investing activity, and (3) an operating activity that the company likely engages in.
  2. Which of the activities that you identified in (a) are common to most businesses? Which activities are not?

Classify business activities.

E1.6 (LO 2), K Consider the following business activities that occur at a Colorado ski area.

  1. ______ Cash receipts from customers paying for daily ski passes.
  2. ______ Payments made to purchase additional snow-making equipment.
  3. ______ Payments made to repair the snow-grooming machines.
  4. ______ Receipt of funds from the bank to finance the purchase of additional snow-making equipment.
  5. ______ Issue of shares to raise funds for a planned expansion.
  6. ______ Repayment of a portion of the bank loan (see item 4).
  7. ______ Payment of salaries to the ski-lift operators.
  8. ______ Payment of dividend to shareholders.

Instructions

Classify each of the above items by type of business activity: operating (O), investing (I), or financing (F).

Classify accounts.

E1.7 (LO 2, 3), C The Bonita Vista Golf & Country Club details the following accounts in its financial statements.

Accounts payable _____
Accounts receivable _____
Equipment _____
Sales revenue _____
Service revenue _____
Inventory _____
Mortgage payable _____
Supplies expense _____
Rent expense _____
Salaries and wages expense _____

Instructions

Classify each of the accounts as an asset (A), liability (L), stockholders’ equity (SE), revenue (R), or expense (E) item.

Identify financial statements.

E1.8 (LO 3), K Consider the following typical accounts and statement items.

  1. ______ Interest income.
  2. ______ Cash
  3. ______ Cash provided by operating activities.
  4. ______ Service revenue.
  5. ______ Common stock.
  6. ______ Dividends.
  7. ______ Retained earnings, beginning of period.
  8. ______ Accounts receivable.
  9. ______ Inventory.
  10. ______ Income tax expense.
  11. ______ Interest expense.
  12. ______ Net cash used by investing activities.
  13. ______ Equipment.
  14. ______ Total stockholders’ equity.
  15. ______ Bank loan payable.

Instructions

Indicate on which statement—income statement (IS), balance sheet (BS), retained earning statement (RE), and/or statement of cash flows (SCF)—you would find each of the above accounts or items.

Prepare income statement and retained earnings statement.

E1.9 (LO 3), AP This information relates to Benser Co. for the year 2025.

Retained earnings, January 1, 2025 $67,000
Advertising expense 1,800
Dividends 6,000
Rent expense 10,400
Service revenue 58,000
Utilities expense 2,400
Salaries and wages expense 30,000

Instructions

Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2025.

Prepare income statement and retained earnings statement.

E1.10 (LO 3), AP Suppose the following information was taken from the 2025 financial statements of pharmaceutical giant Merck & Co. (All dollar amounts are in millions.)

Retained earnings, January 1, 2025 $43,698.8
Cost of goods sold 9,018.9
Selling and administrative expenses 8,543.2
Dividends 3,597.7
Sales revenue 38,576.0
Research and development expense 5,845.0
Income tax expense 2,267.6

Instructions

  1. After analyzing the data, prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2025.
  2. Suppose that Merck decided to reduce its research and development expense by 50%. What would be the short-term implications? What would be the long-term implications? How do you think the stock market would react?

Prepare a retained earnings statement.

E1.11 (LO 3), AP Presented here is information for Zheng Inc. for 2025.

Retained earnings, January 1 $130,000
Service revenue 400,000
Total expenses 175,000
Dividends 65,000

Instructions

Prepare the 2025 retained earnings statement for Zheng Inc.

Prepare a balance sheet.

E1.12 (LO 3), AP The following information is available for Randall Inc.

Accounts receivable $2,400 Cash $6,250
Accounts payable 3,700 Supplies 3,760
Interest payable 580 Unearned service revenue 850
Salaries and wages expense 4,500 Salaries and wages payable 745
Notes payable 31,500 Depreciation expense 670
Common stock 50,700 Equipment (net) 108,200
Inventory 2,840    

Instructions

Using the information above, prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2025. (Hint: Solve for the missing retained earnings amount after first determining total assets and total liabilities.)

Interpret financial data.

E1.13 (LO 3), AN Consider each of the following independent situations.

  1. The retained earnings statement of Lee Corporation shows dividends of $68,000, while net income for the year was $75,000.
  2. The statement of cash flows for Steele Corporation shows that cash provided by operating activities was $10,000, cash used in investing activities was $110,000, and cash provided by financing activities was $130,000.

Instructions

For each company, provide a brief discussion interpreting these financial data. For example, you might discuss the company’s financial health or its apparent growth philosophy.

Identify financial statement components and prepare income statement.

E1.14 (LO 3), AP The following items and amounts were taken from Lonyear Inc.’s 2025 income statement and balance sheet.

______ Cash $ 84,700 ______ Accounts receivable $ 88,419
______ Retained earnings 123,192 ______ Sales revenue 584,951
______ Cost of goods sold 438,458 ______ Notes payable 6,499
______ Salaries and wages expense 115,131 ______ Accounts payable 49,384
______ Prepaid insurance 7,818 ______ Service revenue 4,806
______ Inventory 64,618 ______ Interest expense 1,882

Instructions

  1. In each, case, identify on the blank line whether the item is an asset (A), liability (L), stockholders’ equity (SE), revenue (R), or expense (E) item.
  2. Prepare an income statement for Lonyear Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2025.

Identify financial statement components and prepare income statement.

E1.15 (LO 3), AP The following items and amounts were taken from Familia Inc.’s 2025 income statement and balance sheet, the end of its first year of operations.

______ Interest expense $ 2,200 ______ Equipment, net $54,700
______ Interest payable 700 ______ Depreciation expense 3,200
______ Notes payable 11,800 ______ Supplies 4,100
______ Sales revenue 44,300 ______ Common stock 26,800
______ Cash 2,900 ______ Supplies expense 900
______ Salaries and wages expense 15,600    

Instructions

  1. In each case, identify on the blank line whether the item is an asset (A), liability (L), stockholders’ equity (SE), revenue (R), or expense (E) item.
  2. Prepare an income statement for Familia Inc. for December 31, 2025.

Calculate missing amounts.

E1.16 (LO 3), AN Here are incomplete financial statements for Donavan, Inc.

Donavan, Inc.
Balance Sheet
Assets   Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Cash $ 7,000   Liabilities  
Inventory 10,000   Accounts payable $ 5,000
Buildings (net) 45,000   Stockholders’ equity  
Total assets $62,000   Common stock (a)
      Retained earnings (b)
      Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $62,000
Income Statement
Revenues $85,000
Cost of goods sold (c)
Salaries and wages expense 10,000
Net income $(d)
Retained Earnings Statement
Beginning retained earnings $12,000
Add: Net income (e)
Less: Dividends 5,000
Ending retained earnings $27,000

Instructions

Calculate the missing amounts.

Calculate missing amounts.

E1.17 (LO 3), AN Here are incomplete financial statements for Oway Corporation.

Oway Corporation
Balance Sheet
Assets Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Cash $ 29,000 Liabilities  
Supplies (a) Notes payable $22,000
Equipment (net) 65,000 Stockholders’ equity  
Total assets $(b) Common stock 38,000
    Retained earnings (c)
    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $(d)
Income Statement
Revenues $53,000
Depreciation expense (e)
Salaries and wages expense 10,000
Interest expense 1,000
Net income $25,000
Retained Earnings Statement
Beginning retained earnings $(f)
Add: Net income (g)
Less: Dividends 6,000
Ending retained earnings $37,000

Instructions

Calculate the missing amounts.

Compute net income and prepare a retained earnings statement and balance sheet.

E1.18 (LO 3), AP Otay Lakes Park is a private camping ground near the Mount Miguel Recreation Area. It has compiled the following financial information as of December 31, 2025.

Service revenue (from camping fees) $132,000 Dividends $ 9,000
Sales revenue (from general store) 25,000 Notes payable 50,000
Accounts payable 11,000 Expenses during 2025 126,000
Cash 8,500 Supplies 5,500
Equipment 114,000 Common stock 40,000
    Retained earnings (1/1/2025) 5,000

Instructions

  1. Determine Otay Lakes Park’s net income for 2025.
  2. Prepare a retained earnings statement and a balance sheet for Otay Lakes Park as of December 31, 2025.
  3. Upon seeing this income statement, Walt Jones, the campground manager, immediately concluded, “The general store is more trouble than it is worth—let’s get rid of it.” The marketing director isn’t so sure this is a good idea. What do you think?

Identify financial statement components and prepare an income statement.

E1.19 (LO 3), AP Kellogg Company is the world’s leading producer of ready-to-eat cereal and a leading producer of grain-based convenience foods such as frozen waffles and cereal bars. Suppose the following items were taken from its 2025 income statement and balance sheet. (All dollars are in millions.)

____ Retained earnings $5,481 ____ Bonds payable $ 4,835
____ Cost of goods sold 7,184 ____ Inventory 910
____ Selling and administrative expenses 3,390 ____ Sales revenue 12,575
    ____ Accounts payable 1,077
____ Cash 334 ____ Common stock 105
____ Notes payable 44 ____ Income tax expense 498
____ Interest expense 295    

Instructions

  1. In each case, identify whether the item is an asset (A), liability (L), stockholders’ equity (SE), revenue (R), or expense (E).
  2. Prepare an income statement for Kellogg Company for the year ended December 31, 2025.

Prepare a statement of cash flows.

E1.20 (LO 3), AP This information is for Williams Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2025.

Cash received from lenders $20,000
Cash received from customers 50,000
Cash paid for new equipment 28,000
Cash dividends paid 8,000
Cash paid to suppliers 16,000
Cash balance 1/1/25 12,000

Instructions

  1. Prepare the 2025 statement of cash flows for Williams Corporation.
  2. Suppose you are one of Williams’ creditors. Referring to the statement of cash flows, evaluate Williams’ ability to repay its creditors.

Prepare a statement of cash flows.

E1.21 (LO 3), AP Suppose the following data are derived from the 2025 financial statements of Southwest Airlines. (All dollars are in millions.) Southwest has a December 31 year-end.

Cash balance, January 1, 2025 $1,390
Cash paid for repayment of debt 122
Cash received from issuance of common stock 144
Cash received from issuance of long-term debt 500
Cash received from customers 9,823
Cash paid for property and equipment 1,529
Cash paid for dividends 14
Cash paid for repurchase of common stock 1,001
Cash paid for goods and services 6,978

Instructions

  1. After analyzing the data, prepare a statement of cash flows for Southwest Airlines for the year ended December 31, 2025.
  2. Discuss whether the company’s net cash provided by operating activities was sufficient to finance its investing activities. If it was not, how did the company finance its investing activities?

Correct an incorrectly prepared balance sheet.

E1.22 (LO 3), AP Wayne Holtz is the bookkeeper for Beeson Company. Wayne has been trying to get the balance sheet of Beeson Company to balance. It finally balanced, but now he’s not sure it is correct.

Beeson Company
Balance Sheet
December 31,.2025
Assets   Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Cash $18,000   Accounts payable $16,000
Supplies 9,500   Accounts receivable (12,000)
Equipment 40,000   Common stock 40,000
Dividends 8,000   Retained earnings 31,500
Total assets $75,000   Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $75,000

Instructions

Prepare a correct balance sheet.

Classify items as assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity, and prepare accounting equation.

An icon shows an encircled rightward pointing arrow with a text beside reads, Excel.

E1.23 (LO 3), AP Suppose the following items were taken from the balance sheet of Nike, Inc. (All dollars are in millions.)

1.____ Cash $2,291.1
2.____ Accounts receivable 2,883.9
3.____ Common stock 2,874.2
4.____ Notes payable 342.9
5.____ Buildings 3,759.9
6.____ Mortgage payable 1,311.5
7.____ Inventory $2,357.0
8.____ Income taxes payable 86.3
9.____ Equipment 1,957.7
10.____ Retained earnings 5,818.9
11.____ Accounts payable 2,815.8

Instructions

Perform each of the following.

  1. Classify each of these items as an asset (A), liability (L), or stockholders’ equity (SE) item.
  2. Determine Nike’s accounting equation by calculating the value of total assets, total liabilities, and total stockholders’ equity.
  3. To what extent does Nike rely on debt versus equity financing?

Use financial statement relationships to determine missing amounts.

E1.24 (LO 3), AN The summaries of data from the balance sheet, income statement, and retained earnings statement for two corporations, Walco Corporation and Gunther Enterprises, are presented as follows for 2025.

  Walco Corporation Gunther Enterprises
Beginning of year    
Total assets $110,000 $150,000
Total liabilities 70,000 (d)
Total stockholders’ equity (a) 70,000
End of year    
Total assets (b) 180,000
Total liabilities 120,000 55,000
Total stockholders’ equity 60,000 (e)
Changes during year in retained earnings    
Dividends (c) 5,000
Total revenues 215,000 (f)
Total expenses 165,000 80,000

Instructions

Determine the missing amounts. Assume all changes in stockholders’ equity are due to changes in retained earnings.

Classify various items in an annual report.

E1.25 (LO 3), K The annual report provides financial information in a variety of formats, including the following.

Management discussion and analysis (MD&A)

Financial statements

Notes to the financial statements

Auditor’s opinion

Instructions

For each of the following, state in what area of the annual report the item would be presented. If the item would probably not be found in an annual report, state “Not disclosed.”

  1. The total cumulative amount received from stockholders in exchange for common stock.
  2. An independent assessment concerning whether the financial statements present a fair depiction of the company’s results and financial position.
  3. The interest rate that the company is being charged on all outstanding debts.
  4. Total revenue from operating activities.
  5. Management’s assessment of the company’s results.
  6. The names and positions of all employees hired in the last year.

Classify accounts and prepare balance sheet.

E1.26 (LO 3), AP The following list of accounts, in alphabetical order, is for Aventura Inc. at November 30, 2025.

____ Accounts payable $ 26,200 ____ Inventory $18,000
____ Accounts receivable 19,500 ____ Land 44,000
____ Buildings 100,000 ____ Mortgage payable 97,500
____ Cash 20,000 ____ Notes payable 34,000
____ Common stock 20,000 ____ Retained earnings 48,500
____ Equipment, net 30,000 ____ Supplies 700
____ Income taxes payable 6,000    

Instructions

  1. For each of the above accounts, identify whether it is an asset (A), liability (L), or stockholders’ equity (SE) item.
  2. Prepare a balance sheet at November 30, 2025.

Problems

Determine forms of business organization.

P1.1 (LO 1), C Writing Presented below are five independent situations.

  1. Three physics professors at MIT have formed a business to improve the speed of information transfer over the Internet for stock exchange transactions. Each has contributed an equal amount of cash and knowledge to the venture. Although their approach looks promising, they are concerned about the legal liability that their business might confront.
  2. Bob Colt, a college student looking for summer employment, opened a bait shop in a small shed at a local marina.
  3. Alma Ortiz and Jaime Falco each owned separate shoe manufacturing businesses. They have decided to combine their businesses. They expect that within the coming year they will need significant funds to expand their operations.
  4. Alice, Donna, and Sam recently graduated with marketing degrees. They have been friends since childhood. They have decided to start a consulting business focused on marketing sporting goods over the Internet.
  5. Don Rolls has developed a low-cost GPS device that can be implanted into pets so that they can be easily located when lost. He would like to build a small manufacturing facility to make the devices and then sell them to veterinarians across the country. Don has no savings or personal assets. He wants to maintain control over the business.

Instructions

In each case, explain what form of organization the business is likely to take—sole proprietorship, partnership, or corporation. Give reasons for your choice.

Identify users and uses of financial statements.

P1.2 (LO 3), C Writing Financial decisions often place heavier emphasis on one type of financial statement over the others. Consider each of the following hypothetical situations independently.

  1. The North Face is considering extending credit to a new customer. The terms of the credit would require the customer to pay within 30 days of receipt of goods.
  2. An investor is considering purchasing common stock of Amazon.com. The investor plans to hold the investment for at least 5 years.
  3. JPMorgan Chase is considering extending a loan to a small company. The company would be required to make interest payments at the end of each year for 5 years, and to repay the loan at the end of the fifth year.
  4. The president of Campbell Soup is trying to determine whether the company is generating enough cash to increase the amount of dividends paid to investors in this and future years, and still have enough cash to buy equipment as it is needed.

Instructions

In each situation, state whether the decision-maker would be most likely to place primary emphasis on information provided by the income statement, balance sheet, or statement of cash flows. In each case provide a brief justification for your choice. Choose only one financial statement in each case.

Prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet; discuss results.

An icon shows an encircled rightward pointing arrow with a text beside reads, Excel.

P1.3 (LO 3), AP On June 1, 2025, Elite Service Co. was started with an initial investment in the company of $22,100 cash. Here are the assets, liabilities, and common stock of the company at June 30, 2025, and the revenues and expenses for the month of June, its first month of operations:

Cash $ 4,600 Notes payable $12,000
Accounts receivable 4,000 Accounts payable 500
Service revenue 7,500 Supplies expense 1,000
Supplies 2,400 Maintenance and repairs expense 600
Advertising expense 400 Utilities expense 300
Equipment 26,000 Salaries and wages expense 1,400
Common stock 22,100    

During June, the company issued no additional stock but paid dividends of $1,400.

Check figures provide a key number to let you know you are on the right track.

Instructions

  1. Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2025.
    Net income $3,800
      Ret. earnings $2,400
      Tot. assets $37,000
  2. Briefly discuss whether the company’s first month of operations was a success.
  3. Discuss the company’s decision to distribute a dividend.

Prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet.

P1.4 (LO 3), AP Reese Inc., a provider of consulting services, was founded on October 1, 2025. At the end of the first month of operations, the company decided to prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet using the following information.

Accounts payable $ 3,300 Supplies $ 2,460
Interest expense 410 Supplies expense 380
Equipment (net) 48,200 Depreciation expense 270
Salaries and wages expense 2,500 Service revenue 20,920
Bonds payable 21,500 Salaries and wages payable 445
Unearned service revenue 4,065 Common stock 9,100
Accounts receivable 1,300 Interest payable 140
Cash 3,950    

Instructions

Using the information, prepare an income statement and retained earnings statement for the month of October 2025 and a balance sheet as of October 31, 2025.

End. retained earnings $17,360

Determine items included in a statement of cash flows, prepare the statement, and comment.

P1.5 (LO 3), AP Presented below is selected financial information for Rojo Corporation for December 31, 2025.

Inventory $ 25,000 Cash paid to purchase equipment $ 12,000
Cash paid to suppliers 104,000 Equipment 40,000
Buildings 200,000 Service revenue 100,000
Common stock 50,000 Cash received from customers 132,000
Cash dividends paid 7,000 Cash received from issuing common stock 22,000
Cash at beginning of period 9,000    

Instructions

  1. prepare the statement of cash flows for Rojo Corporation.
    Net cash increase $31,000
  2. Comment on the adequacy of net cash provided by operating activities to fund the company’s investing activities and dividend payments.

Comment on proper accounting treatment and prepare a corrected balance sheet.

P1.6 (LO 3), AN Writing Micado Corporation was formed on January 1, 2025. At December 31, 2025, Miko Liu, the president and sole stockholder, decided to prepare a balance sheet, which appeared as follows.

Micado Corporation
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2025
Assets   Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Cash $20,000   Accounts payable $30,000
Accounts receivable 50,000   Notes payable 15,000
Inventory 36,000   Boat loan 22,000
Boat 24,000   Stockholders’ equity 63,000

Miko willingly admits that she is not an accountant by training. She is concerned that her balance sheet might not be correct. She has provided you with the following additional information.

  1. The boat actually belongs to Miko, not to Micado Corporation. However, because she thinks she might take customers out on the boat occasionally, she decided to list it as an asset of the company. To be consistent, she also listed as a liability of the corporation her personal loan that she took out at the bank to buy the boat.
  2. The inventory was originally purchased for $25,000, but due to a surge in demand Miko now thinks she could sell it for $36,000. She thought it would be best to record it at $36,000.
  3. Included in the accounts receivable balance is $10,000 that Miko loaned to her brother 5 years ago. Miko included this in the receivables of Micado Corporation so she wouldn’t forget that her brother owes her money.

Instructions

  1. Comment on the proper accounting treatment of the three items above.
  2. Provide a corrected balance sheet for Micado Corporation. (Hint: To get the balance sheet to balance, adjust stockholders’ equity.)
    Tot. assets $85,000

Continuing Case

Cookie Creations

The Cookie Creations case starts in Chapter 1 and continues in every chapter. Complete case details and instructions are available in Wiley Course Resources.

CCC1 Natalie Koebel spent much of her childhood learning the art of cookie-making from her grand mother. They spent many happy hours mastering every type of cookie imaginable and later devised new recipes that were both healthy and delicious. Now at the start of her second year in college, Natalie is investigating possibilities for starting her own business as part of the entrepreneurship program in which she is enrolled.

A long-time friend insists that Natalie has to include cookies in her business plan. After a series of brainstorming sessions, Natalie settles on the idea of operating a cookie-making school. She will start on a part-time basis and offer her services in people’s homes. Now that she has started thinking about it, the possibilities seem endless. During the fall, she will concentrate on holiday cookies. She will offer group sessions (which will probably be more entertainment than education) and individual lessons. Natalie also decides to include children in her target market. The first difficult decision is coming up with the perfect name for her business. She settles on “Cookie Creations,” and then moves on to more important issues.

Instructions

  1. What form of business organization—proprietorship, partnership, or corporation— do you recommend that Natalie use for her business? Discuss the benefits and weaknesses of each form that Natalie might consider.
  2. Will Natalie need accounting information? If yes, what information will she need and why? How often will she need this information?
  3. Identify specific asset, liability, revenue, and expense accounts that Cookie Creations will likely use to record its business transactions.
  4. Should Natalie open a separate bank account for the business? Why or why not?
  5. Natalie expects she will have to use her car to drive to people’s homes and to pick up supplies, but she also needs to use her car for personal reasons. She recalls from her first-year accounting course something about keeping business and personal assets separate. She wonders what she should do for accounting purposes. What do you recommend?

Expand Your Critical Thinking

Financial Reporting Problem: Apple Inc.

CT1.1 The financial statements of Apple Inc. are presented in Appendix A.

Instructions

Refer to Apple’s financial statements and answer the following questions.

  1. What were Apple’s total assets at September 26, 2020? At September 28, 2019?
  2. How much cash (and cash equivalents) did Apple have on September 26, 2020?
  3. What amount of accounts payable did Apple report on September 26, 2020? On September 28, 2019?
  4. What were Apple’s net sales in the year ending September 26, 2020? In the year ending September 28, 2019? In the year ending September 29, 2018?
  5. What is the amount of the change in Apple’s net income from 2019 to 2020?

Comparative Analysis Problem: Columbia Sportswear Company vs. Under Armour, Inc.

CT1.2 Columbia Sportswear Company’s financial statements are presented in Appendix B. Financial statements of Under Armour, Inc. are presented in Appendix C.

Instructions

  1. Based on the information in these financial statements, determine the following for each company.
    1. Total liabilities at December 31, 2020.
    2. Net property, plant, and equipment at December 31, 2020.
    3. Net cash provided or (used) in investing activities for 2020.
    4. Net income for 2020.
  2. What conclusions concerning the two companies can you draw from these data?

Comparative Analysis Problem: Amazon.com, Inc. vs. Walmart Inc.

CT1.3 Amazon.com, Inc.’s financial statements are presented in Appendix D. Financial statements of Walmart Inc. are presented in Appendix E.

Instructions

  1. Based on the information contained in these financial statements, determine the following for each company.
    1. Total assets at December 31, 2020, for Amazon and for Walmart at January 31, 2021.
    2. Receivables (net) at December 31, 2020, for Amazon and for Walmart at January 31, 2021.
    3. Net sales (product only) for the year ended in 2020 (2021 for Walmart).
    4. Net income for year ended in 2020 (2021 for Walmart).
  2. What conclusions concerning these two companies can be drawn from these data?

Interpreting Financial Statements

CT1.4 Xerox was not having a particularly pleasant year. The company’s stock price had already fallen in the previous year from $60 per share to $30. Just when it seemed things couldn’t get worse, Xerox’s stock fell to $4 per share. The following data were taken from the statement of cash flows of Xerox. (All dollars are in millions.)

Cash used in operating activities   $ (663)
Cash used in investing activities   (644)
Financing activities    
Dividends paid $ (587)  
Net cash received from issuing debt 3,498  
Cash provided by financing activities   2,911

Instructions

Analyze the information and then answer the following questions.

  1. If you were a creditor of Xerox, what reaction might you have to the above information?
  2. If you were an investor in Xerox, what reaction might you have to the above information?
  3. If you were evaluating the company as either a creditor or a stockholder, what other information would you be interested in seeing?
  4. Xerox decided to pay a cash dividend. This dividend was approximately equal to the amount paid in the previous year. Discuss the issues that were probably considered in making this decision.

Real-World Focus

CT1.5 You can easily search the Internet to find summary information about companies. This information includes basic descriptions of the company’s location, activities, industry, financial health, and financial performance.

Instructions

Go to the Yahoo! Finance website, type in a company name, and then use the links (such as Financials) to locate the information necessary to answer the following questions.

  1. What is the company’s net income? Over what period was this measured?
  2. What is the company’s total sales? Over what period was this measured?
  3. What is the company’s industry?
  4. What are the names of four companies in this industry?
  5. Choose one of the competitors. What is this competitor’s name? What is its total sales? What is its net income?

CT1.6 The Wall Street Journal published an article by Michael Rapoport entitled “Coming Soon: What Auditors Really Think About Company Numbers.” It provides a discussion about changes to be made to the auditor’s report.

Instructions

Read the article and then answer the following questions.

  1. What did the old auditor’s report primarily focus on?
  2. What does the new report provide beyond the old report? What are some examples of items that might be discussed?
  3. How do the requirements of the new report compare to the requirements of auditor reports in other countries?
  4. What criteria must be met in other for an item to be disclosed in the new report?

Decision-Making Across the Organization

CT1.7 Sylvia Ayala recently accepted a job in the production department at Johnson & Johnson. Before she starts work, she decides to review the company’s annual report to better understand its operations.

The content and organization of corporate annual reports have become fairly standardized. Excluding the public relations part of the report (pictures, products, etc.), the following are the traditional financial portions of the annual report.

  • Financial Highlights
  • Letter to the Stockholders
  • Management’s Discussion and Analysis
  • Financial Statements
  • Notes to the Financial Statements
  • Management’s Responsibility for Financial Reporting
  • Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting
  • Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
  • Selected Financial Data

The official SEC filing of the annual report is called a Form 10-K, which often omits the public relations pieces found in most standard annual reports.

Instructions

Search the Internet to find Johnson & Johnson’s 10-K report dated for the year ended January 3, 2021, to answer the following questions.

  1. What CPA firm performed the audit of Johnson & Johnson’s financial statements?
  2. What was the amount of Johnson & Johnson’s basic earnings per share for the year ended January 3, 2021?
  3. What are the company’s net sales in foreign countries during the year ended January 3, 2021?
  4. What were net sales during the year ended December 30, 2018?
  5. How many shares of common stock have been authorized?
  6. How much cash was spent on capital expenditures during the year ended January 3, 2021?
  7. Over what life does the company depreciate its buildings?
  8. What was the value of inventory on December 29, 2019?

Communication Activities

CT1.8 Marci Ling is the bookkeeper for Samco Company, Inc. Marci has been trying to get the company’s balance sheet to balance. She finally got it to balance, but she still isn’t sure that it is correct.

Samco Company, Inc.
Balance Sheet
For the Month Ended December 31, 2025
Assets   Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Equipment $18,000   Common stock $12,000
Cash 9,000   Accounts receivable (6,000)
Supplies 1,000   Dividends (2,000)
Accounts payable (4,000)   Notes payable 10,000
Total assets $24,000   Retained earnings 10,000
      Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $24,000

Instructions

Explain to Marci Ling in a memo (a) the purpose of a balance sheet, and (b) why this balance sheet is incorrect and what she should do to correct it.

Ethics Cases

CT1.9 Rules governing the investment practices of individual certified public accountants prohibit them from investing in the stock of a company that their firm audits. The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) became concerned that some accountants were violating this rule. In response to an SEC investigation, PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) fired 10 people and spent $25 million educating employees about the investment rules and installing an investment tracking system.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

  1. Why do you think rules exist that restrict auditors from investing in companies that are audited by their firms?
  2. Some accountants argue that they should be allowed to invest in a company’s stock as long as they themselves aren’t involved in working on the company’s audit or consulting. What do you think of this idea?
  3. Today, a very high percentage of publicly traded companies are audited by only four very large public accounting firms. These firms also do a high percentage of the consulting work that is done for publicly traded companies. How does this fact complicate the decision regarding whether CPAs should be allowed to invest in companies audited by their firm?
  4. Suppose you were a CPA and you had invested in IBM when IBM was not one of your firm’s clients. Two years later, after IBM’s stock price had fallen considerably, your firm won the IBM audit contract. You will be involved in working with the IBM audit. You know that your firm’s rules require that you sell your shares immediately. If you do sell immediately, you will sustain a large loss. Do you think this is fair? What would you do?
  5. Why do you think PwC took such extreme steps in response to the SEC investigation?

CT1.10 Ethical behavior is fundamental to communications between investors and companies. However, it is difficult for company founders to control their enthusiasm in discussions related to their company, such that sometimes new companies overstate their potential for future success, either intentionally or unintentionally, in order to generate investor interest.

For example, Nikola Corporation, a pioneer in electric semi-trucks, was investigated by U.S. securities regulators because critics claimed that the company’s chairperson made false claims about the company’s progress in his efforts to make Nikola “the Tesla of semi-trucks.” Shortly after its stock began trading publicly, the company was estimated to be worth $30 billion, even though it had yet to produce its first electric truck. Similarly, Tesla’s founder and CEO, Elon Musk, has been investigated by the Securities and Exchange Commission a number of times regarding the accuracy of his communications, including Tweets.

Instructions

In groups, discuss the following topics.

  1. Should companies be held accountable for the fairness of their communications, or instead should it be the responsibility of investors to determine whether company statements are true and fair?
  2. Suppose that you founded a new company. What steps would you take to ensure that your communications were accurate, while still generating enthusiasm with investors?
  3. Search the Internet to find information about the allegations and any results of regulatory investigations regarding the accuracy of Elon Musk’s communications about Tesla. Provide a brief summary of your findings.
  4. What are the potential costs to society of inaccurate company communications to investors?

All About You

CT1.11 Some people are tempted to make their finances look worse to get financial aid. Companies sometimes also manage their financial numbers in order to accomplish certain goals. Earnings management is the planned timing of revenues, expenses, gains, and losses to smooth out bumps in net income. In managing earnings, companies’ actions vary from being within the range of ethical activity, to being both unethical and illegal attempts to mislead investors and creditors.

Instructions

Provide responses for each of the following questions.

  1. Discuss whether you think each of the following actions (adapted from the FinAid website) to increase the chances of receiving financial aid is ethical.
    1. Spend down the student’s assets and income first, before spending parents’ assets and income.
    2. Accelerate necessary expenses to reduce available cash. For example, if you need a new car, buy it before applying for financial aid.
    3. State that a truly financially dependent child is independent.
    4. Have a parent take an unpaid leave of absence for long enough to get below the “threshold” level of income.
  2. What are some reasons why a company might want to overstate its earnings?
  3. What are some reasons why a company might want to understate its earnings?
  4. Under what circumstances might an otherwise ethical person decide to illegally overstate or understate earnings?

FASB Codification Activity

CT1.12 The FASB has developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification (or more simply “the Codification”). The FASB’s primary goal in developing the Codification is to provide in one place all the authoritative literature related to a particular topic. To provide easy access to the Codification, the FASB also developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Codification Research System (CRS). CRS is an online, real-time database that provides easy access to the Codification. The Codification and the related CRS provide a topically organized structure, subdivided into topic, subtopics, sections, and paragraphs, using a numerical index system.

You may find this system useful in your present and future studies, and so we have provided an opportunity to use this online system as part of the Expand Your Critical Thinking section.

Instructions

Academic access to the FASB Codification is available through university subscriptions, obtained from the American Accounting Association. This subscription covers an unlimited number of students within a single institution. Once this access has been obtained by your school, you should log in and familiarize yourself with the resources that are accessible at the FASB Codification site.

Considering People, Planet, and Profit

CT1.13 Although Clif Bar & Company is not a public company, it does share its financial information with its employees as part of its open-book management approach. Further, although it does not publicly share its financial information, it does provide a different form of an annual report to external users. In this report, the company provides information regarding its sustainability efforts.

Instructions

Go to the “Who We Are” page at the Clif Bar website and then identify the company’s five aspirations.

A Look at IFRS

Many people believe that there is a need for one set of international accounting standards. Here is why:

The following are the key similarities and differences between GAAP and IFRS as related to accounting fundamentals.

Similarities

  • The basic techniques for recording business transactions are the same for U.S. and international companies.
  • Both international and U.S. accounting standards emphasize transparency in financial reporting. Both sets of standards are primarily driven by meeting the needs of investors and creditors.
  • The three most common forms of business organizations, proprietorships, partnerships, and corporations, are also found in countries that use international accounting standards.

Differences

  • International standards are referred to as International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), developed by the International Accounting Standards Board. Accounting standards in the United States are referred to as generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) and are developed by the Financial Accounting Standards Board.
  • IFRS tends to be simpler in its accounting and disclosure requirements; some people say it is more “principles-based.” GAAP is more detailed; some people say it is more “rules-based.”
  • The internal control standards applicable to Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX) apply only to large public companies listed on U.S. exchanges. There is continuing debate as to whether non-U.S. companies should have to comply with this extra layer of regulation.

IFRS Practice

IFRS Self-Test Questions

1. Which of the following is not a reason why a single set of high-quality international accounting standards would be beneficial?

  1. Mergers and acquisition activity.
  2. Financial markets.
  3. Multinational corporations.
  4. GAAP is widely considered to be a superior reporting system.

2. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act determines:

  1. international tax regulations.
  2. internal control standards as enforced by the IASB.
  3. internal control standards of U.S. publicly traded companies.
  4. U.S. tax regulations.

3. IFRS is considered to be more:

  1. principles-based and less rules-based than GAAP.
  2. rules-based and less principles-based than GAAP.
  3. detailed than GAAP.
  4. None of the answer choices is correct.

IFRS Exercises

IFRS1.1 Who are the two key international players in the development of international accounting standards? Explain their role.

IFRS1.2 What is the benefit of a single set of high-quality accounting standards?

International Financial Reporting Problem: Louis Vuitton

IFRS1.3 The complete annual report of Louis Vuitton, including the notes to its financial statements, is available at the company’s website.

Instructions

Answer the following questions from the company’s 2020 annual report.

a. What accounting firm performed the audit of Louis Vuitton’s financial statements?

b. What is the address of the company’s corporate headquarters?

c. What is the company’s reporting currency?

Answers to IFRS Self-Test Questions

1. d2. c3. a

 Note

  1. 1 See startheregoplaces.com/students/why-accounting/salary-and-demand/ for information regarding the salaries listed in Illustrations 1A.2 and 1A.3.
CHAPTER 2 A Further Look at Financial Statements

CHAPTER 2
A Further Look at Financial Statements

Chapter Preview

If you are thinking of purchasing Best Buy stock, or any stock, how can you decide what the shares are worth? If you manage Columbia Sportswear’s credit department, how should you determine whether to extend credit to a new customer? If you are a financial executive at Alphabet Inc. (Google), how do you decide whether your company is generating adequate cash to expand operations without borrowing? Your decision in each of these situations will be influenced by a variety of considerations. One of them should be your careful analysis of a company’s financial statements.

In this chapter, we take a closer look at the balance sheet and introduce some useful ways for evaluating the information provided by the financial statements. We also examine the financial reporting concepts underlying the financial statements. We begin by introducing the classified balance sheet.

Feature Story

Just Fooling Around?

Two early pioneers in providing investment information online to the masses were Tom and David Gardner, brothers who created an online investor website called The Motley Fool. The name comes from Shakespeare’s As You Like It. The fool in Shakespeare’s play was the only one who could speak unpleasant truths to kings and queens without being killed. Tom and David view themselves as 21st-century “fools,” revealing the “truths” of the stock market to the small investor, who they feel has been taken advantage of by Wall Street insiders.

The Motley Fool’s online bulletin board enables investors to exchange information and insights about companies. (Similar services are provided by TikTok, Twitter, Reddit, Facebook, and others.) Critics of these bulletin boards contend that they are simply high-tech rumor mills that cause investors to bid up stock prices to unreasonable levels. For example, the stock of PairGain Technologies jumped 32% in a single day as a result of a bogus takeover rumor on an investment bulletin board. Some observers are concerned that small investors—ironically, the very people the Gardner brothers are trying to help—will be hurt the most by misinformation and intentional scams.

Rather than getting swept away by rumors, investors must sort out the good information from the bad. One thing is certain—as information services such as The Motley Fool increase in number, gathering information will become even easier. Evaluating it will be the harder task.

Chapter Outline

LEARNING OBJECTIVES REVIEW PRACTICE
LO 1 Identify the sections of a classified balance sheet.
  • Current assets
  • Long-term investments
  • Property, plant, and equipment
  • Intangible assets
  • Current liabilities
  • Long-term liabilities
  • Stockholders’ equity

DO IT! 1a Assets Section of Classified Balance Sheet

1b Balance Sheet Classifications

LO 2 Use ratios to evaluate a company’s profitability, liquidity, and solvency.
  • Ratio analysis
  • Using the income statement
  • Using a classified balance sheet
DO IT! 2 Ratio Analysis
LO 3 Discuss financial reporting concepts.
  • The standard-setting environment
  • Qualities of useful information
  • Assumptions in financial reporting
  • Principles in financial reporting
  • Cost constraint
DO IT! 3 Financial Accounting Concepts and Principles
Go to the Review and Practice section at the end of the chapter for a targeted summary and practice applications with solutions.
Visit Wiley Course Resources for additional tutorials and practice opportunities.

2.1 The Classified Balance Sheet

A balance sheet presents a snapshot of a company’s financial position at a point in time. It lists individual asset, liability, and stockholders’ equity items. To improve users’ understanding of a company’s financial position, companies often prepare what is referred to as a classified balance sheet instead.

A classified balance sheet generally contains the standard classifications listed in Illustration 2.1.

ILLUSTRATION 2.1 Standard balance sheet classifications

Assets   Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current assets   Current liabilities
Long-term investments   Long-term liabilities
Property, plant, and equipment   Stockholders’ equity
Intangible assets    

These groupings help financial statement readers determine such things as:

  1. Whether the company has enough assets to pay its debts as they come due.
  2. The claims of short- and long-term creditors on the company’s total assets.

Many of these groupings can be seen in the balance sheet of Franklin Corporation shown in Illustration 2.2 (see Helpful Hint). In the sections that follow, we explain each of these groupings.

Current Assets

Current assets are defined as follows.

  • Assets that a company expects to convert to cash or use up within one year or its operating cycle, whichever is longer. In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation had current assets of $22,100.
  • For most businesses, the cutoff for classification as current assets is one year from the balance sheet date.

For example, accounts receivable are current assets because the company will collect them and convert them to cash within one year. Supplies is a current asset because the company expects to use the supplies in operations within one year.

Some companies use a period longer than one year to classify assets and liabilities as current because they have an operating cycle longer than one year.

  • The operating cycle of a company is the average time required to go from cash to cash in producing revenue—to purchase inventory, sell it on account, and then collect cash from customers.
  • For most businesses, this cycle takes less than a year, so they use a one-year cutoff.
  • But for some businesses, such as vineyards or airplane manufacturers, this period may be longer than a year.

Except where noted, we will assume that companies use one year to determine whether an asset or liability is current or long-term.

ILLUSTRATION 2.2 Classified balance sheet

Franklin Corporation
Balance Sheet
October 31, 2025
  Assets  
  Current assets        
  Cash   $6,600    
  Debt investments   2,000    
  Accounts receivable   7,000    
  Notes receivable   1,000    
  Inventory   3,000    
  Supplies   2,100    
  Prepaid insurance   400    
  Total current assets     $22,100  
  Long-term investments        
  Stock investments   5,200    
  Investment in real estate   2,000 7,200  
  Property, plant, and equipment        
  Land   10,000    
  Equipment $24,000      
  Less: Accumulated depreciation— equipment 5,000 19,000 29,000  
  Intangible assets        
  Patents     3,100  
  Total assets     $61,400  
  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity  
  Current liabilities        
  Notes payable   $11,000    
  Accounts payable   2,100    
  Unearned sales revenue   900    
  Salaries and wages payable   1,600    
  Interest payable   450    
  Total current liabilities     $16,050  
  Long-term liabilities        
  Mortgage payable   10,000    
  Notes payable   1,300    
  Total long-term liabilities     11,300  
  Total liabilities     27,350  
  Stockholders’ equity        
  Common stock   14,000    
  Retained earnings   20,050    
  Total stockholders’ equity     34,050  
  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity     $61,400  

Companies list current assets in order of liquidity, that is, the order in which they expect to convert them into cash (follow this rule when doing your homework). Common types of current assets, listed in order of liquidity, are:

  1. Cash.
  2. Investments (such as short-term U.S. government securities).
  3. Receivables (accounts receivable, notes receivable, and interest receivable).
  4. Inventories.
  5. Prepaid expenses (insurance and supplies).

Why are receivables considered more liquid than inventory? Inventory must be sold before it is converted to cash (and is often sold on account), whereas receivables are converted to cash upon collection.

As explained later in the chapter, a company’s current assets are important in assessing its short-term debt-paying ability.

Long-Term Investments

Long-term investments generally include the following (see Alternative Terminology).

  • Investments in stocks and bonds of other corporations that are held for more than one year.
  • Long-term assets such as land or buildings that a company is not currently using in its operating activities.
  • Long-term notes receivable.

In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation reported total long-term investments of $7,200 on its balance sheet.

Property, Plant, and Equipment

Property, plant, and equipment is defined as follows.

  • Assets with relatively long useful lives that are currently used in operating the business (see Alternative Terminology).
  • This category includes land, buildings, equipment, delivery vehicles, and furniture.

In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation reported property, plant, and equipment of $29,000.

Notice that in Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation subtracts $5,000 in Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment from the Equipment account. Depreciation is the systematic allocation of the cost of an asset to expense over number of years (rather than expensing the full purchase price in the year of purchase). The assets that the company depreciates are reported on the balance sheet at cost less accumulated depreciation, often referred to as book value. The accumulated depreciation account shows the total amount of depreciation that the company has expensed thus far in the asset’s life.

In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation reported accumulated depreciation of $5,000, so the book value of the equipment is $19,000 ($24,000 – $5,000). In your homework, present each accumulated depreciation account immediately below the related plant asset, as shown in Illustration 2.2 for Franklin Corporation.

Intangible Assets

Many companies have assets that do not have physical substance and yet often are very valuable:

  • We call these assets intangible assets (see Helpful Hint).
  • One common intangible is goodwill.
  • Other intangibles include patents, copyrights, and trademarks or trade names that give the company exclusive right of use for a specified period of time.

In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation reported intangible assets of $3,100.

Current Liabilities

In the liabilities and stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet, the first grouping is current liabilities.

  • Current liabilities are obligations that the company is to pay within the next year or operating cycle, whichever is longer.
  • Common examples are accounts payable, salaries and wages payable, notes payable, unearned revenue, interest payable, and income taxes payable.
  • Also included as current liabilities are current maturities of long-term obligations—payments to be made within a year of the balance sheet date on long-term obligations.

In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation reported five different types of current liabilities, for a total of $16,050.

Long-Term Liabilities

Long-term liabilities (long-term debt) are:

  • Obligations that a company expects to pay after one year.
  • Liabilities in this category include bonds payable, mortgages payable, long-term notes payable, lease liabilities, and pension liabilities.

Many companies report long-term debt maturing after one year as a single amount in the balance sheet and show the details of the debt in notes that accompany the financial statements. Others list the various types of long-term liabilities. In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation reported long-term liabilities of $11,300.

Stockholders’ Equity

Stockholders’ equity consists of two parts: common stock and retained earnings.

  • Companies record as common stock the investments of assets into the business by the stockholders (see Alternative Terminology).
  • They record as retained earnings the income retained for use in the business.
  • These two parts, combined, make up stockholders’ equity on the balance sheet.

In Illustration 2.2, Franklin Corporation reported common stock of $14,000 and retained earnings of $20,050.

2.2 Analyzing the Financial Statements Using Ratios

We previously introduced the four financial statements. We discussed how these statements provide information about a company’s performance and financial position. Here, we extend this discussion by showing you specific tools that you can use to analyze financial statements in order to make a more meaningful evaluation of a company.

Ratio Analysis

Ratio analysis expresses the relationship among selected items of financial statement data. A ratio expresses the mathematical relationship between one quantity and another. For analysis of the primary financial statements, we classify ratios as shown in Illustration 2.3.

ILLUSTRATION 2.3 Financial ratio classifications

Three illustrations depict the classifications of financial ratios, each displayed with a corresponding text. The first illustration on the left displays an equation that reads, Total revenue displayed by a hand holding a dollar sign minus Total Expenses displayed by a statement equals Net Income displayed by a dollar sign embossed on a coin. The corresponding text titled, Profitability Ratios, reads, Measure the income or operating success of a company for a given period of time.  The second illustration on the left displays a balance scale. The left plate and the right plate weigh a dollar sign embossed on each coin. The left plate is lower than the right plate. The corresponding text titled, Liquidity Ratios, reads, Measure short-term ability of the company to pay its maturing obligations and to meet unexpected needs for cash.  The third illustration on the left displays a company founded in 1966. The corresponding text titled, Solvency Ratios, reads, Measure the ability of the company to survive over a long period of time.

A single ratio by itself is not very meaningful. Accordingly, in this and the following chapters, we will use various comparisons to shed light on company performance:

  1. Intracompany comparisons covering two years for the same company.
  2. Industry-average comparisons based on average ratios for particular industries.
  3. Intercompany comparisons based on comparisons with a competitor in the same industry.

Next, we use some ratios and comparisons to analyze the financial statements of Best Buy.

Using the Income Statement

Best Buy generates profits for its stockholders by selling electronics.

  • The income statement reveals how successful the company is at generating a profit from its sales.
  • The income statement reports the amount earned during the period (revenues) and the costs incurred during the period (expenses).

Illustration 2.4 shows a simplified income statement for Best Buy. From this income statement, we can see that Best Buy’s net income increased from $1,464 million to $1,541 million.

ILLUSTRATION 2.4 Best Buy’s income statement

Real World
Best Buy Co., Inc.
Income Statements
For the Year Ended February 1, 2020,
and the Year Ended February 2, 2019 (in millions)
    2020 2019  
  Revenues      
  Net sales and other revenue $43,686 $42,940  
  Expenses      
  Cost of goods sold 33,590 32,918  
  Selling, general, and administrative expenses and other 8,103 8,134  
  Income tax expense 452 424  
  Total expenses 42,145 41,476  
  Net income (loss) $1,541 $1,464  

hhgregg was a competitor of Best Buy. hhgregg was much smaller than Best Buy. At one time, hhgregg operated 228 stores in 20 states. Then, one year it reported a net loss of $54,879,000. The next year, it filed for bankruptcy. Just because a company has a net loss does not mean it is about to go bankrupt. However, because net losses are not sustainable over the long-term, they are worthy of investigation.

To evaluate the profitability of Best Buy, we will use ratio analysis. Profitability ratios, such as earnings per share, measure the operating success of a company for a given period of time.

Earnings per Share

Earnings per share (EPS) measures the net income earned on each share of common stock (see Decision Tools). Stockholders usually think in terms of the number of shares they own or plan to buy or sell, so stating net income earned as a per share amount provides a useful perspective for determining the investment return. Advanced accounting courses present more refined techniques for calculating earnings per share.

  • A basic approach for calculating earnings per share is to divide earnings available to common stockholders by weighted-average common shares outstanding during the year.
  • What is “earnings available to common stockholders”? It is an earnings amount calculated as net income less dividends paid on another type of stock, called preferred stock (Net income − Preferred dividends).

By comparing earnings per share of a single company over time, we can evaluate its relative earnings performance from the perspective of a stockholder—that is, on a per share basis. It is very important to note that comparisons of earnings per share across companies are not meaningful because of the wide variations in the numbers of shares of outstanding stock among companies.

Illustration 2.5 shows the earnings per share calculation for Best Buy in 2020 and 2019, based on the information presented below. To simplify our calculations, we assumed that any change in the number of shares of common stock for Best Buy occurred in the middle of the year.

(in millions)   2020   2019
Net income   $1,541   $1,464
Preferred dividends   –0–   –0–
Shares of common stock outstanding at beginning of year   266   283
Shares of common stock outstanding at end of year   256   266

ILLUSTRATION 2.5 Best Buy’s earnings per share

Earnings per Share=Net Income - Preferred DividendsWeighted-Average Common Shares Outstanding
  ($ and shares in millions)   2020   2019  
  Earnings per share   $1,541$0(266+256)÷2=$5.90   $1,464$0(283+266)÷2=$5.33  

Best Buy’s earnings per share increased from $5.33 to $5.90. This increase occurred because its net income increased and its outstanding shares decreased.

Using a Classified Balance Sheet

You can learn a lot about a company’s financial health by also evaluating the relationship between its various assets and liabilities. Illustration 2.6 provides a simplified balance sheet for Best Buy.

ILLUSTRATION 2.6 Best Buy’s balance sheet

Real World
Best Buy Co., Inc.
Balance Sheets
(in millions)
      February 1, 2020   February 3, 2019  
  Assets          
  Current assets          
  Cash and cash equivalents   $2,229   $1,980  
  Receivables   1,149   1,015  
  Merchandise inventories   5,174   5,409  
  Other current assets   305   466  
  Total current assets   8,857   8,870  
  Property and equipment   9,228   9,200  
  Less: Accumulated depreciation   6,900   6,690  
  Net property and equipment   2,328   2,510  
  Other assets   4,406   1,521  
  Total assets   $15,591   $12,901  
  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity          
  Current liabilities          
  Accounts payable   $ 5,288   $ 5,257  
  Unredeemed gift card liabilities   281   290  
  Accrued compensation payable   410   482  
  Other current liabilities   2,081   1,484  
  Total current liabilities   8,060   7,513  
  Long-term liabilities          
  Long-term debt   1,257   1,332  
  Other long-term liabilities   2,795   750  
  Total long-term liabilities   4,052   2,082  
  Total liabilities   12,112   9,595  
  Stockholders’ equity          
  Common stock   26   27  
  Retained earnings and other   3,453   3,279  
  Total stockholders’ equity   3,479   3,306  
  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $15,591   $12,901  

Liquidity

Suppose you are a banker at CitiGroup considering lending money to Best Buy, or you are a sales manager at Apple interested in selling computers and cell phones to Best Buy on credit.

  • You would be concerned about Best Buy’s liquidity—its ability to pay obligations expected to become due within the next year or operating cycle.
  • You would look closely at the relationship of its current assets to current liabilities.

Working Capital One measure of liquidity is working capital, which is the difference between the amounts of current assets and current liabilities (see Illustration 2.7).

ILLUSTRATION 2.7 Working capital

Working Capital=Current AssetsCurrent Liabilities
  • When current assets exceed current liabilities, working capital is positive. When this occurs, there is a greater likelihood that the company will pay its liabilities.
  • When working capital is negative, a company might not be able to pay short-term creditors, and the company might ultimately be forced into bankruptcy.

Best Buy had working capital in 2020 of $797 million ($8,857 million − $8,060 million).

Current Ratio Liquidity ratios measure the short-term ability of the company to pay its maturing obligations and to meet unexpected needs for cash. One liquidity ratio is the current ratio, computed as current assets divided by current liabilities (see Decision Tools).

  • The current ratio is a more dependable indicator of liquidity than working capital.
  • Two companies with the same amount of working capital may have significantly different current ratios.

Illustration 2.8 shows the 2020 and 2019 current ratios for Best Buy.

What does the ratio actually mean? Best Buy’s 2020 current ratio of 1.10:1 means that for every dollar of current liabilities, Best Buy has $1.10 of current assets. Best Buy’s current ratio decreased in 2020, which suggests its liquidity declined.

One potential weakness of the current ratio is that it does not take into account the composition of the current assets.

  • A satisfactory current ratio does not disclose whether a portion of the current assets is tied up in slow-moving inventory.
  • The composition of the current assets matters because a dollar of cash is more readily available to pay the bills than is a dollar of inventory.

ILLUSTRATION 2.8 Current ratio

Current Ratio=Current AssetsCurrent Liabilities
Best Buy
($ in millions)
  2020   2019  
  $8,857$8,060=1.10:1   1.18:1  

For example, suppose a company’s cash balance declined while its merchandise inventory increased substantially. If inventory increased because the company is having difficulty selling its products, then the current ratio might not fully reflect the reduction in the company’s liquidity (see Ethics Note).

Solvency

Now suppose that instead of being a short-term creditor, you are interested in either buying Best Buy’s stock or extending the company a long-term loan.

  • Long-term creditors and stockholders are interested in a company’s solvency—its ability to pay interest as it comes due and to repay the balance of a debt due at its maturity.
  • Solvency ratios measure the ability of the company to survive over a long period of time.

Debt to Assets Ratio The debt to assets ratio is one measure of solvency. It is calculated by dividing total liabilities (both current and long-term) by total assets. It measures the percentage of total financing provided by creditors rather than stockholders (see Helpful Hint).

  • Debt financing is more risky than equity financing because debt must be repaid at specific points in time, whether the company is performing well or not.
  • Thus, the higher the percentage of debt financing, the riskier the company.

The higher the percentage of total liabilities (debt) to total assets, the greater the risk that the company may be unable to pay its debts as they come due. Illustration 2.9 shows the debt to assets ratios for Best Buy.

ILLUSTRATION 2.9 Debt to assets ratio

Debt to Assets Ratio=Total LiabilitiesTotal Assets
Best Buy
($ in millions)
  2020   2019  
  $12,112$15,591=78%   74%  

The 2020 ratio of 78% means that every dollar of assets was financed by 78 cents of debt. The higher the ratio, the more reliant the company is on debt financing.

  • A company with a high debt to assets ratio has a lower equity “buffer” available to creditors if the company becomes insolvent.
  • Thus, from the creditors’ point of view, a high ratio of debt to assets is undesirable (see Decision Tools).

The adequacy of this ratio is often judged in light of the company’s earnings. At one time, Best Buy and its competitor hhgregg relied on debt financing in a roughly equal fashion, but hhgregg went bankrupt. This is largely explained by the fact that hhgregg’s income was insufficient to pay its debt obligations as they came due. Generally, companies with relatively stable earnings, such as public utilities, can support higher debt to assets ratios than can cyclical companies with widely fluctuating earnings, such as many high-tech companies. In later chapters, you will learn additional ways to evaluate solvency.

2.3 Financial Reporting Concepts

You have learned about the four financial statements and some basic ways to interpret those statements. In this section, we discuss concepts that underlie these financial statements. It would be unwise to make business decisions based on financial statements without understanding the implications of these concepts.

The Standard-Setting Environment

How does Best Buy decide on the type of financial information to disclose? What format should it use? How should it measure assets, liabilities, revenues, and expenses? Accounting professionals at Best Buy and all other U.S. companies get guidance from a set of accounting standards that have authoritative support, referred to as generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).

Standard-setting bodies, in consultation with the accounting profession and the business community, determine these accounting standards.

ILLUSTRATION 2.10 World view of the standard-setting environment

A map depicts a global view of the accounting standard-setting bodies and guidance. The key notes below the map read: F A S B, S E C, P C A O B with G A A P guidance, and I A S B and I F R S guidance. The data are as follows: F A S B, S E C, P C A O B with G A A P guidance: Alaska, and United States. I A S B and I F R S guidance: Greenland, Canada and its neighboring Islands, Mexico and continents of South America, Europe, Africa, Asia, and Australia.

Qualities of Useful Information

The FASB and IASB use a conceptual framework to serve as the basis for future accounting standards. The framework begins by stating that the primary objective of financial reporting is to provide financial information that is useful to investors and creditors for making decisions about providing capital. According to the FASB, useful information should possess two fundamental qualities, relevance and faithful representation, as shown in Illustration 2.11.

ILLUSTRATION 2.11 Fundamental qualities of useful information

Two illustrations depict the fundamental qualities of useful information, each displayed with a corresponding text. The first illustration on the left displays a woman seated in front of a desktop. A speech blurb above the woman reads, Tell me what I need to know. The corresponding text titled, Relevance, reads, Accounting information has relevance if it would make a difference in a business decision. Information is considered relevant if it provides information that has predictive value, that is, helps provide accurate expectations about the future, and has confirmatory value, that is, confirms or corrects prior expectations. Materiality is a company-specific aspect of relevance. An item is material when omitting it or misstating it could influence the decision of a financial statement user. The second illustration on the left displays a camera. The corresponding text titled, Faithful Representation, reads, Faithful representation means that information accurately depicts what really existed or happened. To provide a faithful representation, information must be complete (nothing important has been omitted), neutral (is not biased toward one position or another), and free from material error.

Enhancing Qualities

In addition to the two fundamental qualities of relevance and faithful representation, the FASB also describes a number of enhancing qualities of useful information. These include comparability, consistency, verifiability, timeliness, and understandability, as shown in Illustration 2.12.

ILLUSTRATION 2.12 Enhancing qualities of useful information

Five illustrations depict enhancing qualities of useful information, each displayed with a corresponding text. The first illustration on the left displays two apples. The corresponding text titled, Comparability, reads, When different companies use the same accounting principles, comparability results. The second illustration on the left displays three calendars of years 2023, 2024, and 2025. The corresponding text titled, Consistency, reads, The quality of consistency means that a company uses the same accounting principles and methods from year to year. The third illustration on the left displays thumbs up. The corresponding text titled, Verifiable, reads, Information is verifiable if independent observers, using the same methods, obtain similar results. As noted in Chapter 1, certified public accountants (C P As) perform audits of financial statements to verify their accuracy. The fourth illustration on the left displays a clock. The corresponding text titled, Timely, reads, For accounting information to have relevance, it must be timely. That is, it must be available to decision-makers before it loses its capacity to influence decisions. The S E C requires that large public companies provide their annual reports to investors within 60 days of their year-end. The fifth illustration on the left displays a boat. The corresponding text titled, Understandability, reads, Information has the quality of understandability if it is presented in a clear and concise fashion, so that reasonably informed users of that information can interpret it and comprehend its meaning.

Assumptions in Financial Reporting

To develop accounting standards, the FASB relies on some key assumptions, as shown in Illustration 2.13 (see Ethics Note). These include assumptions about the monetary unit, economic entity, periodicity, and going concern.

ILLUSTRATION 2.13 Key assumptions in financial reporting

Four illustrations depicts the key assumptions in financial reporting, each displayed with a corresponding text. The first illustration on the left displays a square divided into two rows with 2 boxes in each row, each box labeled from top left as follows: Employee satisfaction, Salaries paid, Number of employees, and Product reviews. Salaries paid is circled and points to a $ sign that further points to a sheet labeled 5 $ signs, Accounting Records. The corresponding text titled, Monetary Unit Assumption, reads, The monetary unit assumption requires that only those things that can be expressed in money are included in the accounting records. This means that certain important information needed by investors, creditors, and managers, such as customer satisfaction, is not reported in the financial statements. This assumption relies on the monetary unit remaining relatively stable in value.  The second illustration on the left shows 3 people standing with their hands opened toward three different cars to their right: Ford, Kia, and G M. All the three people are holding a note labeled as follows: Ford, Kia, and G M. The corresponding text titled, Economic Entity Assumption, reads, The economic entity assumption states that every economic entity can be separately identified and accounted for. In order to assess a company’s performance and financial position accurately, it is important to not blur company transactions with personal transactions (especially those of its managers) or transactions of other companies. The third illustration on the left displays a scale ranging from 2021 start of business, to 2031 end of business, in increments of 2. The quarters 1, 2, 3, 4 are between years 2023 and 2027. The corresponding text titled, Periodicity Assumption, reads, Notice that the income statement, retained earnings statement, and statement of cash flows all cover periods of one year, and the balance sheet is prepared at the end of each year. The periodicity assumption states that the life of a business can be divided into artificial time periods and that useful reports covering those periods can be prepared for the business.  The fourth illustration on the left displays two factories labeled as follows: Now, and Future. The corresponding text titled, Going Concern Assumption, reads, The going concern assumption states that the business will remain in operation for the foreseeable future. Of course, many businesses do fail, but in general it is reasonable to assume that the business will continue operating.

Principles in Financial Reporting

Measurement Principles

GAAP generally uses one of two measurement principles, the historical cost principle or the fair value principle. Selection of which principle to follow generally relates to trade-offs between relevance and faithful representation.

Historical Cost Principle The historical cost principle (or cost principle) dictates that companies record assets at their cost. This is true not only at the time the asset is purchased but also over the time the asset is held. For example, if land that was purchased for $30,000 increases in value to $40,000, it continues to be reported at $30,000.

Fair Value Principle The fair value principle indicates that assets and liabilities should be reported at fair value (the price that would be received if an asset was sold or the amount that would be required to be paid to settle a liability). Fair value information may be more useful than historical cost for certain types of assets and liabilities. For example, certain investment securities are reported at fair value because market price information is often readily available for these types of assets.

In choosing between cost and fair value, the FASB uses two qualities that make accounting information useful for decision-making—relevance and faithful representation.

  • In determining which measurement principle to use, the FASB weighs the factual nature of cost figures versus the relevance of fair value.
  • In general, the FASB indicates that most assets must follow the historical cost principle because market values may not be representationally faithful.
  • Only in situations where assets are actively traded, such as investment securities, is the fair value principle applied.

Full Disclosure Principle

The full disclosure principle requires that companies disclose sufficient details regarding circumstances and events that would make a difference to financial statement users. If an important item cannot reasonably be reported directly in one of the four types of financial statements, then it should be discussed in notes that accompany the statements.

Cost Constraint

Providing information is costly. In deciding whether companies should be required to provide a certain type of information, accounting standard-setters consider the cost constraint. It weighs the cost that companies will incur to provide the information against the benefit that financial statement users will gain from having the information available.

Illustration 2.14 summarizes aspects of the conceptual framework.

An illustration shows a balance scale. The left plate is labeled cost and the right plate is labeled benefits. The left plate is lower than the right plate.

ILLUSTRATION 2.14 Summary of conceptual framework

Objective of Financial Reporting
  To provide financial information that is useful to existing and potential investors and creditors in making decisions about providing resources to the company.  
Qualitative Characteristics of Useful Financial Information
  Fundamental Qualitative Characteristics   Enhancing Qualitative Characteristics  
  1. Relevance
  • Predictive value
  • Confirmatory value
  • Materiality
2. Faithful representation
  • Complete
  • Neutral
  • Free from material error
 
  1. Comparability
  2. Verifiability
  3. Timeliness
  4. Understandability
 
  Assumptions   Principles  
 
  • Monetary unit
  • Economic entity
  • Periodicity
  • Going concern
 
  • Measurement
  • Historical cost
  • Fair value
  • Full disclosure
 
Cost Constraint

Review and Practice

Learning Objectives Review

In a classified balance sheet, companies classify assets as current assets; long-term investments; property, plant, and equipment; and intangibles. They classify liabilities as either current or long-term. A stockholders’ equity section shows common stock and retained earnings.

Ratio analysis expresses the relationship among selected items of financial statement data. Profitability ratios, such as earnings per share (EPS), measure aspects of the operating success of a company for a given period of time.

Liquidity ratios, such as the current ratio, measure the short-term ability of a company to pay its maturing obligations and to meet unexpected needs for cash. Solvency ratios, such as the debt to assets ratio, measure the ability of a company to survive over a long period.

Generally accepted accounting principles are a set of rules and practices recognized as a general guide for financial reporting purposes. The basic objective of financial reporting is to provide information that is useful for decision-making.

To be judged useful, information should have the primary characteristics of relevance and faithful representation. In addition, useful information is comparable, consistent, verifiable, timely, and understandable.

The monetary unit assumption requires that companies include in the accounting records only transaction data that can be expressed in terms of money. The economic entity assumption states that economic events can be identified with a particular unit of accountability. The periodicity assumption states that the economic life of a business can be divided into artificial time periods and that meaningful accounting reports can be prepared for each period. The going concern assumption states that the company will continue in operation long enough to carry out its existing objectives and commitments.

The historical cost principle states that companies should record assets at their cost. The fair value principle indicates that assets and liabilities should be reported at fair value. The full disclosure principle requires that companies disclose sufficient details regarding circumstances and events that would make a difference to financial statement users.

The cost constraint weighs the cost that companies incur to provide a type of information against its benefit to financial statement users.

Decision Tools Review

Decision Checkpoints Info Needed for Decision Tool to Use for Decision How to Evaluate Results
How does the company’s earnings performance compare with that of previous years? Net income available to common stockholders and weighted-average common shares outstanding Earnings per share=Net income – Preferred dividendsWeighted-average common shares outstanding A higher measure suggests improved performance, although the number is subject to manipulation. Values should not be compared across companies.
Can the company meet its near-term obligations? Current assets and current liabilities Current ratio=Current assetsCurrent liabilities Higher ratio suggests favorable liquidity.
Can the company meet its long-term obligations? Total liabilities and total assets Debt to assets ratio=Total liabilitiesTotal assetss Lower value suggests favorable solvency.

Glossary Review

Classified balance sheet
A balance sheet that groups together similar assets and similar liabilities, using a number of standard classifications and sections.
Comparability
Ability to compare the accounting information of different companies because they use the same accounting principles.
Consistency
Use of the same accounting principles and methods from year to year within a company.
Cost constraint
Constraint that weighs the cost that companies will incur to provide the information against the benefit that financial statement users will gain from having the information available.
Current assets
Assets that companies expect to convert to cash or use up within one year or the operating cycle, whichever is longer.
Current liabilities
Obligations that a company expects to pay within the next year or operating cycle, whichever is longer.
Current ratio
A measure of liquidity computed as current assets divided by current liabilities.
Debt to assets ratio
A measure of solvency calculated as total liabilities divided by total assets. It measures the percentage of total financing provided by creditors.
Earnings per share (EPS)
A measure of the net income earned on each share of common stock; computed as net income minus preferred dividends divided by the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year.
Economic entity assumption
An assumption that every economic entity can be separately identified and accounted for.
Fair value principle
Assets and liabilities should be reported at fair value (the price received to sell an asset or settle a liability).
Faithful representation
Information that accurately depicts what really happened.
Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB)
The primary accounting standard-setting body in the United States.
Full disclosure principle
Accounting principle that dictates that companies disclose sufficient details regarding circumstances and events that would make a difference to financial statement users.
Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP)
A set of accounting standards that have substantial authoritative support and which guide accounting professionals.
Going concern assumption
The assumption that the company will continue in operation for the foreseeable future.
Historical cost principle
An accounting principle that states that companies should record assets at their cost.
Intangible assets
Assets that do not have physical substance.
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)
An accounting standard-setting body that issues standards adopted by many countries outside of the United States.
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Accounting standards, issued by the IASB, that have been adopted by many countries outside of the United States.
Liquidity
The ability of a company to pay obligations that are expected to become due within the next year or operating cycle.
Liquidity ratios
Measures of the short-term ability of the company to pay its maturing obligations and to meet unexpected needs for cash.
Long-term investments
Generally, (1) investments in stocks and bonds of other corporations that companies hold for more than one year; (2) long-term assets, such as land and buildings, not currently being used in the company’s operations; and (3) long-term notes receivable.
Long-term liabilities (long-term debt)
Obligations that a company expects to pay after one year.
Materiality
Whether omitting or misstating an item could influence the decision of a financial statement user.
Monetary unit assumption
An assumption that requires that only those things that can be expressed in money are included in the accounting records.
Operating cycle
The average time required to purchase inventory, sell it on account, and then collect cash from customers—that is, go from cash to cash.
Periodicity assumption
An assumption that the life of a business can be divided into artificial time periods and that useful reports covering those periods can be prepared for the business.
Profitability ratios
Measures of the operating success of a company for a given period of time.
Property, plant, and equipment
Assets with relatively long useful lives that are currently used in operating the business.
Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB)
The group charged with determining auditing standards and reviewing the performance of auditing firms.
Ratio
An expression of the mathematical relationship between one quantity and another.
Ratio analysis
A technique that expresses the relationship among selected items of financial statement data.
Relevance
The quality of information that indicates the information makes a difference in a decision.
Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)
The agency of the U.S. government that oversees U.S. financial markets and accounting standard-setting bodies.
Solvency
The ability of a company to pay interest as it comes due and to repay the balance of debt due at its maturity.
Solvency ratios
Measures of the ability of the company to survive over a long period of time.
Timely
Information that is available to decision-makers before it loses its capacity to influence decisions.
Understandability
Information presented in a clear and concise fashion so that users can interpret it and comprehend its meaning.
Verifiable
The quality of information that occurs when independent observers, using the same methods, obtain similar results.
Working capital
The difference between the amounts of current assets and current liabilities.

Practice Multiple-Choice Questions

1. (LO 1) In a classified balance sheet, assets are usually classified as:

  1. current assets; long-term assets; property, plant, and equipment; and intangible assets.
  2. current assets; long-term investments; property, plant, and equipment; and common stock.
  3. current assets; long-term investments; tangible assets; and intangible assets.
  4. current assets; long-term investments; property, plant, and equipment; and intangible assets.

Answer

d. Assets are classified as current assets; long-term investments; property, plant and equipment; and intangible assets. The other choices are incorrect because (a) long-term assets includes long-term investments; property, plant, and equipment; and intangible assets; (b) common stock refers to the equity of the firm and is not an asset; and (c) while tangible assets describes property, plant, and equipment, it is better to use the more common terminology of property, plant, and equipment.

2. (LO 1) Current assets are listed:

  1. by order of expected conversion to cash.
  2. by importance.
  3. by longevity.
  4. alphabetically.

Answer

a. Current assets should be listed by order of expected conversion to cash (liquidity), not (b) by importance, (c) by longevity, or (d) alphabetically.

3. (LO 1) The correct order of presentation in a classified balance sheet for the following current assets is:

  1. accounts receivable, cash, prepaid insurance, inventory.
  2. cash, inventory, accounts receivable, prepaid insurance.
  3. cash, accounts receivable, inventory, prepaid insurance.
  4. inventory, cash, accounts receivable, prepaid insurance.

Answer

c. The correct order of presentation for current assets is cash, accounts receivable, inventory, and then prepaid insurance. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

4. (LO 1) A company has purchased a tract of land. It expects to build a production plant on the land in approximately 5 years. During the 5 years before construction, the land will be idle. The land should be reported as:

  1. property, plant, and equipment.
  2. land expense.
  3. a long-term investment.
  4. an intangible asset.

Answer

c. Land or buildings that are currently not used in operations are considered to be long-term investments. The other choices are incorrect because (a) this classification is for property, plant, and equipment used in operations; (b) land is never expensed; and (d) intangible assets have no physical existence and are used in the production of income.

5. (LO 1) The balance in retained earnings is not affected by:

  1. net income.
  2. net loss.
  3. issuance of common stock.
  4. dividends.

Answer

c. Issuance of common stock has no impact on retained earnings. The other choices are incorrect because (a) net income increases retained earnings, (b) net loss decreases retained earnings, and (d) dividends decrease retained earnings.

6. (LO 2) Which is an indicator of profitability?

  1. Current ratio.
  2. Earnings per share.
  3. Debt to assets ratio.
  4. Total assets.

Answer

b. Earnings per share is a measure of profitability. The other choices are incorrect because (a) the current ratio is a measure of liquidity, (c) the debt to assets ratio is a measure of solvency, and (d) total assets is a measure of size.

7. (LO 2) For 2025, Spanos Corporation reported net income $26,000, net sales $400,000, and weighted-average common shares outstanding 4,000. There were preferred dividends of $2,000. What was the 2025 earnings per share?

  1. $6.00.
  2. $6.50.
  3. $99.50.
  4. $100.00.

Answer

a. Earnings per share = Net income ($26,000) less Preferred dividends ($2,000) divided by Weighted-average common shares outstanding (4,000) = $6.00 per share, not (b) $6.50, (c) $99.50, or (d) $100.00.

8. (LO 2) Which of these measures is an evaluation of a company’s ability to pay current liabilities?

  1. Earnings per share.
  2. Current ratio.
  3. Both earnings per share and current ratio.
  4. None of the answer choices is correct.

Answer

b. The current ratio measures liquidity. Higher current ratios indicate higher liquidity. The other choices are incorrect because (a) earnings per share is a measure of a firm’s profitability, not its ability to pay its current liabilities; (c) one of these answers is incorrect; and (d) there is a correct answer.

9. (LO 2) The following ratios are available for Reilly Inc. and O’Hare Inc.

    Current Ratio   Debt to Assets Ratio   Earnings per Share
Reilly Inc.   2:1   75%   $3.50
O’Hare Inc.   1.5:1   40%   $2.75

Compared to O’Hare Inc., Reilly Inc. has:

  1. higher liquidity, higher solvency, and higher profitability.
  2. lower liquidity, higher solvency, and higher profitability.
  3. higher liquidity, lower solvency, and higher profitability.
  4. higher liquidity and lower solvency, but profitability cannot be compared based on information provided.

Answer

d. Reilly Inc. has higher liquidity as it has a higher current ratio, and lower solvency due to its higher debt to assets ratio. However, profitability cannot be compared across companies using earnings per share because of the wide variations in the number of shares of common stock of different companies. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

10. (LO 2) Companies that can support higher debt to assets ratios are characterized by having:

  1. stable earnings.
  2. fluctuating earnings.
  3. few plant assets.
  4. low amounts of receivables.

Answer

a. In order to meet debt payments as they come due, a company must have a stable earnings stream. The other choices are incorrect as they do not address the ability to meet debt payments as they come due.

11. (LO 3) Generally accepted accounting principles are:

  1. a set of standards and rules that are recognized as a general guide for financial reporting.
  2. usually established by the Internal Revenue Service.
  3. the guidelines used to resolve ethical dilemmas.
  4. fundamental truths that can be derived from the laws of nature.

Answer

a. All U.S. companies get guidance from a set of rules and practices that have authoritative support, referred to as generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Standard-setting bodies, in consultation with the accounting profession and the business community, determine these accounting standards. The other choices are incorrect because GAAP is (b) not established by the Internal Revenue Service, (c) not intended to provide guidance in resolving ethical dilemmas, or (d) created by people and can evolve over time, unlike laws of nature, such as those in physics and chemistry.

12. (LO 3) What organization issues U.S. accounting standards?

  1. Financial Accounting Standards Board.
  2. International Accounting Standards Committee.
  3. International Auditing Standards Committee.
  4. None of the answer choices is correct.

Answer

a. The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) is the organization that issues U.S. accounting standards, not the (b) International Accounting Standards Committee or (c) International Auditing Standards Committee. Choice (d) is wrong as there is a correct answer.

13. (LO 3) What is the primary criterion by which accounting information can be judged?

  1. Consistency.
  2. Predictive value.
  3. Usefulness for decision-making.
  4. Comparability.

Answer

c. Usefulness for decision-making is the primary criterion by which accounting information can be judged. The other choices are incorrect because (a) consistency, (b) predictive value, and (d) comparability all help to make accounting information more useful but are not the primary criterion by which accounting information is judged.

14. (LO 3) Neutrality is an ingredient of:

  Faithful Representation Relevance
a. Yes Yes
b. No No
c. Yes No
d. No Yes

Answer

c. Neutrality is an ingredient of faithful representation but not relevance. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

15. (LO 3) The characteristic of information that evaluates whether omitting or misstating an item could influence the decision of a financial statement user.

  1. Comparability.
  2. Materiality.
  3. Cost.
  4. Consistency.

Answer

b. Materiality evaluates whether omitting or misstating an item could influence the decision of a financial statement user, not (a) comparability, (c) cost, or (d) consistency.

Practice Brief Exercises

Prepare the current assets section of a balance sheet.

1. (LO 1) A list of financial statement items for Miguel Company includes the following: Accounts Receivable $25,000, Prepaid Insurance $7,000, Cash $8,000, Supplies $11,000, and Stock Investments (short-term) $14,000. Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet, listing the accounts in proper sequence.

Solution

Miguel Company
Balance Sheet (partial)
  Current assets      
  Cash   $ 8,000  
  Stock investments   14,000  
  Accounts receivable   25,000  
  Supplies   11,000  
  Prepaid insurance   7,000  
  Total current assets   $65,000  

Classify accounts on balance sheet.

2. (LO 1) The following are the major balance sheet classifications:

Current assets (CA) Current liabilities (CL)
Long-term investments (LTI) Long-term liabilities (LTL)
Property, plant, and equipment (PPE) Common stock (CS)
Intangible assets (IA) Retained earnings (RE)

Match each of the following accounts to its proper balance sheet classification.

_____Prepaid insurance _____Unearned service revenue
_____Notes payable (short-term) _____Debt investments (short-term)
_____Equipment _____Accumulated depreciation—equipment
_____Mortgage payable _____Stock investments (long-term)
_____Copyrights _____Salaries and wages payable

Solution

CA Prepaid insurance CL Unearned service revenue
CL Notes payable (short-term) CA Debt investments (short-term)
PPE Equipment PPE Accumulated depreciation—equipment
LTL Mortgage payable LTI Stock investments (long-term)
IA Copyrights CL Salaries and wages payable

Calculate liquidity and solvency ratios.

3. (LO 2) Maison Inc. reported the following selected information at December 31.

  2025
Total current assets $ 45,584
Total assets 278,000
Total current liabilities 32,560
Total liabilities 189,040

Calculate (a) the current ratio and (b) the debt to assets ratio for December 31, 2025.

Solution

  1. Current ratio=Current assetsCurrent liabilities=$45,584$32,560=1.40:1
  2. Debt to assets ratio=Total liabilitiesTotal assets=$189,040$278,000=68.0%

Practice Exercises

Prepare assets section of a classified balance sheet.

1. (LO 1) Suppose the following information (in thousands of dollars) is available for H. J. Heinz Company—famous for ketchup and other fine food products—for the year ended April 30, 2025.

Prepaid insurance $ 168,182 Buildings $4,344,269
Land 56,007 Cash 617,687
Goodwill 4,411,521 Accounts receivable 1,161,481
Trademarks 723,243 Accumulated depreciation—buildings 2,295,563
Inventory 1,378,216

Instructions

Prepare the assets section of a classified balance sheet, listing the items in proper sequence and including a statement heading.

Solution

H. J. Heinz Company
Balance Sheet (partial)
April 30, 2025
(in thousands)
  Assets  
  Current assets        
  Cash   $617,687    
  Accounts receivable   1,161,481    
  Inventory   1,378,216    
  Prepaid insurance   168,182    
  Total current assets     $ 3,325,566  
  Property, plant, and equipment        
  Land   56,007    
  Buildings $4,344,269      
  Less: Accumulated depr.—buildings 2,295,563 2,048,706 2,104,713  
  Intangible assets        
  Goodwill   4,411,521    
  Trademarks   723,243 5,134,764  
  Total assets     $10,565,043  

Compute and interpret various ratios.

2. (LO 2) Suppose the following data were taken from the 2025 and 2024 financial statements of American Eagle Outfitters. (All dollars are in thousands.)

  2025 2024
Current assets $1,020,834 $1,189,108
Total assets 1,867,680 1,979,558
Current liabilities 376,178 464,618
Total liabilities 527,216 562,246
Net income 400,019 387,359
Dividends paid on common stock 80,796 61,521
Weighted-average common shares outstanding 216,119 222,662

Instructions

Perform each of the following.

  1. Calculate the current ratio for each year.
  2. Calculate earnings per share for each year.
  3. Calculate the debt to assets ratio for each year.
  4. Discuss American Eagle’s solvency in 2025 versus 2024.

Solution

        2025   2024
a.   Current ratio   $1,020,834$376,178=2.71:1   $1,189,108$464,618=2.56:1
b.   Earning per share   $400,019216,119=$1.85   $387,359222,662=$1.74
c.   Debt to assets ratio   $527,216$1,867,680=28.2%   $562,246$1,979,558=28.4%
d. American Eagle’s debt to assets ratio decreased slightly from 28.4% for 2024 to 28.2% for 2025, indicating a very small increase in solvency for 2025.

Practice Problem

Prepare financial statements.

(LO 1) Listed here are items taken from the income statement and balance sheet of Bargain Electronics, Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2025. Certain items have been combined for simplification. (Amounts are given in thousands.)

Notes payable (due in 3 years) $50.5
Cash 141.1
Salaries and wages expense 2,933.6
Common stock 454.9
Accounts payable 922.2
Accounts receivable 723.3
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 110.0
Equipment 1,031.0
Cost of goods sold 9,501.4
Income taxes payable 7.2
Interest expense 1.5
Mortgage payable 451.5
Retained earnings (December 31, 2025) 1,336.3
Inventory 1,636.5
Sales revenue 12,456.9
Debt investments (short-term) 382.6
Income tax expense 30.5
Goodwill 202.7
Notes payable (due in 6 months) 784.6

Instructions

Prepare an income statement and a classified balance sheet using the items listed. Do not use any item more than once.

Solution

Bargain Electronics, Inc.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2025
(in thousands)
  Revenues      
  Sales revenue   $12,456.9  
  Expenses      
  Cost of goods sold $9,501.4    
  Salaries and wages expense 2,933.6    
  Interest expense 1.5    
  Income tax expense 30.5    
  Total expenses   12,467.0  
  Net loss   $(10.1)  
Bargain Electronics, Inc.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2025
(in thousands)
  Assets  
  Current assets      
  Cash $141.1    
  Debt investments 382.6    
  Accounts receivable 723.3    
  Inventory 1,636.5    
  Total current assets   $2,883.5  
  Property, plant and equipment      
  Equipment 1,031.0    
  Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment 110.0 921.0  
  Intangible assets      
  Goodwill   202.7  
  Total assets   $4,007.2  
  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity  
  Current liabilities      
  Notes payable $784.6    
  Accounts payable 922.2    
  Income taxes payable 7.2    
  Total current liabilities   $1,714.0  
  Long-term liabilities      
  Mortgage payable 451.5    
  Notes payable 50.5 502.0  
  Total liabilities   2,216.0  
  Stockholders’ equity      
  Common stock 454.9    
  Retained earnings 1,336.3    
  Total stockholders’ equity   1,791.2  
  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $4,007.2  

Questions

1. What is meant by the term operating cycle?

2. Define current assets. What basis is used for ordering individual items within the current assets section?

3. Distinguish between long-term investments and property, plant, and equipment.

4. How do current liabilities differ from long-term liabilities?

5. Identify the two parts of stockholders’ equity in a corporation and indicate the purpose of each.

6.

  1. Geena Lowe believes that the analysis of financial statements is directed at two characteristics of a company: liquidity and profitability. Is Geena correct? Explain.
  2. Are short-term creditors, long-term creditors, and stockholders primarily interested in the same characteristics of a company? Explain.

7. Name ratios useful in assessing (a) liquidity, (b) solvency, and (c) profitability.

8. Tom Dawes, the founder of Footwear Inc., needs to raise $500,000 to expand his company’s operations. He has been told that raising the money through debt will increase the riskiness of his company much more than issuing stock. He doesn’t understand why this is true. Explain it to him.

9. What do these classes of ratios measure?

  1. Liquidity ratios.
  2. Profitability ratios.
  3. Solvency ratios.

10. Holding all other factors constant, indicate whether each of the following signals generally good or bad news about a company.

  1. Increase in earnings per share.
  2. Increase in the current ratio.
  3. Increase in the debt to assets ratio.

11. Which ratio or ratios from this chapter do you think should be of greatest interest to:

  1. a pension fund considering investing in a corporation’s 20-year bonds?
  2. a bank contemplating a short-term loan?
  3. an investor in common stock?

12.

  1. What are generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP)?
  2. What body provides authoritative support for GAAP?

13.

  1. What is the primary objective of financial reporting?
  2. Identify the characteristics of useful accounting information.

14. Merle Hawkins, the president of Pathway Company, is pleased. Pathway substantially increased its net income in 2025 while keeping its unit inventory relatively the same. Jon Dietz, chief accountant, cautions Merle, however. Dietz says that since Pathway changed its method of inventory valuation, there is a consistency problem and it is difficult to determine whether Pathway is better off. Is Dietz correct? Why or why not?

15. What is the distinction between comparability and consistency?

16. Describe the constraint inherent in the presentation of accounting information.

17. Your roommate believes that accounting standards are uniform throughout the world. Is your roommate correct? Explain.

18. Wanda Roberts is president of Best Texts. She has no accounting background. Wanda cannot understand why fair value is not used as the basis for all accounting measurement and reporting. Discuss.

19. What is the economic entity assumption? Give an example of its violation.

20. What was Apple’s largest current asset, largest current liability, and largest item under “Assets” at September 26, 2020?

Brief Exercises

Classify accounts on balance sheet.

BE2.1 (LO 1), K The following are the major balance sheet classifications:

Current assets (CA) Current liabilities (CL)
Long-term investments (LTI) Long-term liabilities (LTL)
Property, plant, and equipment (PPE) Common stock (CS)
Intangible assets (IA) Retained earnings (RE)

Match each of the following accounts to its proper balance sheet classification.

_____Accounts payable _____Buildings
_____Accounts receivable _____Cash
_____Accumulated depreciation _____Goodwill
_____Income taxes payable _____Inventory
_____Investment in long-term bonds _____Patents
_____Land _____Supplies

Identify the order of asset classifications.

BE2.2 (LO 1), K Place a number, 1 through 7, in front of each of the following balance sheet categories to designate the order in which they are to be presented in a classified balance sheet.

_____Long-term investments _____Current assets
_____Current liabilities _____Long-term liabilities
_____Stockholders’ equity _____Property, plant, and equipment
_____Intangible assets  

Prepare the current assets section of a balance sheet.

BE2.3 (LO 1), AP A list of financial statement items for Chin Company includes the following: accounts receivable $14,000, prepaid insurance $2,600, cash $10,400, supplies $3,800, and debt investments (short-term) $8,200. Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet listing the items in the proper sequence.

Compute earnings per share.

BE2.4 (LO 2), AP The following information (in millions of dollars) is available for L Brands for a recent year: sales revenue $9,043, net income $220, preferred dividend $0, and weighted-average common shares outstanding 333 million. Compute the earnings per share for L Brands.

Calculate liquidity ratios.

BE2.5 (LO 2), AP These selected condensed data are taken from a recent balance sheet of Bob Evans Farms (in millions of dollars).

Cash $29.3
Accounts receivable 20.5
Inventory 28.7
Other current assets 24.0
Total current assets $102.5
Total current liabilities $201.2

Compute working capital and the current ratio.

Calculate liquidity and solvency ratios.

BE2.6 (LO 2), AP Ross Music Inc. reported the following selected information at March 31.

  2025
Total current assets $262,787
Total assets 439,832
Total current liabilities 293,625
Total liabilities 376,002

Calculate (a) the current ratio and (b) the debt to assets ratio for March 31, 2025.

Recognize generally accepted accounting principles.

BE2.7 (LO 3), K Indicate whether each statement is true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

  1. GAAP is a set of rules and practices established by accounting standard-setting bodies to serve as a general guide for financial reporting purposes.
  2. The primary standard-setting body in the United States is the IRS.

Identify characteristics of useful information.

BE2.8 (LO 3), K The accompanying chart shows the qualitative characteristics of useful accounting information. Fill in the blanks.

A flowchart shows a list of qualitative characteristics useful to tabulate accounting information. A central box labeled as "Usefulness" has arrows extended on both the right and left sides. The left arrow points towards a box titled Fundamental qualities. An arrow points down from this box to a box listing relevance on the first line with three lines labeled as a, b, and c just below it. It is followed by another downward arrow to a box with four lines with the first labeled as Faithful representation, the third labeled as Neutral, and the second and fourth labeled as d and e, respectively. The right arrow points towards a box titled enhancing qualities with an arrow pointing down to four lines labeled as f, g, h, and Understandability. The alphabetical values in the boxes represent a blank.

Identify characteristics of useful information.

BE2.9 (LO 3), K Given the characteristics of useful accounting information, complete each of the following statements.

  1. For information to be _____, it should have predictive and confirmatory value.
  2. _____ means that information accurately depicts what really happened.
  3. _____ means using the same accounting principles and methods from year to year within a company.

Identify characteristics of useful information.

BE2.10 (LO 3), K Here are some qualitative characteristics of useful accounting information:

  1. Predictive value
  2. Neutral
  3. Verifiable
  4. Timely

Match each qualitative characteristic to one of the following statements.

  1. ______ a. Accounting information should help provide accurate expectations about future events.
  2. ______ b. Accounting information cannot be selected, prepared, or presented to favor one set of interested users over another.
  3. ______ c. Independent observers, using the same methods, are able to obtain similar results.
  4. ______ d. Accounting information must be available to decision-makers before it loses its capacity to influence their decisions.

Define full disclosure principle.

BE2.11 (LO 3), K The full disclosure principle dictates that:

  1. financial statements should disclose all assets at their cost.
  2. financial statements should disclose only those events that can be measured in dollars.
  3. financial statements should disclose sufficient detail regarding events and circumstances that would make a difference to users of financial statements.
  4. financial statements should not be relied on unless an auditor has expressed an unqualified opinion on them.

DO IT! Exercises

Prepare assets section of balance sheet.

DO IT! 2.1a (LO 1), AP Mylar Corporation has collected the following information related to its December 31, 2025, balance sheet.

Accounts receivable $22,000 Equipment $180,000
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 50,000 Inventory 58,000
Cash 13,000 Supplies 7,000
Stock investments (long-term) 1,900 Goodwill 4,100

Prepare the assets section of Mylar Corporation’s balance sheet.

Classify financial statement items by balance sheet classification.

DO IT! 2.1b (LO 1), AP The following financial statement items were taken from the financial statements of Gomez Corp.

____Trademarks ____Inventory
____Notes payable (current) ____Accumulated depreciation
____Interest revenue ____Land
____Income taxes payable ____Common stock
____Debt investments (long-term) ____Advertising expense
____Unearned sales revenue ____Mortgage payable (due in 3 years)

Match each of the financial statement items to its proper balance sheet classification. (See E2.1 for a list of the balance sheet classifications.) If the item would not appear on a balance sheet, use “NA.”

Compute ratios and analyze.

DO IT! 2.2 (LO 2), AP The following information is available for Nguoi Corporation.

  2025 2024
Current assets $ 54,000 $ 36,000
Total assets 240,000 205,000
Current liabilities 22,000 30,000
Total liabilities 72,000 100,000
Net income 80,000 40,000
Preferred dividends 6,000 6,000
Common dividends 3,000 1,500
Common shares outstanding at beginning of year 40,000 30,000
Common shares outstanding at end of year 75,000 40,000
  1. Compute earnings per share for 2025 and 2024 for Nguoi, and comment on the change. Nguoi’s primary competitor, Matisse Corporation, had earnings per share of $1 per share in 2025. Comment on the difference in the ratios of the two companies.
  2. Compute the current ratio and debt to assets ratio for each year, and comment on the changes.

Identify financial accounting concepts and principles.

DO IT! 2.3 (LO 3), K The following characteristics, assumptions, principles, and constraint guide the FASB when it creates accounting standards.

Relevance Periodicity assumption
Faithful representation Going concern assumption
Comparability Historical cost principle
Consistency Full disclosure principle
Monetary unit assumption Materiality
Economic entity assumption Cost constraint

Match each item above with a description below.

  1. ____Items not easily quantified in dollar terms are not reported in the financial statements.
  2. ____Accounting information must be complete, neutral, and free from material error.
  3. ____Personal transactions are not mixed with the company’s transactions.
  4. ____The cost to provide information should be weighed against the benefit that users will gain from having the information available.
  5. ____A company’s use of the same accounting principles from year to year.
  6. ____Assets are recorded and reported at original purchase price.
  7. ____Accounting information should help users predict future events, and should confirm or correct prior expectations.
  8. ____The life of a business can be divided into artificial segments of time.
  9. ____The reporting of sufficient details regarding circumstances and events that would make a difference to financial statement users.
  10. ____The judgment concerning whether omitting or misstating an item could influence the decision of a financial statement user.
  11. ____Assumes a business will remain in operation for the foreseeable future.
  12. ____Different companies use the same accounting principles.

Exercises

Classify accounts on balance sheet.

E2.1 (LO 1), AP The following are the major balance sheet classifications.

Current assets (CA) Current liabilities (CL)
Long-term investments (LTI) Long-term liabilities (LTL)
Property, plant, and equipment (PPE) Stockholders’ equity (SE)
Intangible assets (IA)  

Instructions

Classify each of the following financial statement items taken from Ming Corporation’s balance sheet.

____ Accounts payable ____ Income taxes payable
____ Accounts receivable ____ Inventory
____ Accumulated depreciation—equipment ____ Stock investments (to be sold in 7 months)
____ Land
____ Buildings ____ Mortgage payable
____ Cash ____ Supplies
____ Interest payable ____ Equipment
____ Goodwill ____ Prepaid rent

Classify financial statement items by balance sheet classification.

E2.2 (LO 1), AP The major balance sheet classifications are listed in E2.1.

Instructions

Classify each of the following financial statement items based upon the major balance sheet classifications listed in E2.1.

____ Prepaid advertising ____ Patents
____ Equipment ____ Bonds payable
____ Trademarks ____ Common stock
____ Salaries and wages payable ____ Accumulated depreciation—equipment
____ Income taxes payable
____ Retained earnings ____ Unearned sales revenue
____ Accounts receivable ____ Inventory
____ Land (held for future use)  

Classify items as current or noncurrent, and prepare assets section of balance sheet.

E2.3 (LO 1), AP Suppose the following items were taken from the December 31, 2025, assets section of the Boeing Company balance sheet. (All dollars are in millions.)

Inventory $16,933 Patents $12,528
Notes receivable—due after December 31, 2026 5,466 Buildings 21,579
Cash 9,215
Notes receivable—due before December 31, 2026 368 Accounts receivable 5,785
Debt investments (short-term) 2,008
Accumulated depreciation—buildings 12,795    

Instructions

Prepare the assets section of a classified balance sheet, listing the current assets in order of their liquidity.

Prepare assets section of a classified balance sheet.

An icon shows an encircled rightward pointing arrow with a text beside reads, Excel.

E2.4 (LO 1), AP Suppose the following information (in thousands of dollars) is available for H. J. Heinz Company—famous for ketchup and other fine food products—at April 30, 2025.

Prepaid insurance $ 125,765 Buildings $4,033,369
Land 76,193 Cash 373,145
Goodwill 3,982,954 Accounts receivable 1,171,797
Trademarks 757,907 Accumulated depreciation—buildings 2,131,260
Inventory 1,237,613

Instructions

Prepare the assets section of a classified balance sheet, listing the items in proper sequence and including a statement heading.

Prepare a classified balance sheet.

E2.5 (LO 1), AP These items are taken from the financial statements of Longhorn Co. at December 31, 2025.

Buildings $105,800
Accounts receivable 12,600
Prepaid insurance 3,200
Cash 11,840
Equipment 82,400
Land 61,200
Insurance expense 780
Depreciation expense 5,300
Interest expense 2,600
Common stock 60,000
Retained earnings (January 1, 2025) 40,000
Accumulated depreciation—buildings 45,600
Accounts payable 9,500
Notes payable 93,600
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 18,720
Interest payable 3,600
Service revenue 14,700

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet. Assume that $13,600 of the note payable will be paid in 2026.

Prepare a classified balance sheet.

E2.6 (LO 1), AP The following items are taken from the financial statements of Carmen Co. at December 31, 2025.

Land $195,600
Accounts receivable 21,700
Supplies 9,200
Cash 11,840
Equipment 82,400
Buildings 261,200
Land improvements 45,780
Notes receivable (due in 2026) 5,300
Accumulated depreciation—land improvements 12,600
Common stock 75,000
Retained earnings (December 31, 2025) 495,000
Accumulated depreciation—buildings 32,600
Accounts payable 9,500
Mortgage payable 93,600
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 18,720
Interest payable 3,600
Income taxes payable 14,700
Patents 46,700
Investments in stock (long-term) 71,500
Debt investments (short-term) 4,100

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet. Assume that $9,100 of the mortgage payable will be paid in 2026.

Prepare a classified balance sheet.

E2.7 (LO 1), AP Suppose the following items were taken from the 2025 financial statements of Texas Instruments, Inc. (All dollars are in millions.)

Common stock $2,826 Accumulated depreciation—equipment $3,547
Prepaid rent 164 Accounts payable 1,459
Equipment 6,705 Patents 2,210
Stock investments (long-term) 637 Notes payable (long-term) 810
Debt investments (short-term) 1,743 Retained earnings 6,896
Income taxes payable 128 Accounts receivable 1,823
Cash 1,182 Inventory 1,202

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 2025.

Prepare liabilities and stockholders’ equity sections.

E2.8 (LO 1), AP Randal Inc.’s balance sheet, dated October 28, 2025, includes the following liabilities and stockholders’ equity items (in millions).

Accounts payable $431.6 Long-term debt $1,209.8
Common stock 642.4 Other long-term liabilities 122.6
Current portion of long-term debt 254.9 Retained earnings 979.8
Income taxes payable 14.8 Unearned sales revenue 16.0

Instructions

Prepare the liabilities and stockholders’ equity sections of the balance sheet.

Prepare a balance sheet.

E2.9 (LO 1), AP The financial statements of Summit Ltd. includes the following items at December 31, 2025.

Accounts payable $ 21,050 Income tax expense $ 5,200
Accounts receivable 20,780 Interest expense 4,550
Accumulated depreciation—buildings 50,600 Interest payable 2,100
Land 194,000
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 21,470 Long-term investments 28,970
Mortgage payable 104,000
Buildings 133,800 Operating expenses 158,680
Cash 24,040 Prepaid insurance 1,420
Common stock 140,000 Retained earnings, January 1 116,520
Equipment 66,100 Service revenue 183,040
    Supplies 1,240

Instructions

  1. Calculate net income and the ending balance of retained earnings at December 31, 2025. It is not necessary to prepare a formal income statement or retained earnings statement.
  2. Prepare a balance sheet dated December 31, 2025. Assume that the company will pay $30,500 of the mortgage payable in 2026.

Prepare financial statements.

E2.10 (LO 1), AP The following financial statement items are for Batra Corporation at year-end, July 31, 2025.

Operating expenses $ 32,500 Interest payable $ 1,000
Salaries and wages expense 44,700 Supplies expense 900
Unearned sales revenue 12,000 Dividends declared 12,000
Utilities expense 2,600 Depreciation expense 3,000
Equipment 62,900 Retained earnings, August 1, 2024 17,940
Accounts payable 4,220 Rent expense 10,800
Service revenue 113,600 Income tax expense 5,000
Rent revenue 18,500 Supplies 1,500
Common stock 25,000 Debt investments (short-term) 20,000
Cash 5,060 Bank loan payable (due December 31, 2025) 21,800
Accounts receivable 17,100
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 6,000 Interest expense 2,000
   

Instructions

Prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet for the year.

Compute and interpret profitability ratio.

E2.11 (LO 2), AP Suppose the following information is available for Callaway Golf Company for the years 2025 and 2024. (Dollars are in thousands, except share information.)

  2025 2024
Net sales $ 1,117,204 $ 1,124,591
Net income (loss) 66,176 54,587
Total assets 855,338 838,078
Share information    
Common shares outstanding at year-end 64,507,000 66,282,000
Preferred dividends –0– –0–

There were 73,139,000 shares of common stock outstanding at the end of 2023.

Instructions

  1. What was the company’s earnings per share for each year?
  2. Based on your findings above, how did the company’s profitability change from 2024 to 2025?
  3. Suppose the company had paid dividends on preferred stock and on common stock during the year. How would this affect your calculation in part (a)?

Prepare financial statements.

E2.12 (LO 1, 2), AP These financial statement items are for Fairview Corporation at year-end, July 31, 2025.

Salaries and wages payable $ 2,080
Salaries and wages expense 57,500
Supplies expense 15,600
Equipment 18,500
Accounts payable 4,100
Service revenue 66,100
Rent revenue 8,500
Notes payable (due in 2028) 1,800
Common stock 16,000
Cash 29,200
Accounts receivable 9,780
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 6,000
Dividends 4,000
Depreciation expense 4,000
Retained earnings (beginning of the year) 34,000

Instructions

  1. Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year. Fairview Corporation did not issue any new stock during the year.
  2. Prepare a classified balance sheet at July 31.
  3. Compute the current ratio and debt to assets ratio.
  4. Suppose that you are the president of Lunar Equipment. Your sales manager has approached you with a proposal to sell $20,000 of equipment to Fairview. He would like to provide a loan to Fairview in the form of a 10%, 5-year note payable. Evaluate how this loan would change Fairview’s current ratio and debt to assets ratio, and discuss whether you would make the sale.

Compute liquidity ratios and compare results.

E2.13 (LO 2), AP Nordstrom, Inc. operates department stores in numerous states. Selected financial statement data (in millions of dollars) for a recent year follow.

  Beginning of Year End of Year
Cash and cash equivalents $358 $72
Receivables (net) 1,788 1,942
Merchandise inventory 956 900
Other current assets 259 303
Total current assets $3,361 $3,217
Total current liabilities $1,635 $1,601

Instructions

  1. Compute working capital and the current ratio at the beginning of the year and at the end of the year.
  2. Did Nordstrom’s liquidity improve or worsen during the year?
  3. Using the data in the chapter, compare Nordstrom’s liquidity with Best Buy’s.

Compute liquidity measures and discuss findings.

E2.14 (LO 2), AP The chief financial officer (CFO) of Myeneke Corporation requested that the accounting department prepare a preliminary balance sheet on December 30, 2025, so that the CFO could get an idea of how the company stood. He knows that certain debt agreements with its creditors require the company to maintain a current ratio of at least 2:1. The preliminary balance sheet is as follows.

Myeneke Corp.
Balance Sheet
December 30, 2025
Current assets     Current liabilities    
Cash $25,000   Accounts payable $ 20,000  
Accounts receivable 30,000   Salaries and wages payable 10,000 $ 30,000
Prepaid insurance 5,000 $ 60,000 Long-term liabilities    
Equipment (net)   200,000 Notes payable   80,000
Total assets   $260,000 Total liabilities   110,000
      Stockholders’ equity    
      Common stock 100,000  
      Retained earnings 50,000 150,000
      Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $260,000

Instructions

  1. Calculate the current ratio and working capital based on the preliminary balance sheet.
  2. Based on the results in (a), the CFO requested that $20,000 of cash be used to pay off the balance of the Accounts Payable account on December 31, 2025. Calculate the new current ratio and working capital after the company takes these actions.
  3. Discuss the pros and cons of the current ratio and working capital as measures of liquidity.
  4. Was it unethical for the CFO to take these steps?

Compute and interpret solvency ratios.

E2.15 (LO 2), AP Suppose the following data were taken from the 2025 and 2024 financial statements of American Eagle Outfitters. (All numbers, including share data, are in thousands.)

  2025 2024
Current assets $ 925,359 $1,020,834
Total assets 1,963,676 1,867,680
Current liabilities 401,763 376,178
Total liabilities 554,645 527,216
Net income 179,061 400,019
Dividends paid on common stock 82,394 80,796
Weighted-average common shares outstanding 205,169 216,119

Instructions

Perform each of the following.

  1. Calculate the current ratio for each year.
  2. Calculate earnings per share for each year.
  3. Calculate the debt to assets ratio for each year.
  4. Discuss American Eagle’s solvency in 2025 versus 2024.

Identify qualitative characteristics.

E2.16 (LO 3), K Here are some fundamental and enhancing qualitative characteristics of financial information.

  1. Comparability
  2. Completeness
  3. Confirmatory value
  4. Faithful representatio
  5. Free from material error
  6. Materiality
  7. Neutrality
  8. Predictive value
  9. Relevance
  10. Timeliness
  11. Understandability
  12. Verifiability

Instructions

Match each of the above characteristics to one of the following statements, using the numbers 1 to 12.

  1. _____ Accounting information cannot be selected, prepared, or presented to favor one set of interested users over another.
  2. _____ Accounting information must be available to decision-makers before it loses its ability to influence their decisions.
  3. _____ Accounting information is prepared on the assumption that users have a reasonable understanding of accounting and general business and economic conditions.
  4. _____ Accounting information provides a basis to evaluate a previously made decision.
  5. _____ Accounting information includes everything that it needs to; nothing important is omitted. This is an important component of faithful representation.
  6. _____ Accounting information helps users make predictions about the outcome of past, present, and future events.
  7. _____ Accounting information about one company can be evaluated against the accounting information from another company.
  8. _____ Accounting information is included if its omission or misstatement could influence the decisions of financial statement users. This is an important component of relevance.
  9. _____ All the accounting information that is necessary to faithfully represent economic reality is included.
  10. _____ Accounting information has few inaccuracies.
  11. _____ Accounting information that will make a difference in users’ decisions.
  12. _____ Accounting information about a company can be confirmed by two or more independent users to be a faithful representation.

Identify accounting assumptions and principles.

E2.17 (LO 3), K Presented below are the assumptions and principles discussed in this chapter.

  1. Full disclosure principle
  2. Going concern assumption
  3. Monetary unit assumption
  4. Periodicity assumption
  5. Historical cost principle
  6. Economic entity assumption

Instructions

Identify by number the accounting assumption or principle that is described below. Do not use a number more than once.

  1. _____ a. Belief that a company will remain in business for the foreseeable future. (Note: Do not use the historical cost principle.)
  2. _____ b. Indicates that personal and business recordkeeping should be separately maintained.
  3. _____ c. Only those things that can be expressed in money are included in the accounting records.
  4. _____ d. Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.
  5. _____ e. Measurement basis used when a reliable estimate of fair value is not available.
  6. _____ f. Dictates that companies should disclose sufficient details regarding circumstances and events that would make a difference to financial statement users.

Identify accounting terminology.

E2.18 (LO 1, 2, 3), K The following list of terms or phrases are discussed in this chapter.

  1. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)
  2. Solvency
  3. Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB)
  4. Materiality
  5. Cost constraint
  6. Faithful representation
  7. Liquidity
  8. Working capital
  9. Operating cycle
  10. Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP)
  11. Current liabilities
  12. Relevance
  13. Verifiable

Instructions

Match each term or phrase to its description below.

  1. _____ Whether omitting or misstating an item could influence the decision of a financial statement user.
  2. _____ Constraint that weighs the cost that companies will incur to provide the information against the benefit that financial statement users will gain from having the information available.
  3. _____ Obligations that a company expects to pay within the next year or operating cycle, whichever is longer.
  4. _____ Information that is complete, neutral, and free from material error.
  5. _____ The primary accounting standard-setting body in the United States.
  6. _____ A set of accounting standards that has substantial authoritative support and which guide accounting professionals.
  7. _____ The ability of a company to pay obligations that are expected to become due within the next year or operating cycle.
  8. _____ The average time required to purchase inventory, sell it on account, and then collect cash from customers—that is, go from cash to cash.
  9. _____ The information has predictive value as well as confirms or corrects prior expectations.
  10. _____ The agency of the U.S. government that oversees U.S. financial markets and accounting standard-setting bodies.
  11. _____ The quality of information that occurs when independent observers, using the same methods, obtain similar results.
  12. _____ The difference between the amounts of current assets and current liabilities.
  13. _____ The ability of a company to pay interest as it comes due and to repay the balance of a debt due at its maturity.

Identify the assumption or principle that has been violated.

E2.19 (LO 3), C Lopez Co. had three major business transactions during 2025.

  1. Reported at its fair value of $260,000 merchandise inventory with a cost of $208,000.
  2. The president of Lopez Co., Victor Lopez, purchased a truck for personal use and charged it to his expense account.
  3. Lopez Co. wanted to make its 2025 income look better, so it added 2 more weeks to its income statement reporting period (a 54-week year). Previous years were 52 weeks.

Instructions

In each situation, identify the assumption or principle that has been violated, if any, and discuss what the company should have done.

Problems

Prepare a classified balance sheet.

P2.1 (LO 1), AP Suppose the following items are taken from the 2025 balance sheet of Verizon Communications. (All dollars are in millions.)

Goodwill $3,927
Common stock 6,283
Equipment 1,737
Accounts payable 152
Patents 234
Stock investments (long-term) 3,247
Accounts receivable 1,061
Prepaid rent 233
Debt investments (short-term) 1,160
Retained earnings 6,108
Cash 2,292
Notes payable (long-term) 734
Unearned sales revenue 413
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 201

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet for Verizon Communications as of December 31, 2025.

Tot. current assets $4,746
Tot. assets $13,690

Prepare financial statements.

P2.2 (LO 1), AP These items are taken from the financial statements of Martin Corporation for 2025.

Retained earnings (beginning of year) $31,000
Utilities expense 2,000
Equipment 66,000
Accounts payable 18,300
Cash 10,100
Salaries and wages payable 3,000
Common stock 22,800
Dividends 12,000
Supplies 3,100
Debt investment (long-term) 5,700
Trademarks 2,000
Service revenue 68,000
Prepaid insurance 3,500
Maintenance and repairs expense 1,800
Depreciation expense 3,600
Accounts receivable 11,700
Insurance expense 2,200
Salaries and wages expense 37,000
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 17,600

Instructions

Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2025.

Net income $21,400
Tot. assets $84,500

Prepare financial statements.

P2.3 (LO 1), AP You are provided with the following information for Lazuris Enterprises, effective as of its April 30, 2025, year-end.

Accounts payable $834
Accounts receivable 810
Accumulated depreciation—equipment 670
Cash 1,270
Common stock 16,900
Cost of goods sold 1,060
Depreciation expense 335
Dividends 325
Equipment 2,420
Goodwill 1,800
Income tax expense 165
Income taxes payable 135
Insurance expense 210
Interest expense 400
Inventory 967
Investment in land 14,200
Land 3,100
Mortgage payable (long-term) 3,500
Notes payable (short-term) 61
Prepaid insurance 60
Retained earnings (beginning) 1,600
Salaries and wages expense 700
Salaries and wages payable 222
Sales revenue 5,100
Stock investments (short-term) 1,200

Instructions

  1. Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for Lazuris Enterprises for the year ended April 30, 2025.
  2. Prepare a classified balance sheet for Lazuris Enterprises as of April 30, 2025.
a. Net income $2,230
b. Tot. current assets $4,307
  Tot. assets $25,157

Compute ratios; comment on relative profitability, liquidity, and solvency.

P2.4 (LO 2), AN Writing Comparative financial statement data for Loeb Corporation and Bowsh Corporation, two competitors, appear below. All balance sheet data are as of December 31, 2025.

  Loeb Corporation   Bowsh Corporation  
Net sales $1,800,000   $620,000  
Cost of goods sold 1,175,000   340,000  
Operating expenses 283,000   98,000  
Interest expense 9,000   3,800  
Income tax expense 85,000   36,000  
Current assets 407,200   190,336  
Plant assets (net) 532,000   139,728  
Current liabilities 66,325   33,716  
Long-term liabilities 108,500   40,684  
Dividends paid on common stock 36,000   15,000  
Weighted-average common shares outstanding 80,000   50,000  

Instructions

  1. Comment on the relative profitability of the companies by computing the net income and earnings per share for each company for 2025.
  2. Comment on the relative liquidity of the companies by computing working capital and the current ratio for each company for 2025.
  3. Comment on the relative solvency of the companies by computing the debt to assets ratio for each company for 2025.

Compute and interpret liquidity, solvency, and profitability ratios.

P2.5 (LO 2), AP Writing The following are financial statements of Ohara Company.

Ohara Company
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2025
Net sales $2,218,500
Cost of goods sold 1,012,400
Selling and administrative expenses 906,000
Interest expense 78,000
Income tax expense 69,000
Net income $153,100
Ohara Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2025
Assets  
Current assets  
Cash $60,100
Debt investments 84,000
Accounts receivable (net) 169,800
Inventory 145,000
Total current assets 458,900
Plant assets (net) 575,300
Total assets $1,034,200
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity  
Current liabilities  
Accounts payable $ 160,000
Income taxes payable 35,500
Total current liabilities 195,500
Bonds payable 200,000
Total liabilities 395,500
Stockholders’ equity  
Common stock 350,000
Retained earnings 288,700
Total stockholders’ equity 638,700
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $1,034,200

Additional information: The weighted-average common shares outstanding during the year was 50,000.

Instructions

  1. Compute the following values and ratios for 2025. (We provide the results from 2024 for comparative purposes.)
    1. Working capital. (2024: $160,500)
    2. Current ratio. (2024: 1.65:1)
    3. Debt to assets ratio. (2024: 31%)
    4. Earnings per share. (2024: $3.15)
  2. Using your calculations from part (a), discuss changes from 2024 in liquidity, solvency, and profitability.

Compute and interpret liquidity, solvency, and profitability ratios.

P2.6 (LO 2), AP Writing Condensed balance sheet and income statement data for Danke Corporation are presented as follows.

Danke Corporation
Balance Sheets
December 31
  2025 2024
Assets    
Cash $28,000 $20,000
Receivables (net) 70,000 62,000
Other current assets 90,000 73,000
Long-term investments 62,000 60,000
Property, plant, and equipment (net) 510,000 470,000
Total assets $760,000 $685,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity    
Current liabilities $75,000 $70,000
Long-term liabilities 80,000 90,000
Common stock 330,000 300,000
Retained earnings 275,000 225,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $760,000 $685,000
Danke Corporation
Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31
  2025 2024
Sales revenue $750,000 $680,000
Cost of goods sold 440,000 400,000
Operating expenses (including income taxes) 240,000 220,000
Net income $ 70,000 $ 60,000

Additional information:

Dividends paid $20,000 $15,000
Weighted-average common shares outstanding 33,000 30,000

Instructions

Compute these values and ratios for 2024 and 2025.

  1. Earnings per share.
  2. Working capital.
  3. Current ratio.
  4. Debt to assets ratio.
  5. Based on the ratios calculated, discuss briefly the improvement or lack thereof in financial position and operating results from 2024 to 2025 of Danke Corporation.

Compute ratios and compare liquidity and solvency for two companies.

P2.7 (LO 2), AP Selected financial data of two competitors, Target and Walmart, are presented here. (All dollars are in millions.) Suppose the data were taken from the 2025 financial statements of each company.

    Target (1/31/25)   Walmart (1/31/25)
    Income Statement Data for Year
Net sales   $64,948   $401,244
Cost of goods sold   44,157   306,158
Selling and administrative expenses   16,389   76,651
Interest expense   894   2,103
Other income   28   4,213
Income taxes   1,322   7,145
Net income   $ 2,214   $ 13,400
    Balance Sheet Data (End of Year)
Current assets   $17,488   $ 48,949
Noncurrent assets   26,618   114,480
Total assets   $44,106   $163,429
Current liabilities   $10,512   $ 55,390
Long-term liabilities   19,882   42,754
Total stockholders’ equity   13,712   65,285
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $44,106   $163,429
Weighted-average common shares outstanding (millions)   774   3,951

Instructions

For each company, compute these values and ratios.

  1. Working capital.
  2. Current ratio.
  3. Debt to assets ratio.
  4. Earnings per share.
  5. Compare the liquidity and solvency of the two companies.

Comment on the objectives and qualitative characteristics of financial reporting.

P2.8 (LO 3), E Writing A friend of yours, Saira Ortiz, recently completed an undergraduate degree in science and has just started working with a biotechnology company. Saira tells you that the owners of the business are trying to secure new sources of financing which are needed in order for the company to proceed with development of a new healthcare product. Saira said that her boss told her that the company must put together a report to present to potential investors.

Saira thought that the company should include in this package the detailed scientific findings related to the Phase I clinical trials for this product. She said, “I know that the biotech industry sometimes has only a 10% success rate with new products, but if we report all the scientific findings, everyone will see what a sure success this is going to be! The president was talking about the importance of following some set of accounting principles. Why do we need to look at some accounting rules? What they need to realize is that we have scientific results that are quite encouraging, some of the most talented employees around, and the start of some really great customer relationships. We haven’t made any sales yet, but we will. We just need the funds to get through all the clinical testing and get government approval for our product. Then these investors will be quite happy that they bought in to our company early!”

Instructions

  1. What is accounting information? Explain to Saira what is meant by generally accepted accounting principles.
  2. Comment on how Saira’s suggestions for what should be reported to prospective investors conforms to the qualitative characteristics of accounting information. Do you think that the things that Saira wants to include in the information for investors will conform to financial reporting guidelines?

Continuing Case

Cookie Creations

(Note: This is a continuation of the Cookie Creations from Chapter 1.)

CCC2 After investigating the different forms of business organization, Natalie Koebel decides to operate her business as a corporation, Cookie Creations Inc., and she begins the process of getting her business running.

While at a trade show, Natalie is introduced to Gerry Richards, operations manager of “Biscuits,” a national food retailer. After much discussion, Gerry asks Natalie to consider being Biscuits’ major supplier of oatmeal chocolate chip cookies. He provides Natalie with the most recent copy of the financial statements of Biscuits. He expects that Natalie will need to supply Biscuits’ Watertown warehouse with approximately 1,500 dozen cookies a week. Natalie is to send Biscuits a monthly invoice, and she will be paid approximately 30 days from the date the invoice is received in Biscuits’ Chicago office.

Natalie is thrilled with the offer. However, she has recently read in the newspaper that Biscuits has a reputation for selling cookies and donuts with high amounts of sugar and fat, and as a result, consumer demand for the company’s products has decreased.

Instructions

Natalie has several questions. Answer the following questions for Natalie.

  1. What type of information does each financial statement provide?
  2. What financial statements would Natalie need in order to evaluate whether Biscuits will have enough cash to meet its current liabilities? Explain what to look for.
  3. What financial statements would Natalie need in order to evaluate whether Biscuits will be able to survive over a long period of time? Explain what to look for.
  4. What financial statements would Natalie need in order to evaluate Biscuits’ profitability? Explain what to look for.
  5. Where can Natalie find out whether Biscuits has outstanding debt? How can Natalie determine whether Biscuits would be able to meet its interest and debt payments on any debt it has?
  6. How could Natalie determine whether Biscuits pays a dividend?
  7. In deciding whether to go ahead with this opportunity, are there other areas of concern that Natalie should be aware of?

Expand Your Critical Thinking

Financial Reporting Problem: Apple Inc.

CT2.1 The financial statements of Apple Inc. are presented in Appendix A.

Instructions

Answer the following questions using the financial statements and the notes to the financial statements.

  1. What were Apple’s total current assets at September 26, 2020, and September 28, 2019?
  2. Are the assets included in current assets listed in the proper order? Explain.
  3. How are Apple’s assets classified?
  4. What were Apple’s current liabilities at September 26, 2020, and September 28, 2019?

Comparative Analysis Problem: Columbia Sportswear Company vs. Under Armour, Inc.

CT2.2 The financial statements of Columbia Sportswear Company are presented in Appendix B. Financial statements of Under Armour, Inc. are presented in Appendix C. Assume Columbia’s weighted-average common shares outstanding was 69,683,000, and Under Armour’s was 416,103,000.

Instructions

  1. For each company, calculate the following values for 2020.
    1. Working capital.
    2. Current ratio.
    3. Debt to assets ratio.
  2. Based on your findings above, discuss the relative liquidity and solvency of the two companies.

Comparative Analysis Problem: Amazon.com, Inc. vs. Walmart Inc.

CT2.3 Amazon.com, Inc.’s financial statements are presented in Appendix D. Financial statements of Walmart Inc. are presented in Appendix E.

Instructions

  1. For each company, calculate the following values for the most recent year provided.
    1. Working capital.
    2. Current ratio.
    3. Debt to assets ratio.
  2. Based on your findings above, discuss the relative liquidity and solvency of the two companies.

Interpreting Financial Statements

CT2.4 Suppose the following information was reported by Gap, Inc.

  2025 2024 2023 2022 2021
Total assets (millions) $7,065 $7,985 $7,564 $7,838 $8,544
Working capital $1,831 $2,533 $1,847 $1,653 $2,757
Current ratio 1.87:1 2.19:1 1.86:1 1.68:1 2.21:1
Debt to assets ratio .42:1 .39:1 .42:1 .45:1 .39:1
Earnings per share $1.89 $1.59 $1.35 $1.05 $0.94
  1. Determine the overall percentage decrease in Gap’s total assets from 2021 to 2025. What was the average decrease per year? (Note: The period of time from December 31, 2021, to December 31, 2025, is four years. Therefore, you should divide by four years when computing the average.)
  2. Comment on the change in Gap’s liquidity. Does working capital or the current ratio appear to provide a better indication of Gap’s liquidity? What might explain the change in Gap’s liquidity during this period?
  3. Comment on the change in Gap’s solvency during this period.
  4. Comment on the change in Gap’s profitability during this period. How might this affect your prediction about Gap’s future profitability?

Real-World Focus

CT2.5 You can use the Internet to identify summary liquidity, solvency, and profitability information about companies, and compare this information across companies in the same industry.

Instructions

Select a well-known company and then go to the Yahoo! Finance website to locate information to answer the following questions.

  1. What is the company’s name? What was the company’s current ratio and debt to equity ratio (a variation of the debt to assets ratio)?
  2. What is the company’s industry?
  3. What is the name of a competitor? What is the competitor’s current ratio and its debt to equity ratio?
  4. Based on these measures, which company is more liquid? Which company is more solvent?

CT2.6 The Feature Story described the dramatic effect that investor bulletin boards are having on the investment world. This exercise will allow you to evaluate a bulletin board discussing a company of your choice.

Instructions

Go to the Yahoo! Finance website. Type in a company name (or use the index to find it) and then use the Conversations tab to answer the following questions.

  1. State the nature of each of these messages (e.g., offering advice, criticizing company, predicting future results, ridiculing other people who have posted messages).
  2. For those messages that expressed an opinion about the company, was evidence provided to support the opinion?
  3. What effect do you think it would have on bulletin board discussions if the participants provided their actual names? Do you think this would be a good policy?

Decision-Making Across the Organization

CT2.7 As a financial analyst in the planning department for Erin Industries, Inc., you must develop ratios from the comparative financial statements. This information is to be used to convince creditors that, despite a slight decline in sales, Erin Industries, Inc. is liquid, solvent, and profitable, and that it deserves their continued support. Lenders are particularly concerned about the company’s ability to continue as a going concern.

Here are the data requested and the computations developed from the financial statements:

  2025 2024
Current ratio 3.1 2.1
Working capital Up 22% Down 7%
Debt to assets ratio 0.60 0.70
Net income Up 32% Down 8%
Earnings per share $2.40 $1.15

Instructions

Erin Industries, Inc. asks you to prepare brief comments stating how each of these items supports the argument that its financial health is improving. The company wishes to use these comments to support presentation of data to its creditors. With the class divided into groups, prepare the comments as requested, giving the implications and the limitations of each item regarding Erin’s financial well-being.

Communication Activity

CT2.8 B. P. Palmer is the chief executive officer of Future Products. Palmer is an expert engineer but a novice in accounting.

Instructions

Write a letter to B. P. Palmer that explains (a) the three main types of ratios; (b) examples of each, how they are calculated, and what they measure; and (c) the bases for comparison in analyzing Future Products’ financial statements.

Ethics Case

CT2.9 At one time, Boeing closed a giant deal to acquire another manufacturer, McDonnell Douglas. Boeing paid for the acquisition by issuing shares of its own stock to the stockholders of McDonnell Douglas. In order for the deal not to be revoked, the value of Boeing’s stock could not decline below a certain level for a number of months after the deal.

During the first half of the year, Boeing suffered significant cost overruns because of inefficiencies in its production methods. Had these problems been disclosed in the quarterly financial statements during the first and second quarters of the year, the company’s stock most likely would have plummeted, and the deal would have been revoked. Company managers spent considerable time debating when the bad news should be disclosed. One public relations manager suggested that the company’s problems be revealed on the date of either Princess Diana’s or Mother Teresa’s funeral, in the hope that it would be lost among those big stories that day. Instead, the company waited until October 22 of that year to announce a $2.6 billion write-off due to cost overruns. Within one week, the company’s stock price had fallen 20%, but by this time the McDonnell Douglas deal could not be reversed.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

  1. Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
  2. What are the ethical issues?
  3. What assumptions or principles of accounting are relevant to this case?
  4. Do you think it is ethical to try to “time” the release of a story so as to diminish its effect?
  5. What would you have done if you were the chief executive officer of Boeing?
  6. Boeing’s top management maintains that it did not have an obligation to reveal its problems during the first half of the year. What implications does this have for investors and analysts who follow Boeing’s stock?

All About You

CT2.10 Every company needs to plan in order to move forward. Its top management must consider where it wants the company to be in three to five years. Like a company, you need to think about where you want to be three to five years from now, and you need to start taking steps now in order to get there.

Instructions

Provide responses to each of the following items.

  1. Where would you like to be working in three to five years? Describe your plan for getting there by identifying between five and 10 specific steps that you need to take in order to get there.
  2. In order to get the job you want, you will need a résumé. Your résumé is the equivalent of a company’s annual report. It needs to provide relevant information that is a faithful representation about your past accomplishments so that employers can decide whether to “invest” in you. Do a search on the Internet to find a good résumé format. What are the basic elements of a résumé?
  3. A company’s annual report provides information about a company’s accomplishments. In order for investors to use the annual report, the information must provide a faithful representation. How can you assure that the information on your résumé provides a faithful representation about you and your accomplishments?
  4. Prepare a résumé assuming that you have accomplished the five to 10 specific steps you identified in part (a). Also, provide evidence that would give assurance that the information is a faithful representation.

FASB Codification Activity

CT2.11 If your school has a subscription to the FASB Codification, log in and prepare responses to the following.

Instructions

  1. Access the glossary (“Master Glossary”) at the FASB Codification website to answer the following.
    1. What is the definition of current assets?
    2. What is the definition of current liabilities?
  2. A company wants to offset its accounts payable against its cash account and show a cash amount net of accounts payable on its balance sheet. Identify the criteria (found in the FASB Codification) under which a company has the right of set off. Does the company have the right to offset accounts payable against the cash account?

Considering People, Planet, and Profit

CT2.12 Auditors provide a type of certification of corporate financial statements. Certification is used in many other aspects of business as well. For example, it plays a critical role in the sustainability movement. An article by Angus Chen, entitled “Do Sustainable Certifications for Coffee Really Help the Coffee Growers,” discusses the role of certification in the coffee business.

Instructions

Search and read the article online, and then answer the following questions.

  1. The article mentions different certification types that coffee growers can obtain from different certification bodies. Using financial reporting as an example, what potential problems might the existence of multiple certification types present to coffee purchasers?
  2. What social and environmental benefits are coffee certifications trying to achieve? Are there also potential financial benefits to the parties involved?

A Look at IFRS

The classified balance sheet, although generally required internationally, contains certain variations in format when reporting under IFRS. The following are the key similarities and differences between GAAP and IFRS related to the financial statements.

Similarities

  • IFRS generally requires a classified statement of financial position similar to the classified balance sheet under GAAP.
  • IFRS follows the same guidelines as this text for distinguishing between current and noncurrent assets and liabilities.

Differences

  • IFRS recommends but does not require the use of the title “statement of financial position” rather than balance sheet.
  • The format of statement of financial position information is often presented differently under IFRS. Although no specific format is required, many companies that follow IFRS present statement of financial position information in this order:
    • Non-current assets
    • Current assets
    • Equity
    • Non-current liabilities
    • Current liabilities
  • Under IFRS, current assets are usually listed in the reverse order of liquidity. For example, under GAAP cash is listed first, but under IFRS it is listed last.
  • IFRS has many differences in terminology from what are shown in your text. For example, in the following sample statement of financial position, notice in the investment category that stock is called shares.

    Franklin Corporation
    Statement of Financial Position
    October 31, 2025
    Assets
    Intangible assets
    Patents $3,100
    Property, plant, and equipment
    Land $10,000
    Equipment $24,000
    Less: Accumulated depreciation 5,000 19,000 29,000
    Long-term investments
    Share investments 5,200
    Investment in real estate 2,000 7,200
    Current assets
    Prepaid insurance 400
    Supplies 2,100
    Inventory 3,000
    Notes receivable 1,000
    Accounts receivable 7,000
    Debt investments 2,000
    Cash 6,600 22,100
    Total assets $61,400
    Equity and Liabilities
    Equity
    Share capital $20,050
    Retained earnings 14,000 $34,050
    Non-current liabilities
    Mortgage payable 10,000
    Notes payable 1,300 11,300
    Current liabilities
    Notes payable 11,000
    Accounts payable 2,100
    Salaries and wages payable 1,600
    Unearned service revenue 900
    Interest payable 450 16,050
    Total equity and liabilities $61,400
  • Both GAAP and IFRS are increasing the use of fair value to report assets. However, at this point IFRS has adopted it more broadly. As examples, under IFRS companies can apply fair value to property, plant, and equipment, and in some cases intangible assets.

IFRS Practice

IFRS Self-Test Questions

1. A company has purchased a tract of land and expects to build a production plant on the land in approximately 5 years. During the 5 years before construction, the land will be idle. Under IFRS, the land should be reported as:

  1. land expense.
  2. property, plant, and equipment.
  3. an intangible asset.
  4. a long-term investment.

2. Current assets under IFRS are listed generally:

  1. by importance.
  2. in the reverse order of their expected conversion to cash.
  3. by longevity.
  4. alphabetically.

3. Companies that use IFRS:

  1. may report all their assets on the statement of financial position at fair value.
  2. may offset assets against liabilities and show net assets and net liabilities on their statement of financial position, rather than the underlying detailed line items.
  3. may report non-current assets before current assets on the statement of financial position.
  4. do not have any guidelines as to what should be reported on the statement of financial position.

4. Companies that follow IFRS to prepare a statement of financial position generally use the following order of classification:

  1. current assets, current liabilities, non-current assets, non-current liabilities, equity.
  2. non-current assets, non-current liabilities, current assets, current liabilities, equity.
  3. non-current assets, current assets, equity, non-current liabilities, current liabilities.
  4. equity, non-current assets, current assets, non-current liabilities, current liabilities.

IFRS Exercises

IFRS2.1 In what ways does the format of a statement of financial of position under IFRS often differ from a balance sheet presented under GAAP?

IFRS2.2 What term is commonly used under IFRS in reference to the balance sheet?

IFRS2.3 The statement of financial position for Sundell Company includes the following accounts (in British pounds): Accounts Receivable £12,500, Prepaid Insurance £3,600, Cash £15,400, Supplies £5,200, and Debt Investments (short-term) £6,700. Prepare the current assets section of the statement of financial position, listing the accounts in proper sequence.

IFRS2.4 The following information is available for Lessila Bowling Alley at December 31, 2025.

Buildings $128,800 Share Capital $100,000
Accounts Receivable 14,520 Retained Earnings (beginning) 15,000
Prepaid Insurance 4,680 Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings 42,600
Cash 18,040 Accounts Payable 12,300
Equipment 62,400 Notes Payable 97,780
Land 64,000 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment 18,720
Insurance Expense 780 Interest Payable 2,600
Depreciation Expense 7,360 Bowling Revenues 14,180
Interest Expense 2,600

Prepare a classified statement of financial position. Assume that $13,900 of the notes payable will be paid in 2023.

International Comparative Analysis Problem: Apple vs. Louis Vuitton

IFRS2.5 The complete annual report of Louis Vuitton, including the notes to its financial statements, is available at the company’s website.

Instructions

Identify five differences in the format of the statement of financial position used by Louis Vuitton compared to a company, such as Apple, that follows GAAP. (Apple’s financial statements are available in Appendix A.)

Answers to IFRS Self-Test Questions

1. d2. b3. c4. c

CHAPTER 3 The Accounting Information System

CHAPTER 3
The Accounting Information System

Chapter Preview

As indicated in the Feature Story, a reliable information system is a necessity for any company. The purpose of this chapter is to explain and illustrate the features of an accounting information system.

Feature Story

Accidents Happen

How organized are you financially? Take a short quiz. Answer yes or no to each question:

  • Does your wallet contain so many cash machine receipts that you’ve been declared a walking fire hazard?
  • Do you wait until your debit card is denied before checking the status of your funds?
  • Do you verify the accuracy of your bank account about as often as you clean the space behind your refrigerator?

If you think it is hard to keep track of the many transactions that make up your life, imagine how difficult it is for a big corporation to do so. Not only that, but now consider how important it is for a big company to have good accounting records, especially if it has control of your life savings. MF Global Holdings Ltd was such a company. As a large investment broker, it held billions of dollars of investments for clients. If you had your life savings invested at MF Global, you might be slightly displeased if you heard this from one of its representatives: “You know, I kind of remember an account for someone with a name like yours—now what did we do with that?”

Unfortunately, that is almost exactly what happened to MF Global’s clients shortly before it filed for bankruptcy. During the days immediately following the bankruptcy filing, regulators and auditors struggled to piece things together. In the words of one regulator, “Their books are a disaster … we’re trying to figure out what numbers are real numbers.” One company that considered buying an interest in MF Global walked away from the deal because it “couldn’t get a sense of what was on the balance sheet.” That company said the information that should have been instantly available instead took days to produce.

It now appears that MF Global did not properly segregate customer accounts from company accounts. And, because of its sloppy recordkeeping, customers were not protected when the company had financial troubles. Total customer losses were approximately $1 billion. As you can see, accounting matters!

Source: S. Patterson and A. Lucchetti, “Inside the Hunt for MF Global Cash,” Wall Street Journal Online (November 11, 2011).

Chapter Outline

LEARNING OBJECTIVES REVIEW PRACTICE
LO 1 Analyze the effect of business transactions on the basic accounting equation.
  • Accounting transactions
  • Analyzing transactions
  • Summary of transactions
DO IT! 1 Transaction Analysis
LO 2 Explain how accounts, debits, and credits are used to record business transactions.
  • Debits and credits
  • Debit and credit procedures
  • Stockholders’ equity relationships
  • Summary of debit/credit rules
DO IT! 2 Accounts, Debits, and Credits
LO 3 Indicate how a journal is used in the recording process.
  • The recording process
  • The journal
DO IT! 3 Journal Entries
LO 4 Explain how a ledger and posting help in the recording process.
  • The ledger
  • Chart of accounts
  • Posting
  • The recording process illustrated
  • Summary illustration
DO IT! 4 Posting
LO 5 Prepare a trial balance.
  • Limitations of a trial balance
DO IT! 5 Trial Balance
Go to the Review and Practice section at the end of the chapter for a targeted summary and practice applications with solutions.
Visit Wiley Course Resources for additional tutorials and practice opportunities.

3.1 Using the Accounting Equation to Analyze Transactions

The system of collecting and processing transaction data and communicating financial information to decision-makers is known as the accounting information system. Factors that shape an accounting information system include the nature of the company’s business, the types of transactions, the size of the company, the volume of data, and the information demands of management and others.

Most businesses use computerized accounting systems—sometimes referred to as electronic data processing (EDP) systems. These systems handle all the steps involved in the recording process, from initial data entry to preparation of the financial statements.

A flow diagram shows nine steps involved in the accounting cycle as follows: Analyze business transactions, Journalize, Post, Trial Balance, Adjusting Entries, Adjusted Trial Balance, Financial Statements, Closing Entries, Post-Closing Trial Balance. Step 1, Analyze business transactions, is highlighted and enlarged.

This accounting cycle graphic illustrates the steps companies follow each period to record transactions and eventually prepare financial statements.

In order to emphasize the underlying concepts and principles, we focus on a manual accounting system. The accounting concepts and principles do not change whether a system is computerized or manual.

Accounting Transactions

To use an accounting information system, you need to know which economic events to recognize (record). Not all events are recorded and reported in the financial statements. For example, suppose Zoom Video Communications hired a new employee and purchased a new computer. Are these two events entered in its accounting records? The first event would not be recorded, but the second event would.

  • We call economic events that require recording in the financial statements accounting transactions.
  • An accounting transaction occurs when assets, liabilities, or stockholders’ equity items change as a result of some economic event.
  • When Zoom hires a new employee, its assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity are not affected. But when it purchases a computer, Zoom records the change in the company’s assets.

Illustration 3.1 summarizes the decision process companies use to decide whether or not to record economic events.

ILLUSTRATION 3.1 Transaction identification process

An illustration shows transaction identification process. The three rows in the illustration depict events, criterion, and record or don’t record.  The first row displays three images: the first image shows a man holding a package and standing in front of a building, the text below reads, purchase computer, yes, record; the second image shows two men and a woman in a discussion, the poster displays mountains, the text below reads, discuss guided trip options with potential customer, No, don’t record; the third image shows a computer displaying the text rent payment pay now, the text below reads, pay rent, yes, record.  The second row is labeled Criterion. The text box in the second row reads, Is the financial position (assets, liabilities, or stockholders’ equity) of the company changed? The third row is labeled Record or Don’t Record.

Analyzing Transactions

Recall the basic accounting equation:

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

In this chapter, you will learn how to analyze transactions in terms of their effect on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. Transaction analysis is the process of identifying the specific effects of economic events on the accounting equation (see Decision Tools).

The accounting equation must always balance. Each transaction has a dual (double-sided) effect on the equation. For example, if an individual asset is increased, there must be a corresponding:

  • Decrease in another asset, or
  • Increase in a specific liability, or
  • Increase in stockholders’ equity.

Two or more items could be affected when an asset is increased. For example, if a company purchases a computer for $10,000 by paying $6,000 in cash and signing a note for $4,000, one asset (equipment) increases $10,000, another asset (cash) decreases $6,000, and a liability (notes payable) increases $4,000. The result is that the accounting equation remains in balance—assets increased by a net $4,000 and liabilities increased by $4,000, as shown below.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays an equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash and Equipment amount are listed under Assets as: Cash plus Equipment. The transaction below has the amounts of Cash, $6,000 with a negative sign, Equipment of $10,000 with a plus sign. The amounts of Cash and Equipment are totaled as $4,000 and marked with a downward curly brace. The Notes Payable amount is listed under Liabilities column with an amount of $4,000.

Illustration 1.10 presented the financial statements for Sierra Corporation for its first month. You should review those financial statements at this time. To illustrate how economic events affect the accounting equation, we will examine the events affecting Sierra during its first month.

In order to analyze the transactions for Sierra, we will expand the basic accounting equation. This allows us to better illustrate the impact of transactions on stockholders’ equity.

  • Recall that stockholders’ equity is comprised of two parts: common stock and retained earnings.
  • Common stock is affected when the company issues new shares of stock in exchange for cash.
  • Retained earnings is increased when the company recognizes revenue, and decreased when the company incurs expenses or pays dividends.

Illustration 3.2 shows the expanded equation.

ILLUSTRATION 3.2 Expanded accounting equation

A flow chart of the expanded accounting equation begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets =Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. Two arrows flow from stockholders’ Equity pointing to Common stock plus Retained Earnings. Three arrows flows from Retained Earnings points to revenues minus expenses minus dividends.

To demonstrate the effect that each transaction has on particular financial statements, we analyze each of Sierra’s transactions using the tabular analysis shown in Illustration 3.3.

  • Amounts that are reported on the balance sheet are shaded in yellow, income statement items in blue, and dividends (shown on the statement of retained earnings) in gray.
  • Explanations for income statement items are reported in the blue section on the right-hand side.
  • The green section on the left-hand side indicates whether cash flows increased, decreased, or were not affected.

ILLUSTRATION 3.3 Tabular analysis of transactions

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income statement. The accounting equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The common stock account, revenue, expense, dividend are listed under the stockholder’s equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). The Cash Flow and Income Statement are empty.

Event (1). Investment of Cash by Stockholders On October 1, cash of $10,000 is invested in the business by investors in exchange for $10,000 of common stock. This event is an accounting transaction that results in an increase in both assets and stockholders’ equity.

Basic Analysis: The asset Cash is increased $10,000; stockholders’ equity (specifically Common Stock) is increased $10,000.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $10,000 with an arrow pointing upward at the left of $10,000, which implies that cash flow increases. The accounting equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The cash amount is listed under Assets column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction (1) has amounts for cash and common stock, $10,000 with a plus sign as an increase. The label, No effect appears under the Income Statement.

The equation is in balance after the issuance of common stock. Keeping track of the source of each change in stockholders’ equity is essential for later accounting activities. In particular, items recorded in the revenue and expense columns are used for the calculation of net income.

Event (2). Note Issued in Exchange for Cash On October 1, Sierra borrowed $5,000 from Castle Bank by signing a 3-month, 12%, $5,000 note payable. This transaction results in an equal increase in assets and liabilities. The specific effect of this transaction and the cumulative effect of the first two transactions are as follows.

Basic Analysis: The asset Cash is increased $5,000; the liability Notes Payable is increased $5,000.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $5,000 with an arrow pointing upward at the left of $5,000, which implies that cash flow increases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount is listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable amount is listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (2) has the amounts of Cash, $10,000 and 5,000 with a plus sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $15,000 for Cash account. Notes payable and common stock has the amounts, $5,000 with a plus sign and $10,000 respectively. The amounts of Notes Payable and Common Stock are totaled as $15,000 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, No effect appears under the Income Statement.

Total assets are now $15,000, and liabilities plus stockholders’ equity also total $15,000.

Event (3). Purchase of Equipment for Cash On October 2, Sierra purchased equipment by paying $5,000 cash to Superior Equipment Sales Co. This transaction results in an equal increase and decrease in Sierra’s assets.

Basic Analysis: The asset Equipment is increased $5,000; the asset Cash is decreased $5,000.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $5,000 with an arrow pointing downward at the left of $5,000, which implies that cash flow decreases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable amount is listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (3) has the amounts of Cash, $15,000 and 5,000 with a negative sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $10,000 for Cash account. Equipment, Notes payable and common stock have the amounts, $5,000 with a plus sign, $5,000 and $10,000 respectively. The amounts of cash and equipment are totaled as $15,000 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable and Common Stock are totaled as $15,000 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, No effect appears under the Income Statement.

The balance in total assets did not change; one asset account decreased by the same amount that another increased. The total assets are still $15,000, and liabilities plus stockholders’ equity also still total $15,000.

Event (4). Receipt of Cash in Advance from Customer On October 2, Sierra received a $1,200 cash advance from R. Knox, a client. Sierra received cash (an asset) for guide services for multi-day trips that it expects to complete in the future.

  • Although Sierra received cash, it does not record revenue until it has performed the work.
  • In some industries, such as the magazine and airline industries, customers are expected to prepay. These companies have a liability to the customer until they deliver the magazines or provide the flight.
  • When the company eventually provides the product or service, it records the revenue.

Since Sierra received cash prior to performance of the service, Sierra has a liability for the work due.

Basic Analysis: The asset Cash is increased $1,200; the liability Unearned Service Revenue is increased $1,200 because the service has not been performed yet. That is, when an advance payment is received, unearned revenue (a liability) should be recorded in order to recognize the obligation that exists.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $1,200 with an arrow pointing upward at the left of $1,200, which implies that cash flow increases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable amount and unearned service revenue are listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (4) has the amounts of Cash, $10,000 and 1,200 with a positive sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $11,200 for Cash account. Equipment, Notes payable, unearned service revenue, and common stock has the amounts, $5,000, $5,000, $1,200 with a plus sign and $10,000 respectively. The amounts of cash and equipment are totaled as $16,200 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable, Unearned service revenue, and Common Stock are totaled as $16,200 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, No effect appears under the Income Statement.

Event (5). Services Performed for Cash On October 3, Sierra received $10,000 in cash (an asset) from Copa Company for guide services performed for a corporate event. Guide service is the principal revenue-producing activity of Sierra. Revenue increases stockholders’ equity. This transaction, then, increases both assets and stockholders’ equity.

Basic Analysis: The asset Cash is increased $10,000; the revenue account Service Revenue is increased $10,000.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $10,000 with an arrow pointing upward at the left of $10,000, which implies that cash flow increases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable amount and unearned service revenue are listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (5) has the amounts of Cash, $11,200 and 10,000 with a positive sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $21,200 for Cash account. Equipment, Notes payable, unearned service revenue, common stock, and revenue have the amounts, $5,000, $5,000, $1,200, $10,000 and $10,000 with a plus sign respectively. The amounts of cash and equipment are totaled as $26,200 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable, Unearned service revenue, Common Stock, and revenue are totaled as $26,200 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, Service Revenue appears under the Income Statement.

Often companies perform services “on account.” That is, they perform services for which they are paid at a later date.

  • Revenue, however, is recorded when services are performed.
  • Therefore, revenues would increase when services are performed, even though cash has not been received.
  • Instead of receiving cash, the company receives a different type of asset, an account receivable. Accounts receivable represent the right to receive payment at a later date.

Suppose that Sierra had performed these services on account rather than for cash. This event would be reported using the accounting equation as follows.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity  
Accounts            
Receivable =     Revenues    
+$10,000       +$10,000 Service Revenue

Later, when Sierra collects the $10,000 from the customer, Accounts Receivable decreases by $10,000, and Cash increases by $10,000.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
    Accounts        
Cash + Receivable        
+$10,000   $10,000        

Note that in this case, revenues are not affected by the collection of cash. Instead Sierra records an exchange of one asset (Accounts Receivable) for a different asset (Cash).

Event (6). Payment of Rent On October 3, Sierra paid its office rent for the month of October in cash, $900 (see Helpful Hint). This rent payment is a transaction that results in a decrease in an asset, cash, as well as a decrease in stockholders’ equity.

  • Rent is a cost incurred by Sierra in its effort to generate revenues.
  • Rent is treated as an expense because it pertains only to the current month.
  • Expenses decrease stockholders’ equity.

Note that although Rent Expense increases, it is shown as a negative number in the accounting equation because expenses decrease retained earnings, which in turn decreases stockholders’ equity. Overall, assets (cash) decrease by $900 and stockholders’ equity decreases by $900, thereby keeping the accounting equation in balance.

Basic Analysis: The expense Rent Expense is increased $900 because the payment pertains only to the current month and results in a decrease to Retained Earnings; the asset Cash is decreased $900.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $900 with an arrow pointing downward at the left of $900, which implies that cash flow decreases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable amount and unearned service revenue are listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (6) has the amounts of Cash, $21,200 and 900 with a negative sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $20,300 for Cash account. Equipment, Notes payable, unearned service revenue, common stock, revenue, and expense have the amounts, $5,000, $5,000, $1,200, $10,000, $10,000 and $900 with a minus sign respectively. The amounts of cash and equipment are totaled as $20,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable, Unearned service revenue, Common Stock, revenue, and expense are totaled as $25,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, Rent Expense appears under the Income Statement.

Event (7). Purchase of Insurance Policy for Cash On October 4, Sierra paid $600 for a one-year insurance policy that will expire next year on September 30. Payments of expenses that will benefit more than one accounting period are identified as assets called prepaid expenses or prepayments.

Basic Analysis: The asset Cash is decreased $600; the asset Prepaid Insurance is increased $600.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $600 with an arrow pointing downward at the left of $600, which implies that cash flow decreases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount, prepaid insurance, and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable amount and unearned service revenue are listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (7) has the amounts of Cash, $20,300 and 600 with a negative sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $19,700 for Cash account. Prepaid insurance, Equipment, Notes payable, unearned service revenue, common stock, revenue, and expense have the amounts, $600 with a plus sign, $5,000, $5,000, $1,200, $10,000, $10,000 and $900 respectively. The amounts of cash, prepaid insurance, and equipment are totaled as $25,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable, Unearned service revenue, Common Stock, revenue, and expense are totaled as $25,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, No effect appears under the Income Statement.

The balance in total assets did not change; one asset account decreased by the same amount that another increased.

Event (8). Purchase of Supplies on Account On October 5, Sierra purchased an estimated three months of supplies on account from Aero Supply for $2,500. In this case, “on account” means that the company receives goods or services that it will pay for at a later date. This transaction increases both an asset (supplies) and a liability (accounts payable).

Basic Analysis: The asset Supplies is increased $2,500; the liability Accounts Payable is increased $2,500.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The label, No effect appears under the Cash flow. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount, supplies, prepaid insurance, and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable, accounts payable, and unearned service revenue are listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (8) has the amounts of Cash, $19,700, Supplies, $2,500 with a plus sign, Prepaid Insurance, $600, and Equipment, $5,000. Notes payable, Accounts payable, Unearned service revenue, common stock, revenue, and expense have the amounts $5,000, $2,500, $1,200, $10,000, $10,000, $900, and $500 with a negative sign respectively. The amounts of cash, supplies, prepaid insurance, and equipment are totaled as $27,800 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable, Accounts payable, Unearned service revenue, Common Stock, revenue, expense and dividend are totaled as $27,800 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, No effect appears under the Income Statement.

Event (9). Hiring of New Employees On October 9, Sierra hired four new employees to begin work on October 15. Each employee will receive a weekly salary of $500 for a five-day work week, payable every two weeks. Employees will receive their first paychecks on October 26. On the date Sierra hires the employees, there is no effect on the accounting equation because the assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity of the company have not changed.

Basic Analysis: An accounting transaction has not occurred. There is only an agreement that the employees will begin work on October 15. (See Event (11) for the first payment.)

Event (10). Payment of Dividend On October 20, Sierra paid a $500 cash dividend (see Helpful Hint). Dividends are a reduction of stockholders’ equity but not an expense. Dividends are not included in the calculation of net income. Instead, a dividend is a distribution of the company’s assets to its stockholders, which is presented in the retained earnings statement.

Basic Analysis: Dividends is increased $500, which results in a decrease to Retained Earnings; the asset Cash is decreased $500.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $500 with an arrow pointing downward at the left of $500, which implies that cash flow decreases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount, supplies, prepaid insurance, and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable, accounts payable, and unearned service revenue are listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (10) has the amounts of Cash, $19,700 and 500 with a negative sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $19,200 for Cash account. Supplies, Prepaid insurance, Equipment, Notes payable, Accounts payable, Unearned service revenue, common stock, revenue, expense, and dividend have the amounts, $2,500, $600, $5,000, $5,000, $2,500, $1,200, $10,000, $10,000, $900, and $500 with a negative sign respectively. The amounts of cash, supplies, prepaid insurance, and equipment are totaled as $27,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable, Accounts payable, Unearned service revenue, Common Stock, revenue, expense and dividend are totaled as $27,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, No effect appears under the Income Statement.

Event (11). Payment of Cash for Employee Salaries Employees have worked two weeks, earning $4,000 in salaries, which were paid on October 26. Salaries and Wages Expense is an expense that reduces stockholders’ equity. In this transaction, both assets and stockholders’ equity are reduced.

Basic Analysis: The asset Cash is decreased $4,000; the expense Salaries and Wages Expense is increased $4,000, which results in a decrease to Retained Earnings.

An illustration of recording the transaction using equation analysis displays Cash Flow, Balance Sheet, and an Income Statement. The cash flow is given as $4,000 with an arrow pointing downward at the left of $4,000, which implies that cash flow decreases. The equation in the Balance Sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash amount, supplies, prepaid insurance, and equipment are listed under Assets column. The Notes Payable, accounts payable, and unearned service revenue are listed under Liabilities column. The Common stock, Revenue, Expense, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common stock plus Revenue minus Expense minus Dividend (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Transaction numbered (11) has the amounts of Cash, $19,200 and 4,000 with a negative sign. The sum of these two transactions is given as $15,200 for Cash account. Supplies, Prepaid insurance, Equipment, Notes payable, Accounts payable, Unearned service revenue, common stock, revenue, expense, and dividend have the amounts, $2,500, $600, $5,000, $5,000, $2,500, $1,200, $10,000, $10,000, ($900 and 4,000 with a negative sign are totaled as $4,900), and $500 respectively. The amounts of cash, supplies, prepaid insurance, and equipment are totaled as $23,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes Payable, Accounts payable, Unearned service revenue, Common Stock, revenue, expense and dividend are totaled as $23,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The label, Salary or wages expense appears under the Income Statement.

Summary of Transactions

Illustration 3.4 summarizes the transactions of Sierra Corporation to show their cumulative effect on the basic accounting equation. It includes the transaction number in the first column on the left. The right-most column shows the specific effect of any transaction that affects revenues or expenses. Remember that Event (9) did not result in a transaction, so nothing is recorded for that event. The illustration demonstrates three important points:

  1. Each transaction is analyzed in terms of its effect on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity.
  2. The two sides of the equation must always be equal.
  3. The cause of each change in revenues or expenses must be indicated.

ILLUSTRATION 3.4 Summary of transactions

A statement displays Balance Sheet and an Income Statement. The accounting equation in the balance sheet is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash, Supplies, Prepaid Insurance and Equipment amounts are listed under Assets column as: Cash plus Supplies plus Prepaid Insurance plus Equipment. The Notes Payable, Accounts Payable, and Unearned Service Revenue amount are listed under Liabilities column as: Notes Payable plus Accounts Payable plus Unearned Service Revenue. The Common Stock account, Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common Stock plus Revenues minus Expenses minus Dividends (revenues, expenses, and dividends comes under retained earnings under stockholders’ equity column). Eleven transactions are given as follows: Transaction (1) has amounts for Cash and Common stock as $10,000 with a positive sign. Transaction (2) has amounts for Cash, and Notes Payable as $5,000 with a positive sign. Transaction (3) has amounts for Cash, and Equipment as, $5,000 with a minus sign for Cash, and a positive sign for Equipment. Transaction (4) has amounts for Cash, and Unearned Service Revenues as, $1,200 with a + sign before the amount. Transaction (5) has amounts for Cash and Revenue as, $10,000 with a positive sign. Transaction (6) has amounts for Cash, and Expenses as, 900 with a minus sign. Transaction (7) has amounts for Cash and Prepaid Insurance as, $600 with a minus sign for Cash and a positive sign for Prepaid Insurance. Transaction (8) has amounts for Supplies and Accounts Payable as, $2,500 with a positive sign. Transaction (9) is empty. Transaction (10) has amounts for Cash, and Retained Earnings Dividends as, 500 with a minus sign. Transaction (11) has amounts for Cash and Retained Earnings Expenses as, 4,000 with a minus sign. The amounts are totaled as: Cash, $15,200; Supplies, $2,500; Prepaid Insurance, $600; Equipment, $5,000; Notes Payable, $5,000; Accounts Payable, $2,500; Unearned Service Revenues, $1,200; Common Stock, $10,000; Retained Earnings Revenues, $10,000; Retained Earnings Expenses, $4,900; Retained Earnings Dividends, $500. An Income Statement is displayed to the right of the Balance Sheet. Following are the labels in the income statement respective to the transaction numbers: Transaction (5), Service Revenue; Transaction (6), Rent Expense; Transaction (11), Salary or Wages Expense. The amounts of cash, supplies, prepaid insurance, and equipment are totaled as $23,300 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of notes payable, accounts payable, unearned service revenue, Common Stock, revenues, expenses, and dividends are totaled as $23,300 and marked with a downward curly brace.

3.2 Accounts, Debits, and Credits

Rather than using a tabular summary like the one in Illustration 3.4 for Sierra Corporation, an accounting information system uses accounts. An account is an individual accounting record of increases and decreases in a specific asset, liability, stockholders’ equity, revenue, or expense item. For example, Sierra Corporation has separate accounts for Cash, Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and so on. (Note that whenever we are referring to a specific account, we capitalize the name.)

In its simplest form, an account consists of three parts:

  1. A title.
  2. A left or debit side.
  3. A right or credit side.

Because the alignment of these parts of an account resembles the letter T, it is referred to as a T-account. The basic form of an account is shown in Illustration 3.5.

ILLUSTRATION 3.5 Basic form of account

An illustration shows a T-account named Title of Account. The left side is labeled as "Left or debit side" (Dr.) and the right side is labeled as "Right or credit side." (Cr.)

We use this form of account often throughout this text to explain basic accounting relationships.

Debits and Credits

The term debit indicates the left side of an account, and credit indicates the right side.

  • Sometimes abbreviations are used: Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit (see Helpful Hint). They do not mean increase or decrease, as is commonly thought.
  • We use the terms debit and credit repeatedly in the recording process to describe where entries are made in accounts.
  • For example, the act of entering an amount on the left side of an account is called debiting the account. Making an entry on the right side is crediting the account.

When comparing the totals of the two sides, an account shows a debit balance if the total of the debit amounts exceeds the credits. An account shows a credit balance if the credit amounts exceed the debits. Note the position of the debit side and credit side in Illustration 3.5.

The procedure of recording debits and credits in an account is shown in Illustration 3.6 for the transactions affecting the Cash account of Sierra Corporation. The data are taken from the Cash column of the tabular summary in Illustration 3.4.

ILLUSTRATION 3.6 Tabular summary and account form for Sierra Corporation’s Cash account

An image shows tabular summary of the transactions affecting the cash account are listed as $10,000, 5,000,  negative 5,000, 1,200, 10,000,  negative 900,  negative 600, negative 500,  negative 4,000, resulting in a total of $15,200. The account form is shown as a t-account titled "Cash" with the left half labeled as  "Debits" while right half is labeled as "Credits". The debits posted are $10,000, 5,000, 1,200, and 10,000. The credits posted are 5,000, 900, 600, 500, and 4,000, resulting in a total of $15,200.

Every positive item in the tabular summary represents a receipt of cash; every negative amount represents a payment of cash. Notice that in the account form, we record the increases in cash as debits and the decreases in cash as credits. For example, the $10,000 receipt of cash (in blue) is debited to Cash, and the −$5,000 payment of cash (in red) is credited to Cash.

There are two main benefits from using the T-account form:

  1. Having increases on one side and decreases on the other reduces recording errors.
  2. The T-account form helps in determining the totals of each side of the account as well as the account balance. The balance is determined by netting the two sides (subtracting one amount from the other).

The account balance, a debit of $15,200, indicates that Sierra had $15,200 more increases than decreases in cash. That is, since it started with a balance of zero, it has $15,200 in its Cash account.

Debit and Credit Procedures

Each transaction must affect two or more accounts to keep the basic accounting equation in balance.

  • Debits must equal credits.
  • The equality of debits and credits provides the basis for the double-entry accounting system (see International Note).
  • Under the double-entry system, the two-sided effect of each transaction is recorded in appropriate accounts. This system provides a logical method for recording transactions.

The double-entry system also helps to ensure the accuracy of the recorded amounts and helps to detect errors such as those at MF Global as discussed in the Feature Story. If every transaction is recorded with equal debits and credits, then the sum of all the debits to the accounts must equal the sum of all the credits.

The double-entry system for determining the equality of the accounting equation is much more efficient than the plus/minus procedure used earlier. The following discussion illustrates debit and credit procedures in the double-entry system.

Dr./Cr. Procedures for Assets and Liabilities

In Illustration 3.6 for Sierra Corporation, increases in Cash—an asset—are entered on the left side, and decreases in Cash are entered on the right side.

  • We know that both sides of the basic equation (Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity) must be equal.
  • It therefore follows that increases and decreases in liabilities have to be recorded opposite from increases and decreases in assets.
  • Thus, increases in liabilities are entered on the right or credit side, and decreases in liabilities are entered on the left or debit side.

The effects that debits and credits have on assets and liabilities are summarized in Illustration 3.7.

ILLUSTRATION 3.7 Debit and credit effects–assets and liabilities

Debits Credits
Increase assets Decrease assets
Decrease liabilities Increase liabilities

Asset accounts normally show debit balances. That is, debits to a specific asset account should exceed credits to that account. Likewise, liability accounts normally show credit balances. That is, credits to a liability account should exceed debits to that account. The normal balances may be diagrammed as in Illustration 3.8.

ILLUSTRATION 3.8 Normal balances–assets and liabilities

A diagram shows a generic T-account for Assets indicating the Debit and Credit effects. This image is displayed as a T with the left side labeled as Debit and the right labeled as Credit. An arrow pointing upward on the left of the T-account implies that Debits increase Assets. An arrow pointing downward on the right indicates that Credits reduce Assets. The account balance is displayed as Normal Balance, and appears on the Debit side. A diagram shows a generic T-account for Liabilities indicating the Debit and Credit effects. This image is displayed as a T with the left side labeled as Debit and the right labeled as Credit. An arrow pointing downward on the left of the T-account implies that Debits decrease Liabilities. An arrow pointing upward on the right indicates that Credits increase Liabilities. The Account Balance is displayed as Normal Balance, and appears on the Credit side.

Knowing which is the normal balance in an account may help when you are trying to identify errors (see Helpful Hint). For example, a credit balance in an asset account, such as Land, or a debit balance in a liability account, such as Salaries and Wages Payable, usually indicates errors in recording. Occasionally, however, an abnormal balance may be correct. The Cash account, for example, will have a credit balance when a company has overdrawn its bank balance by spending more than it has in its account. In automated accounting systems, the computer is programmed to flag violations of the normal balance and to print out error or exception reports. In manual systems, careful visual inspection of the accounts is required to detect normal balance problems.

Dr./Cr. Procedures for Stockholders’ Equity

Recall that stockholders’ equity is comprised of two parts: common stock and retained earnings. In the transaction events earlier in this chapter, you saw that revenues, expenses, and the payment of dividends affect retained earnings. Therefore, the subdivisions of stockholders’ equity are common stock, retained earnings, dividends, revenues, and expenses.

Common Stock Common stock is issued to investors in exchange for the stockholders’ investment.

  • The Common Stock account is increased by credits and decreased by debits.
  • When cash is invested in the business, Cash is debited and Common Stock is credited.

The effects of debits and credits on the Common Stock account are shown in Illustration 3.9.

ILLUSTRATION 3.9 Debit and credit effects–common stock

Debits   Credits
Decrease Common Stock   Increase Common Stock

The normal balance in the Common Stock account may be diagrammed as in Illustration 3.10.

ILLUSTRATION 3.10 Normal balance–common stock

A diagram of T-account indicates the Debit and Credit effects on Common Stock. The left side of the T account is labeled as, Debit for decrease, and the right labeled as, Credit for increase. An arrow pointing downward on the left of the T-account implies that Debits decrease Common Stock. An arrow pointing upward on the right indicates that Credits increase the Common Stock account. The Account Balance is displayed on the Credit, right side, and labeled as Normal Balance.

Retained Earnings Retained earnings is net income that is retained in the business.

  • Retained Earnings represents the portion of stockholders’ equity that has been accumulated through the profitable operation of the company.
  • Retained Earnings is increased by credits (for example, by net income) and decreased by debits (for example, by a net loss), as shown in Illustration 3.11.

ILLUSTRATION 3.11 Debit and credit effects–retained earnings

Debits Credits
Decrease Retained Earnings Increase Retained Earnings

The normal balance for the Retained Earnings account may be diagrammed as in Illustration 3.12.

ILLUSTRATION 3.12 Normal balance–retained earnings

A diagram of T-account indicates the Debit and Credit effects on Retained Earnings. The left side of the T account is labeled as, Debit for decrease, and the right labeled as, Credit for increase. An arrow pointing downward on the left of the T-account implies that Debits decrease Retained Earnings. An arrow pointing upward on the right indicates that Credits increase the Retained Earnings account. The Account Balance is displayed on the Credit, right side, and labeled as Normal Balance.

Dividends A dividend is a distribution by a corporation to its stockholders. The most common form of distribution is a cash dividend.

  • Dividends result in a reduction of the stockholders’ claims on retained earnings.
  • Because dividends reduce stockholders’ equity, increases in the Dividends account are recorded with debits.

As shown in Illustration 3.13, the Dividends account normally has a debit balance.

ILLUSTRATION 3.13 Normal balance–dividends

A diagram of T-account indicates the Debit and Credit effects on Dividends. The left side of the T account is labeled as, Debit for increase, and the right labeled as, Credit for decrease. An arrow pointing upward on the left of the T-account implies that Debits increase Dividends. An arrow pointing downward on the right indicates that Credits decrease Dividends. The Account Balance is displayed on the Debit, left side, and labeled as Normal Balance.

Revenues and Expenses When a company recognizes revenues, stockholders’ equity is increased. Revenue accounts are increased by credits and decreased by debits.

  • Expenses decrease stockholders’ equity.
  • Thus, expense accounts are increased by debits and decreased by credits.

The effects of debits and credits on revenues and expenses are shown in Illustration 3.14.

ILLUSTRATION 3.14 Debit and credit effects–revenues and expenses

Debits Credits
Decrease revenues Increase revenues
Increase expenses Decrease expenses

Credits to revenue accounts should exceed debits; debits to expense accounts should exceed credits. Thus, revenue accounts normally show credit balances, and expense accounts normally show debit balances. The normal balances may be diagrammed as in Illustration 3.15.

ILLUSTRATION 3.15 Normal balances–revenues and expenses

A diagram of T-account indicates the Debit and Credit effects on Revenues. The left side of the T account is labeled as, Debit for decrease, and the right labeled as, Credit for increase. An arrow pointing downward on the left of the T-account implies that Debits decrease Revenues. An arrow pointing upward on the right indicates that Credits increase Revenues. The Account Balance is displayed on the Credit, right side, and labeled as Normal Balance.  A second T-account indicates the Debit and Credit effects on Expenses. The left side of the T account is labeled as, Debit for increase, and the right labeled as, Credit for decrease. An arrow pointing upward on the left of the T-account implies that Debits increase Expenses. A red arrow pointing downward on the right indicates that Credits decrease Expenses. The Account Balance is displayed on the Debit, left side, and labeled as Normal Balance.

Stockholders’ Equity Relationships

Companies report the subdivisions of stockholders’ equity in various places in the financial statements:

  • Common stock and retained earnings: in the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet.
  • Dividends: on the retained earnings statement.
  • Revenues and expenses: on the income statement.

Dividends, revenues, and expenses are eventually transferred to retained earnings at the end of the period. As a result, a change in any one of these three items affects stockholders’ equity. Illustration 3.16 shows the relationships of the accounts affecting stockholders’ equity.

ILLUSTRATION 3.16 Stockholders’ equity relationships

An illustration of an income statement. The statement displays a single-line heading consisting of the type of statement, Income Statement. There is one column in this statement, which displays labels. The first line of the statement displays: Revenues. The next line shows: Less: Expenses. The total is labeled as: Net income or net loss. An illustration of a retained earnings statement. The statement displays a single-line heading consisting of the type of statement, Retained Earnings Statement. There is one column in this statement, which displays labels. The first line of the statement displays: Beginning retained earnings. The next line shows: Less: Dividends. The total is labeled as: Ending retained earnings. Net income is carried forwarded.  An illustration of a balance sheet. The statement displays a single-line heading consisting of the type of statement, Balance Sheet. There is one column in this statement, which displays labels. The first line of the statement displays: Assets. The next line shows: Liabilities. The third section is labeled as, Stockholders’ equity. The following account labels are listed immediately below the Stockholders’ equity section label, slightly indented: Common stock, and Retained earnings.  A corresponding text to the label, Common Stock, reads Investments by stockholders. A corresponding text to the label, Retained Earnings, reads Net income retained in the business. Ending retained earnings is carried forwarded.

Summary of Debit/Credit Rules

Illustration 3.17 summarizes the debit/credit rules and effects on each type of account.

  • Study this diagram carefully. It will help you understand the fundamentals of the double-entry system (see Helpful Hint).
  • No matter what the transaction, total debits must equal total credits accounting equation in balance.

ILLUSTRATION 3.17 Summary of debit/credit rules

An illustration shows a summary of debit and credit rules and begins with the Basic Equation as, Assets equals Liabilities plus Stockholders’ Equity. The Expanded Basic Equation is displayed with seven T-accounts which recap the behavior of Debits and Credits. The Assets T-account shows that Debits cause increases and Credits cause decreases. The Liabilities T-account shows that Debits cause decreases and Credits cause increases. Common Stock, Retained Earnings, and Revenues show that Debits cause decreases and Credits cause increases. The Expenses and Dividends T-accounts show that Debits cause increases and Credits cause decreases.

3.3 Using a Journal

A flow diagram shows nine steps involved in the accounting cycle as follows: Analyze, Journalize the transactions, Post, Trial Balance, Adjusting Entries, Adjusted Trial Balance, Financial Statements, Closing Entries, Post-Closing Trial Balance. Step 2, Journalize the transactions, is highlighted and enlarged.

The Recording Process

Although it is possible to enter transaction information directly into the accounts, few businesses do so. Practically every business uses these basic steps in the recording process (an integral part of the accounting cycle):

  1. Analyze each transaction in terms of its effect on the accounts.
  2. Enter the transaction information in a journal.
  3. Transfer the journal information to the appropriate accounts in the ledger.

The actual sequence of events begins with the transaction. Evidence of the transaction comes in the form of a source document, such as a sales slip, a check, a bill, or a cash register document (see Ethics Note). This evidence is analyzed to determine the effect of the transaction on specific accounts. The transaction is then entered in the journal. Finally, the journal entry is transferred to the designated accounts in the ledger. The sequence of events in the recording process is shown in Illustration 3.18.

ILLUSTRATION 3.18 The recording process

An illustration displays three overlapping statements. An invoice of Superior Equipment Sales is billed to Zoe Corporation with a description that reads, Purchase of equipment of $5,000. A text below reads, Analyze transaction.  An illustration of the general journal format displays a transaction to purchase equipment. This illustration displays a label at the top with the label, General Journal, centered. The next line displays two column headings of the journal as Date, and Account Titles and Explanation. Immediately under the Date column label, 2025 is displayed followed by February 2. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Equipment, in the Account Titles and Explanation section and on the same row as the date. The second part of the transaction is illustrated by displaying the credit account name, Cash, slightly indented on the next line in the Account Titles and Explanation section. Just below the Common Stock account name and slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Purchased equipment. A text below reads, Enter transaction.  A diagram displays a label at the top with the label, General Journal, centered. Two t-accounts are displayed below the label. The account name is displayed on top of the first T on the left as Cash. One transaction is posted on the left (debit) side, labeled Beginning balance, in the amount of 10,000. One transaction is posted on the right (credit) side, dated February 2, in the amount of 5,000. The account name is displayed on top of the second T on the right as Equipment. One transaction is posted on the left (debit) side, dated February 2, in the amount of 5,000. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side. A text below reads, Transfer from journal to ledger.

The Journal

Transactions are initially recorded in chronological order in a journal before they are transferred to the accounts. For each transaction, the journal shows the debit and credit effects on specific accounts (see Helpful Hint).

Companies may use various kinds of journals, but every company has at least the most basic form of journal, a general journal. The journal makes three significant contributions to the recording process:

  1. It discloses in one place the complete effect of a transaction.
  2. It provides a chronological record of transactions.
  3. It helps to prevent or locate errors because the debit and credit amounts for each entry can be readily compared.

Entering transaction data in the journal is known as journalizing. To illustrate the technique of journalizing, let’s look at the first three transactions of Sierra Corporation in equation form.

  1. On October 1, Sierra issued common stock in exchange for $10,000 cash:
    Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
            Common  
    Cash =     Stock  
    +$10,000       +$10,000 Issued stock
  2. On October 1, Sierra borrowed $5,000 by signing a note:
    Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
        Notes    
    Cash = Payable    
    +$5,000   +$5,000    
  3. On October 2, Sierra purchased equipment for $5,000:
    Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
    Cash + Equipment    
    −$5,000   +$5,000    

Sierra makes separate journal entries for each transaction. A complete entry consists of (1) the date of the transaction, (2) the accounts and amounts to be debited and credited, and (3) a brief explanation of the transaction. These transactions are journalized in Illustration 3.19.

ILLUSTRATION 3.19 Recording transactions in journal form

General Journal

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
2025 Oct. 1 Cash 10,000  
  Common Stock   10,000
  (Issued stock for cash)    
1 Cash 5,000  
  Notes Payable   5,000
  (Issued 3-month, 12% note payable for cash)    
2 Equipment 5,000  
  Cash   5,000
  (Purchased equipment for cash)    

Note the following features of the journal entries.

  1. The date of the transaction is entered in the Date column.
  2. The account to be debited is entered first at the left. The account to be credited is then entered on the next line, indented under the line above. The indentation differentiates debits from credits and decreases the possibility of switching the debit and credit amounts.
  3. The amounts for the debits are recorded in the Debit (left) column, and the amounts for the credits are recorded in the Credit (right) column.
  4. A brief explanation of the transaction is given (see Helpful Hint).

It is important to use correct and specific account titles in journalizing. Erroneous account titles lead to incorrect financial statements. Some flexibility exists initially in selecting account titles. The main criterion is that each title must appropriately describe the content of the account. For example, a company could use any of these account titles for recording the cost of delivery trucks: Equipment, Delivery Equipment, Delivery Trucks, or Trucks. Once the company chooses the specific title to use, however, it should record under that account title all subsequent transactions involving the account.

3.4 The Ledger and Posting

A flow diagram shows nine steps involved in the accounting cycle as follows: Analyze, Journalize, Post to Ledger Accounts, Trial Balance, Adjusting Entries, Adjusted Trial Balance, Financial Statements, Closing Entries, Post-Closing Trial Balance. Step 3, Post to Ledger Accounts, is highlighted and enlarged.

The Ledger

The record of all accounts maintained by a company and their amounts is referred to collectively as the ledger.

  • The ledger provides the balance in each of the accounts as well as keeps track of changes in these balances.
  • Companies may use various kinds of ledgers, but every company has a general ledger.
  • A general ledger contains all the asset, liability, stockholders’ equity, revenue, and expense accounts, as shown in Illustration 3.20.

Whenever we use the term ledger in this text without additional specification, it will mean the general ledger.

ILLUSTRATION 3.20 The general ledger

A diagram shows the basic structure of a general Ledger. The general Ledger contains three types of accounts, represented with three text boxes across the diagram as Asset accounts, liability accounts, and stockholders’ equity accounts. Beneath each component are examples of accounts in the respective categories. Examples of asset accounts include Equipment, Land, Supplies, Accounts Receivable, and Cash.  The Liability Accounts include Interest Payable, Salaries and Wages Payable, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, and Notes Payable. Examples of Stockholders’ Equity Accounts include Salaries and Wages Expense, Service Revenue, Dividends, Retained Earnings, and Common Stock.

Chart of Accounts

The number and type of accounts used differ for each company, depending on the size, complexity, and type of business. For example, the number of accounts depends on the amount of detail desired by management. The management of one company may want one single account for all types of utility expense. Another may keep separate expense accounts for each type of utility expenditure, such as gas, electricity, and water.

  • A small corporation like Sierra Corporation will not have many accounts compared with a corporate giant like Ford Motor Company.
  • Sierra may be able to manage and report its activities in 20 to 30 accounts, whereas Ford requires thousands of accounts to keep track of its worldwide activities.

Most companies list the names of the accounts in a chart of accounts. They may create new accounts as needed during the life of the business. Illustration 3.21 shows the chart of accounts for Sierra in the order that they are typically listed (assets, liabilities, stockholders’ equity, revenues, and expenses). Accounts shown in red are used in this chapter; accounts shown in black are explained in later chapters.

ILLUSTRATION 3.21 Chart of accounts for Sierra Corporation

Sierra Corporation
Chart of Accounts
  Assets   Liabilities   Stockholders’ Equity   Revenues   Expenses  
  Cash
Accounts Receivable Supplies
Prepaid Insurance Equipment
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
  Notes Payable
Accounts Payable
Interest Payable
Unearned Service Revenue
Salaries and Wages Payable
  Common Stock
Retained Earnings
Dividends
Income Summary
  Service Revenue   Salaries and Wages Expense
Supplies Expense
Rent Expense
Insurance Expense
Interest Expense
Depreciation Expense
 

Posting

The procedure of transferring journal entry amounts to ledger accounts is called posting. This phase of the recording process accumulates the effects of journalized transactions in the individual accounts. Posting involves these steps:

  1. In the ledger, enter in the appropriate columns of the debited account(s) the date and debit amount shown in the journal.
  2. In the ledger, enter in the appropriate columns of the credited account(s) the date and credit amount shown in the journal.

The Recording Process Illustrated

Illustrations 3.22 through 3.32 show the basic steps in the recording process using the October transactions of Sierra Corporation. Sierra’s accounting period is a month. A basic analysis and a debit–credit analysis precede the journalizing and posting of each transaction. Study these transaction analyses carefully.

  • The purpose of transaction analysis is first to identify the type of account involved and then to determine whether a debit or a credit to the account is required.
  • You should always perform this type of analysis before preparing a journal entry. Doing so will help you understand the journal entries discussed in this chapter as well as more complex journal entries to be described in later chapters.

ILLUSTRATION 3.22 Investment of cash by stockholders

An illustration shows the basic steps of the investment of cash by stockholders for the following transaction: Event 1, On October 1, stockholders invest $10,000 cash in an outdoor guide service company to be known as Sierra Corporation. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger.  The first step in the basic analysis is labeled as: The asset Cash increased $10,000, stockholders’ equity, specifically Common Stock, is increased $10,000.  The equation analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. Cash is shown as a $10,000 increase under the assets column, and as an increase of 10,000 under Stockholders’ equity labeled as Common Stock.  The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase assets: debit Cash $10,000; and credits increase stockholders’ equity: credit Common Stock $10,000.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 1. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Cash, with 10,000 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Common Stock is displayed, and 10,000 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Issued stock for cash. Finally, the Posting to Ledger section shows a 10,000 amount posted to the left side of the Cash t-account, and 10,000 posted to the right side of the Common Stock t-account, both dated as October 1. A text on the left reads: Cash Flows, increase of $10,000, and is illustrated with an upward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.23 Issue of note payable

An illustration shows the basic steps of the issue of notes payable for the following transaction: Event 2, On October 1, Sierra borrows cash of $5,000 by signing a 3-month, 12%, $5,000 note payable.  The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger. The first step in the basic analysis is labeled as: The asset Cash is increased $5,000, the liability Notes Payable increased $5,000.  The equation analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. The equation displays Cash with a $5,000 increase under the assets column, along with Notes payable as a $5,000 increase under the liabilities column. The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase assets: debit Cash $5,000; and credits increase liabilities: credit Notes Payable $5,000.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 1. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Cash, with 5,000 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Notes payable is displayed, and 5,000 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Issued 3-month, 12% note payable for cash.  Finally, the posting to ledger section shows 10,000 and 5,000 amounts posted to the left side of the Cash t-account, and 5,000 posted to the right side of the Notes Payable t-account, both dated as October 1. A text on the right reads: Cash Flows, increase of $5,000, and is illustrated with an upward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.24 Purchase of equipment

An illustration shows the basic of the purchase of equipment for the following transaction: Event 3, October 2, Sierra used $5,000 cash to purchase equipment. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit–Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger.  The first step is the Basic Analysis is labeled as: The asset Equipment is increased $5,000; the asset Cash is decreased $5,000. The Equation Analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets equals Liabilities plus Stockholders’ Equity. The Cash and Equipment accounts are listed under the Assets section as decrease $5,000, and increase $5,000 respectively.  The Debit-Credit Analysis step indicates: Debits increases assets: Debit Equipment $5,000. Credits decrease assets: Credit Cash $5,000. The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 2. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Equipment, with 5,000 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Cash is displayed with 5,000 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Purchased equipment for cash. Finally, the Posting to Ledger section shows the October 1, 10,000 amount along with the new 5,000 amount dated October 2 posted on the left side of the Cash t-account, and 5,000 posted to the right side of the Equipment t-account, dated as October 2. A text on the right reads: Cash Flows, decrease of $5,000, and is illustrated with a downward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.25 Receipt of cash in advance from customer

An illustration shows the basic steps of the receipt of cash in advance from the customer for the following transaction: Event 4, October 2, Sierra receives a $1,200 cash advance from R. Knox, a client, for guide services for multi-day trips that are expected to be completed in the future. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit–Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger.  The first step is the Basic Analysis is labeled as: The asset Cash increases $1,200; the liability Unearned Service Revenue is increased $1,200 because the service has not been performed yet. That is, when an advance payment is received, unearned revenue (a liability) should be recorded in order to recognize the obligation that exists (See helpful hint). The Equation Analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets equals Liabilities plus Stockholders’ Equity. The Cash account is listed under the Assets section as $1,200, and $1,200 is shown under Unearned Service Revenue account under Liabilities section.  The Debit-Credit Analysis step indicates: Debits increases Assets: debit Cash $1,200. Credits increase liabilities: credit Unearned Service Revenue $1,200. The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 2. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Cash, with 1,200 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Unearned Revenue is displayed with 1,200 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Received advance from R. Knox for future services. Finally, the Posting to Ledger section shows the October 1, 10,000 and 5,000 amount along with the new 1,200 amount dated October 2 posted on the left side of the Cash t-account, 5,000 amount dated October 2 posted on the right side of the Cash t-account, and 1,200 posted to the right side of the Unearned Service Revenue t-account, dated as October 2. A text on the left reads: Cash Flows, increase of $1,200, and is illustrated with an upward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.26 Services performed for cash

An illustration shows the basic steps of the services performed for cash for the following transaction: Event 5, On October 3, Sierra received $10,000 in cash from Copa Company for guide services performed in October. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger.  The first step is the basic analysis: The asset Cash is increased $10,000; The revenue Service Revenue is increased $10,000.  The equation analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities plus Stockholders’ Equity. Under the Assets section, Cash is displayed as an increase of $10,000, with a 10,000 increase under the Stockholders’ Equity section labeled as Service Revenue.  The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase assets: debit Cash $10,000; Credits increase revenues: credit Service Revenue $10,000.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form. The date is displayed as October 3. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the title, Cash, adjacent to the date in the next column, and its amount of 10,000 in the debit column, Service Revenue is slightly indented on the next line, with its 10,000 amount in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Received cash for services performed. Finally, the Posting to Ledger section shows the journal entry posted to the Cash and Service Revenue t-accounts. The Cash t-account postings are carried forward from previous transactions, and the current posting of 10,000 is posted as a debit. The Service Revenue t-account displays a single posting on the right side at 10,000, with both postings dated October 20. A text on the left reads: Cash Flows, increase of $10,000, and is illustrated with an upward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.27 Payment of rent with cash

An illustration shows the basic steps of the payment of rent with cash for the following transaction: Event 6, On October 3, Sierra paid office rent for October in cash, $900. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger.  The first step in the basic analysis is labeled as: The expense account Rent Expense is increased $900 because the payment pertains only to the current month; the asset Cash is decreased by $900. The equation analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. There is a $900 decrease labeled as Cash in the assets column, along with Rent Expense as a $900 decrease under the stockholders’ equity column. The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase expenses: debit Rent Expense $900. Credits decrease assets: credit Cash $900.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 3. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Rent Expense, with 900 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Cash is displayed with 900 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Paid cash for October office rent. Finally, the Posting to Ledger section shows the two previous Cash transactions posted to the debit side, along with the current 900 amount posted to the right side of the cash t-account. On the left side of the Rent Expense t-account, the October 3, 900 amount is posted. Both postings are dated October 3. A text on the right reads: Cash Flows, decrease of 900, and is illustrated with a downward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.28 Purchase of insurance policy with cash

An illustration shows the basic steps of the purchase of insurance policy with cash for the following transaction: Event 7, On October 4, Sierra paid $600 for a 1-year insurance policy that will expire next year on September 30. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger.  The first step in the basic analysis is labeled as: The asset Cash decreases $600. Payments of expenses that will benefit more than one accounting period are identified as prepaid expenses or prepayments. When a payment is made, an asset account is debited in order to show the service or benefit that will be received in the future. Therefore, the asset Prepaid Insurance is increased $600. The equation analysis step displays the transaction analysis format which begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. The amount $600 decrease is displayed under the Assets column labeled Cash, along with Prepaid Insurance as a $600 increase under the assets column. The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase assets: debit Prepaid Insurance $600. Credits decrease assets: credit Cash $600.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 4. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Prepaid Insurance, and 600 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Cash is displayed with 600 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Paid 1-year policy, effective date October 1. Finally, the Posting to Ledger step shows the postings to the Cash account are carried forward from previous postings, and the current posting shows a 600 amount posted to the right side of the cash t-account, and 600 posted to the left side of the Prepaid Insurance t-account, both dated as October 4. A text on the right reads: Cash Flows, decrease of 600, and is illustrated with a downward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.29 Purchase of supplies on account

An illustration shows the basic steps of the purchase of supplies on account for the following transaction: Event 8, On October 5, Sierra purchased an estimated 3 months of supplies on account from Aero Supply for $2,500. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting o Ledger.  The first step in the basic analysis is labeled as: The asset Supplies is increased $2,500; the liability Accounts payable is increased $2,500.  The equation analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. A $2,500 increase is labeled as Supplies in the assets column, along with Accounts Payable as a $2,500 increase under the liabilities column. The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase assets: debit Supplies $2,500. Credits increase liabilities: credit Accounts Payable $2,500.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 5. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Supplies, with 2,500 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Accounts Payable is displayed with 2,500 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Purchased supplies on account from Aero Supply. Finally, the Posting to Ledger section shows a 2,500 amount posted to the left side of the Supplies t-account, and 2,500 posted to the right side of the Accounts Payable t-account, both dated as October 5. The text on the left reads Cash Flows: no effect.

ILLUSTRATION 3.30 Hiring of new employees

An illustration shows the first two steps of transaction analysis, which read: Event: On October 9, Sierra hires four employees to begin work on October 15. Each employee is to receive a weekly salary of $500 for a 5-day work week, payable every 2 weeks—first payment made on October 26; and  Basic Analysis: This is a accounting event; an accounting transaction has not occurred. There is only an agreement that the employees will begin work on October 15. Thus, a debit–credit analysis is not needed because there is no accounting entry. (See October 26 (Event 11) for first payment.

ILLUSTRATION 3.31 Payment of dividend

An illustration shows the basic steps of the payment of dividend for the following transaction: Event 10, On October 20, Sierra paid $500 cash dividend to stockholders. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Posting to Ledger.  The first step in the basic analysis is labeled as: The dividends account is increased $500; the asset Cash is decreased $500. The equation analysis step displays the transaction analysis format which begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity. The amount $500 decrease is displayed under the Assets column labeled Cash, and the amount $500 decrease is displayed under the Stockholders’ column labeled Dividends. The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase dividends: debit Dividends $500. Credits decrease assets: credit Cash $500.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form with the date as October 20. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account name, Dividends, and 500 in the debit column. Just below slightly indented, Cash is displayed with 500 in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Declared and paid a cash dividend. Finally, the Posting to Ledger step shows the postings to the Cash account are carried forward from previous postings, and the current posting shows a 500 amount posted to the right side of the cash t-account, and 500 posted to the left side of the Dividends t-account, both dated as October 20. A text on the right reads: Cash Flows, decrease of 500, and is illustrated with a downward pointing arrow.

ILLUSTRATION 3.32 Payment of cash for employee salaries

An illustration shows the basic steps of the payment of cash for employees’ salaries the following transaction: Event 11, on October 26, Sierra paid employee salaries of $4,000 in cash, see October 9 event. The five steps are Basic Analysis, Equation Analysis, Debit-Credit Analysis, Journal Entry, and Post to Ledger.  The first step is the basic analysis: The expense account Salaries and Wages Expense is increased $4,000; the asset Cash decreased $4,000.  The equation analysis step begins with the accounting equation expressed as: Assets = Liabilities plus Stockholders’ Equity. Under the Assets section, Cash is displayed as negative $4,000, along with Salaries and Wages Expense displayed as negative $4,000 in the Stockholders’ Equity section.  The debit credit analysis step indicates: Debits increase expenses, debit Salaries and Wages Expenses $4,000. Credits decrease assets, credit Cash $4,000.  The journal entry is displayed in general journal form. The transaction is dated October 26. The debit part of the transaction is recorded by displaying the account title, Salaries and Wages Expenses, and 4,000 in the debit column, and Cash, slightly indented on the next line with its 4,000 amount in the credit column. Just below, slightly indented appears the description of the journal entry as: Paid salaries to date. Finally, the Posting to Ledger section shows the journal entry posted to the Cash t-account with the previous cash postings carried forward, and the current 4,000 credit posting on the right side. The Salaries and Wages Expenses t-account displays a single posting on the left side dated October 26 as 4,000. A text on the right reads: Cash Flows, decrease of 4,000, and is illustrated with a downward pointing arrow.

Summary Illustration of Journalizing and Posting

The journal for Sierra Corporation for the month of October is summarized in Illustration 3.33. The ledger is shown in Illustration 3.34 with all balances highlighted in red.

ILLUSTRATION 3.33 General journal for Sierra Corporation

General Journal
Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
2025 Oct. 1 Cash 10,000  
  Common Stock   10,000
  (Issued stock for cash)    
1 Cash 5,000  
  Notes Payable   5,000
  (Issued 3-month, 12% note payable for cash)    
2 Equipment 5,000  
  Cash   5,000
  (Purchased equipment for cash)    
2 Cash 1,200  
  Unearned Service Revenue   1,200
  (Received advance from R. Knox for future service)    
3 Cash 10,000  
  Service Revenue   10,000
  (Received cash for services performed)    
3 Rent Expense 900  
  Cash   900
  (Paid cash for October office rent)    
4 Prepaid Insurance 600  
  Cash   600
  (Paid 1-year policy; effective date October 1)    
5 Supplies 2,500  
  Accounts Payable   2,500
  (Purchased supplies on account from Aero Supply)    
20 Dividends 500  
  Cash   500
  (Declared and paid a cash dividend)    
26 Salaries and Wages Expense 4,000  
  Cash   4,000
  (Paid salaries to date)    

ILLUSTRATION 3.34 General journal for Sierra Corporation

Diagram shows twelve t-accounts. The account name is displayed on top of the first T as Cash. The left side shows five amounts. The first is the balance dated October 1 in the amount of 10,000. Just below is a transaction dated October 1 with the 5,000 posting amount immediately below the 10,000 balance. Just below is a transaction dated October 2 with the 1,200 posting amount immediately below the 5,000 balance. Just below is a transaction dated October 3 with the 10,000 posting amount immediately below the 1,200 balance. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 15,200 posting amount immediately below the 10,000 balance. The right side shows five amounts. The first is the balance dated October 2 in the amount of 5,000. Just below is a transaction dated October 3 with the 900 posting amount immediately below the 5,000 balance. Just below is a transaction dated October 4 with the 600 posting amount immediately below the 900 balance. Just below is a transaction dated October 20 with the 500 posting amount immediately below the 600 balance. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 26 with the 4,000 posting amount immediately below the 500 balance. The account name is displayed on top of the second T as Supplies. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 5 in the amount of 2,500. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 2,500 posting amount immediately below the 2,500 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side.  The account name is displayed on top of the third T as Prepaid Insurance. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 4 in the amount of 600. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 600 posting amount immediately below the 600 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side.   The account name is displayed on top of the fourth T as Equipment. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 2 in the amount of 5,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 5,000 posting amount immediately below the 5,000 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side.   The account name is displayed on top of the fifth T as Notes Payable. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 1 in the amount of 5,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 5,000 posting amount immediately below the 5,000 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the sixth T as Accounts Payable. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 5 in the amount of 2,500. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 2,500 posting amount immediately below the 2,500 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the seventh T as Unearned Service Revenue. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 2 in the amount of 1,200. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 1,200 posting amount immediately below the 1,200 balance. The account name is displayed on top of the eighth T as Common Stock. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 1 in the amount of 10,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 10,000 posting amount immediately below the 10,000 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the ninth T as Dividends. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 20 in the amount of 500. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 500 posting amount immediately below the 500 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side. The account name is displayed on top of the tenth T as Service Revenue. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 3 in the amount of 10,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 10,000 posting amount immediately below the 10,000 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the eleventh T as Salaries and Wages Expense. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 26 in the amount of 4,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 4,000 posting amount immediately below the 4,000 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side. The account name is displayed on top of the twelfth T as Rent Expense. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated October 3 in the amount of 900. Just below is a transaction balance dated October 31 with the 900 posting amount immediately below the 900 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side. Transaction balances of all t-accounts are highlighted.

3.5 The Trial Balance

A flow diagram shows nine steps involved in the accounting cycle as follows: Analyze, Journalize, Post, Prepare a trial balance, Adjusting Entries, Adjusted Trial Balance, Financial Statements, Closing Entries, Post-Closing Trial Balance. Step 4, Prepare a trial balance, is highlighted and enlarged.

A trial balance lists accounts and their balances at a given time.

The trial balance proves the mathematical equality of debits and credits after posting. Under the double-entry system, this equality occurs when the sum of the debit account balances equals the sum of the credit account balances. A trial balance may also uncover errors in journalizing and posting. For example, a trial balance may well have detected the error at MF Global discussed in the Feature Story. In addition, a trial balance is useful in the preparation of financial statements.

These are the procedures for preparing a trial balance:

  1. List the account titles and their balances.
  2. Total the debit column and total the credit column.
  3. Verify the equality of the two columns.

Illustration 3.35 presents the trial balance prepared from the ledger of Sierra Corporation (see Helpful Hint). Note that the total debits, $28,700, equal the total credits, $28,700.

ILLUSTRATION 3.35 Sierra Corporation trial balance

Sierra Corporation
Trial Balance
October 31, 2025
    Debit   Credit  
  Cash $15,200      
  Supplies 2,500      
  Prepaid Insurance 600      
  Equipment 5,000      
  Notes Payable     $ 5,000  
  Accounts Payable     2,500  
  Unearned Service Revenue     1,200  
  Common Stock     10,000  
  Dividends 500      
  Service Revenue     10,000  
  Salaries and Wages Expense 4,000      
  Rent Expense 900      
    $28,700   $28,700  

Limitations of a Trial Balance

A trial balance does not prove that all transactions have been recorded or that the ledger is correct. Numerous errors may exist even though the trial balance column totals agree (see Ethics Note). For example, the trial balance may balance even when any of the following occurs:

  1. A transaction is not journalized.
  2. A correct journal entry is not posted.
  3. A journal entry is posted twice.
  4. Incorrect accounts are used in journalizing or posting.
  5. Offsetting errors are made in recording the amount of a transaction.

In other words, as long as equal debits and credits are posted, even to the wrong account or in the wrong amount, the total debits will equal the total credits. Nevertheless, despite these limitations, the trial balance is a useful screen for finding errors and is frequently used in practice.

Review and Practice

Learning Objectives Review

Each business transaction must have a dual effect on the accounting equation. For example, if an individual asset is increased, there must be a corresponding (a) decrease in another asset, or (b) increase in a specific liability, or (c) increase in stockholders’ equity.

An account is an individual accounting record of increases and decreases in specific asset, liability, and stockholders’ equity, revenue, or expense items.

The terms debit and credit are synonymous with left and right. Assets, dividends, and expenses are increased by debits and decreased by credits. Liabilities, common stock, retained earnings, and revenues are increased by credits and decreased by debits.

The basic steps in the recording process are (a) analyze each transaction in terms of its effect on the accounts, (b) enter the transaction information in a journal, and (c) transfer the journal information to the appropriate accounts in the ledger.

The initial accounting record of a transaction is entered in a journal before the data are entered in the accounts. A journal (a) discloses in one place the complete effect of a transaction, (b) provides a chronological record of transactions, and (c) prevents or locates errors because the debit and credit amounts for each entry can be readily compared.

The entire group of accounts maintained by a company is referred to collectively as a ledger. The ledger provides the balance in each of the accounts as well as keeps track of changes in these balances.

Posting is the procedure of transferring journal entries to the ledger accounts. This phase of the recording process accumulates the effects of journalized transactions in the individual accounts.

A trial balance is a list of accounts and their balances at a given time. The primary purpose of the trial balance is to prove the mathematical equality of debits and credits after posting. A trial balance also uncovers errors in journalizing and posting and is useful in preparing financial statements.

Decision Tools Review

Decision Checkpoints Info Needed for Decision Tool to Use for Decision How to Evaluate Results
Has an accounting transaction occurred? Details of the event Accounting equation If the event affected assets, liabilities, or stockholders’ equity, then record as a transaction.
How do you determine that debits equal credits? All account balances Trial balance List the account titles and their balances; total the debit and credit columns; verify equality.

Glossary Review

Account
An individual accounting record of increases and decreases in specific asset, liability, stockholders’ equity, revenue, or expense items.
Accounting information system
The system of collecting and processing transaction data and communicating financial information to decision-makers.
Accounting transactions
Events that require recording in the financial statements because they affect assets, liabilities, or stockholders’ equity.
Chart of accounts
A list of the names of a company’s accounts.
Credit
The right side of an account.
Debit
The left side of an account.
Double-entry system
A system that records the two-sided effect of each transaction in appropriate accounts.
General journal
The most basic form of journal.
General ledger
A ledger that contains all asset, liability, stockholders’ equity, revenue, and expense accounts.
Journal
An accounting record in which transactions are initially recorded in chronological order.
Journalizing
The procedure of entering transaction data in the journal.
Ledger
A record of all accounts maintained by a company and their amounts.
Posting
The procedure of transferring journal entry amounts to the ledger accounts.
T-account
The basic form of an account.
Trial balance
A list of accounts and their balances at a given time.

Practice Multiple-Choice Questions

1. (LO 1) The effects on the basic accounting equation of performing services for cash are to:

  1. increase assets and decrease stockholders’ equity.
  2. increase assets and increase stockholders’ equity.
  3. increase assets and increase liabilities.
  4. increase liabilities and increase stockholders’ equity.

Solution

b. When services are performed for cash, assets are increased and stockholders’ equity is increased. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

2. (LO 1) Genesis Company buys a $900 machine on credit. This transaction will affect the:

  1. income statement only.
  2. balance sheet only.
  3. income statement and retained earnings statement only.
  4. income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet.

Solution

b. When equipment is purchased on credit, assets are increased and liabilities are increased. These are both balance sheet accounts. The other choices are incorrect because neither the income statement nor the retained earnings statement is affected.

3. (LO 1) Which of the following events is not recorded in the accounting records?

  1. Equipment is purchased on account.
  2. An employee is terminated.
  3. A cash investment is made into the business.
  4. Company pays dividend to stockholders.

Solution

b. Termination of an employee is not a recordable event in the accounting records. The other choices all represent events that are recorded.

4. (LO 1) During 2025, Gibson Company assets decreased $50,000 and its liabilities decreased $90,000. Its stockholders’ equity therefore:

  1. increased $40,000.
  2. decreased $140,000.
  3. decreased $40,000.
  4. increased $140,000.

Solution

a. Since assets decreased by $50,000 and liabilities decreased by $90,000, stockholders’ equity has to increase by $40,000 to keep the accounting equation balanced. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

5. (LO 2) Which statement about an account is true?

  1. An account consists of a title, a debit side, and a ledger side.
  2. An account is an individual accounting record of increases and decreases in specific asset, liability, and stockholders’ equity items.
  3. There are separate accounts for specific assets and liabilities but only one account for stockholders’ equity items.
  4. The left side of an account is the credit, or decrease, side.

Solution

b. An account is an individual accounting record of increases and decreases in specific asset, liability, and stockholders’ equity items. The other choices are incorrect because (a) in its simplest form, an account consists of three parts: a title and debit and credit side; (c) there are specific accounts for different types of stockholders’ equity, such as Common Stock, Retained Earnings, and Dividends; and (d) the left side of an account is the debit side.

6. (LO 2) Debits:

  1. increase both assets and liabilities.
  2. decrease both assets and liabilities.
  3. increase assets and decrease liabilities.
  4. decrease assets and increase liabilities.

Solution

c. Debits increase assets and decrease liabilities. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

7. (LO 2) A revenue account:

  1. is increased by debits.
  2. is decreased by credits.
  3. has a normal balance of a debit.
  4. is increased by credits.

Solution

d. Revenues are increased by credits. Revenues have a normal credit balance. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

8. (LO 2) Which accounts normally have debit balances?

  1. Assets, expenses, and revenues.
  2. Assets, expenses, and retained earnings.
  3. Assets, liabilities, and dividends.
  4. Assets, dividends, and expenses.

Solution

d. Assets, dividends, and expenses have normal debit balances. The other choices are incorrect because (a) revenues have a normal credit balance, (b) retained earnings has a normal credit balance, and (c) liabilities have a normal credit balance.

9. (LO 2) Paying an account payable with cash affects the components of the accounting equation in the following way:

  1. Decreases stockholders’ equity and decreases liabilities.
  2. Increases assets and decreases liabilities.
  3. Decreases assets and increases stockholders’ equity.
  4. Decreases assets and decreases liabilities.

Solution

d. When paying an account payable with cash, the asset cash decreases. Accounts payable, a liability, decreases as well. The other choices are therefore incorrect.

10. (LO 3) Which is not part of the recording process?

  1. Analyzing transactions.
  2. Preparing an income statement.
  3. Entering transactions in a journal.
  4. Posting journal entries.

Solution

b. Preparing an income statement is not part of the recording process. Choices (a) analyzing transactions, (c) entering transactions in a journal, and (d) posting transactions are all steps in the recording process.

11. (LO 3) Which of these statements about a journal is false?

  1. It contains only revenue and expense accounts.
  2. It provides a chronological record of transactions.
  3. It helps to locate errors because the debit and credit amounts for each entry can be readily compared.
  4. It discloses in one place the complete effect of a transaction.

Solution

a. A journal contains entries affecting all accounts, not just revenue and expense accounts. The other choices are true statements.

12. (LO 4) A ledger:

  1. contains only asset and liability accounts.
  2. should show accounts in alphabetical order.
  3. is a record of all accounts maintained by a company and their amounts.
  4. provides a chronological record of transactions.

Solution

c. A ledger is a record of all accounts maintained by a company and their amounts. The other choices are incorrect because (a) it contains all types of accounts, not just assets and liabilities; (b) they are not listed in alphabetical order but instead in the order of asset, liability, and stockholders’ equity accounts and then revenues and expenses; and (d) the journal provides a chronological record.

13. (LO 4) Posting:

  1. normally occurs before journalizing.
  2. transfers ledger transaction data to the journal.
  3. is an optional step in the recording process.
  4. transfers journal entries to ledger accounts.

Solution

d. Posting transfers journal entries to ledger accounts. The other choices are incorrect because posting (a) occurs after journalizing, (b) transfers the information contained in journal entries to the ledger, and (c) is a required step in the recording process. If posting is not done, the ledger accounts will not reflect changes in the accounts resulting from transactions.

14. (LO 5) A trial balance:

  1. is a list of accounts with their balances at a given time.
  2. proves that proper account titles were used.
  3. will not balance if a correct journal entry is posted twice.
  4. proves that all transactions have been recorded.

Solution

a. A trial balance is a list of accounts with their balances at a given time. The other choices are incorrect because (b) it does not confirm that proper account titles were used; (c) if a journal entry is posted twice, the trial balance will still balance; and (d) a trial balance does not prove that all transactions have been recorded.

15. (LO 5) A trial balance will not balance if:

  1. a correct journal entry is posted twice.
  2. the purchase of supplies on account is debited to Supplies and credited to Cash.
  3. a $100 cash dividend is debited to Dividends for $1,000 and credited to Cash for $100.
  4. a $450 payment on account is debited to Accounts Payable for $45 and credited to Cash for $45.

Solution

c. The entry will cause the trial balance to be out of balance. The other choices are incorrect because although these entries are incorrect, they will still allow the trial balance to balance.

Practice Brief Exercises

1. (LO 1) During 2025, Rain Corp. entered into the following transactions.

  1. Purchased equipment for $31,000 by issuing a note.
  2. Received $960 from tenant for rent.
  3. Paid $520 for supplies previously purchased on account.
  4. Performed services on account for $12,500.

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to revenues or expenses in the right-hand margin. For retained earnings, use separate columns for revenues, expenses, and dividends if necessary. Use Illustration 3.4 as a model.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
    Accts.           Accts.   Notes   Common   Retained Earnings
Cash + Receivable + Supplies + Equip. = Pay. + Pay. + Stock + Rev. Exp. Div.

Solution

  Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity  
      Accts.           Accts.   Notes   Common   Retained Earnings  
  Cash + Receivable + Supplies + Equip. = Pay. + Pay. + Stock + Rev. Exp. Div.  
1.             +$31,000       +$31,000              
2. +$960                           +$960         Rent Revenue
3. −520               −$520                      
4.     +$12,500                       +12,500         Service Revenue

Identify accounts to be debited and credited.

2. (LO 2) Transactions for Warren Potter Inc. for the month of May are presented below. Identify the accounts to be debited and credited for each transaction.

May 1   Stockholders invested $22,000 in the business.
6   Paid office rent of $900.
12   Performed consulting services and billed client $4,400.
18   Purchased equipment on account for $1,200.

Solution

  Account Debited Account Credited
May 1 Cash Common Stock
6 Rent Expense Cash
12 Accounts Receivable Service Revenue
18 Equipment Accounts Payable

Journalize transactions.

3. (LO 3) Using the data from Practice Brief Exercise 2, journalize the transactions (omit explanations).

Solution

May 1 Cash 22,000  
  Common Stock   22,000
6 Rent Expense 900  
  Cash   900
12 Accounts Receivable 4,400  
  Service Revenue   4,400
18 Equipment 1,200  
  Accounts Payable   1,200

Post journal entries to T-accounts.

4. (LO 4) Selected transactions for Carlos Santana Company are presented in journal form below. Post the transactions to T-accounts. Make one T-account for each account and determine each account’s ending balance.

J1
Date Account Titles and Explanation Ref. Debit Credit
June6 Cash   22,000  
  Common Stock     22,000
  (Stockholders’ investment of cash in business)      
13 Accounts Receivable   8,200  
  Service Revenue     8,200
  (Billed for services performed)      
14 Cash   3,700  
  Accounts Receivable     3,700
  (Received cash in payment of account)      

Solution

Cash   Accounts Receivable
6/6 22,000       6/13 8,200 6/14 3,700
6/14 3,700       Bal. 4,500    
Bal. 25,700              
                 
Service Revenue   Common Stock
    6/13 8,200       6/6 22,000
    Bal. 8,200       Bal. 22,000

Prepare a trial balance.

5. (LO 5) From the ledger accounts below, prepare a trial balance for Bundy Corporation at December 31, 2025. List the accounts in the order shown in the text. All account balances are normal.

Accounts Receivable $10,000 Salaries and Wages Expense $ 2,300
Supplies 4,100 Rent Expense 1,200
Accounts Payable 3,500 Common Stock 10,200
Dividends 1,100 Cash 6,000
Service Revenue 11,000    

Solution

Bundy Corporation
Trial Balance
December 31, 2025
      Debit   Credit  
  Cash   $ 6,000      
  Accounts Receivable   10,000      
  Supplies   4,100      
  Accounts Payable       $ 3,500  
  Common Stock       10,200  
  Dividends   1,100      
  Service Revenue       11,000  
  Salaries and Wages Expense   2,300      
  Rent Expense   1,200      
      $24,700   $24,700  

Practice Exercises

Prepare a tabular presentation.

1. (LO 1) Legal Services Inc. was incorporated on July 1, 2025. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.

  1. Stockholders invested $10,000 in cash in exchange for common stock of Legal Services Inc.
  2. Paid $800 for July rent on office space.
  3. Purchased office equipment on account $3,000.
  4. Performed legal services for clients for cash $1,500.
  5. Borrowed $700 cash from a bank on a note payable.
  6. Performed legal services for client on account $2,000.
  7. Paid monthly expenses: salaries $500, utilities $300, and advertising $100.

Instructions

Prepare a tabular summary of the transactions.

Solution

An accounting equation is expressed as: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, set up as column headings. The Cash, Accounts Receivable, and Equipment accounts are listed under Assets column as: Cash plus Accounts Receivable plus Equipment. The Notes Payable and Accounts Payable are listed under Liabilities column as: Notes Payable plus Accounts Payable. The Common Stock account, Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends are listed under the Stockholders' Equity column as: Common Stock plus Revenues minus Expenses minus Dividends (revenue, expense, and dividend come under the sub-heading retained earnings under the stockholder’s equity column). Seven numbered transactions, and two unnumbered transactions are given for the accounts as follows: Transaction (1) has the amount, $10,000 with a positive sign for the accounts, Cash, and Common Stock; Transaction (2) has the amount, $800  with a minus sign for the accounts, Cash, and Retained Earnings Expenses, and the label, Rent expense appears to the right of this transaction; Transaction (3) has the amount, $3,000 with a positive sign for the accounts, Equipment, and Accounts Payable; Transaction (4) has the amount, $1,500 with a positive sign for the accounts, Cash, and Revenue, and the label, Service Revenue appears to the right of this transaction; Transaction (5) has the amount, $700 with a positive sign  for the accounts, Cash, and Notes Payable; Transaction (6) has the amount, $2,000 with a positive sign for the accounts, Accounts Receivable, and Revenue, and the label, Service Revenue appears to the right of this transaction; Transaction (7) has the amount, 500 with a minus sign for the accounts, Cash, and Retained Earnings Expenses, and the label, Salary or Wages Expenses appears to the right of this transaction; Unnumbered transaction 1 has the amount 300 with a minus sign for the accounts, Cash, and Expenses, and the label, Utilities Expense appears to the right of this transaction; Unnumbered transaction 2 has the amount, 100 with a minus sign for the accounts, Cash, and Expenses, and the label, Advertising Expense appears to the right of this transaction; The amounts are totaled as: Cash, $10,500; Accounts Receivable, $2,000; Equipment, $3,000; Notes Payable, $700; Accounts Payable, $3,000; Common Stock, $10,000; Retained Earnings Revenue, $3,500; Retained Earnings Expense, $1,700; and Retained Earnings Dividends, $0. The amounts of cash, account receivable, and equipment are totaled as $15,500 and marked with a downward curly brace. The amounts of Notes payable, Accounts payable, Common Stock, revenues, expenses, and dividends are totaled as $15,500 and marked with a downward curly brace.

Journalize transactions.

2. (LO 3) Presented below is information related to Conan Real Estate Agency.

Oct.1   Arnold Conan begins business as a real estate agent with a cash investment of $18,000 in exchange for common stock.
2   Hires an administrative assistant.
3   Purchases office equipment for $1,700, on account.
6   Sells a house and lot for B. Clinton; bills B. Clinton $4,200 for realty services performed.
27   Pays $900 on the balance related to the transaction of October 3.
30   Pays the administrative assistant $2,800 in salary for October.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. (You may omit explanations.)

Solution

General Journal
Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
Oct. 1 Cash 18,000  
  Common Stock   18,000
2 No entry required    
3 Equipment 1,700  
  Accounts Payable   1,700
6 Accounts Receivable 4,200  
  Service Revenue   4,200
27 Accounts Payable 900  
  Cash   900
30 Salaries and Wages Expense 2,800  
  Cash   2,800

Practice Problems

Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance.

(LO 3, 4, 5) Bob Sample and other student-investors opened Campus Carpet Cleaning, Inc. on September 1, 2025. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.

Sept.1   Stockholders invested $20,000 cash in the business.
2   Paid $1,000 cash for store rent for the month of September.
3   Purchased industrial carpet-cleaning equipment for $25,000, paying $10,000 in cash and signing a $15,000 6-month, 12% note payable.
4   Paid $1,200 for 1-year accident insurance policy.
10   Received bill from the Daily News for advertising the opening of the cleaning service, $200.
15   Performed services on account for $6,200.
20   Paid a $700 cash dividend to stockholders.
30   Received $5,000 from customers billed on September 15.

The chart of accounts for the company is the same as for Sierra Corporation except for the following additional account: Advertising Expense.

Instructions

  1. Journalize the September transactions.
  2. Open ledger accounts and post the September transactions.
  3. Prepare a trial balance at September 30, 2025.

Solution

  1. General Journal
    Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
    2025 Sept.1 Cash 20,000  
      Common Stock   20,000
      (Issued stock for cash)    
    2 Rent Expense 1,000  
      Cash   1,000
      (Paid September rent)    
    3 Equipment 25,000  
      Cash   10,000
      Notes Payable   15,000
      (Purchased cleaning equipment for cash and 6-month, 12% note payable)    
    4 Prepaid Insurance 1,200  
      Cash   1,200
      (Paid 1-year insurance policy)    
    10 Advertising Expense 200  
      Accounts Payable   200
      (Received bill from Daily News for advertising)    
    15 Accounts Receivable 6,200  
      Service Revenue   6,200
      (Services performed on account)    
    20 Dividends 700  
      Cash   700
      (Declared and paid a cash dividend)    
    30 Cash 5,000  
      Accounts Receivable   5,000
      (Collection of accounts receivable)    
  2. Diagram shows eleven t-accounts. The account name is displayed on top of the first T as Cash. The left side shows three amounts. The first is the balance dated September 1 in the amount of 20,000. Just below is a transaction dated September 30 with the 5,000 posting amount immediately below the 20,000 balance. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 12,100 posting amount immediately below the 5,000 balance. The right side shows four amounts. The first is the balance dated September 2 in the amount of 1,000. Just below is a transaction dated September 3 with the 10,000 posting amount immediately below the 1,000 balance. Just below is a transaction dated September 4 with the 1,200 posting amount immediately below the 10,000 balance. Just below is a transaction dated September 20 with the 700 posting amount immediately below the 1,200 balance. The account name is displayed on top of the second T as Account Receivable. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 15 in the amount of 6,500. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 1,200 posting amount immediately below the 6,200 balance. One transaction is posted on the right (credit) side dated September 30 in the amount of 5,000. The account name is displayed on top of the third T as Prepaid Insurance. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 4 in the amount of 1,200. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 1,200 posting amount immediately below the 1,200 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side.   The account name is displayed on top of the fourth T as Equipment. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 3 in the amount of 25,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 25,000 posting amount immediately below the 25,000 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side.   The account name is displayed on top of the fifth T as Notes Payable. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 3 in the amount of 15,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 15,000 posting amount immediately below the 15,000 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the sixth T as Accounts Payable. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 10 in the amount of 200. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 200 posting amount immediately below the 200 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the seventh T as Common Stock. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 1 in the amount of 20,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 20,000 posting amount immediately below the 20,000 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the eighth T as Dividends. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 20 in the amount of 700. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 700 posting amount immediately below the 700 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side. The account name is displayed on top of the ninth T as Service Revenue. No transaction is posted on the left side. The right side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 15 in the amount of 6,200. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 6,200 posting amount immediately below the 6,200 balance.  The account name is displayed on top of the tenth T as Advertising Expense. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 10 in the amount of 200. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 200 posting amount immediately below the 200 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side. The account name is displayed on top of the eleventh T as Rent Expense. The left side shows two amounts. The first is the balance dated September 2 in the amount of 1,000. Just below is a transaction balance dated September 30 with the 1,000 posting amount immediately below the 1,000 balance. No transaction is posted on the right (credit) side.
  3. Campus Carpet Cleaning, Inc.
    Trial Balance
    September 30, 2025
          Debit   Credit  
      Cash   $12,100      
      Accounts Receivable   1,200      
      Prepaid Insurance   1,200      
      Equipment   25,000      
      Notes Payable       $15,000  
      Accounts Payable       200  
      Common Stock       20,000  
      Dividends   700      
      Service Revenue       6,200  
      Advertising Expense   200      
      Rent Expense   1,000      
          $41,400   $41,400  
                 

Questions

1. Describe the accounting information system.

2. Can a business enter into a transaction that affects only the left side of the basic accounting equation? If so, give an example.

3. Are the following events recorded in the accounting records? Explain your answer in each case.

  1. A major stockholder of the company dies.
  2. Supplies are purchased on account.
  3. An employee is fired.
  4. The company pays a cash dividend to its stockholders.

4. Indicate how each business transaction affects the basic accounting equation.

  1. Paid cash for janitorial services.
  2. Purchased equipment for cash.
  3. Issued common stock to investors in exchange for cash.
  4. Paid an account payable in full.

5. Why is an account referred to as a T-account?

6. The terms debit and credit mean “increase” and “decrease,” respectively. Do you agree? Explain.

7. Barry Barack, a fellow student, contends that the double-entry system means each transaction must be recorded twice. Is Barry correct? Explain.

8. Misty Reno, a beginning accounting student, believes debit balances are favorable and credit balances are unfavorable. Is Misty correct? Discuss.

9. State the rules of debit and credit as applied to (a) asset accounts, (b) liability accounts, and (c) the Common Stock account.

10. What is the normal balance for each of these accounts?

  1. Accounts Receivable.
  2. Cash.
  3. Dividends.
  4. Accounts Payable.
  5. Service Revenue.
  6. Salaries and Wages Expense.
  7. Common Stock.

11. Indicate whether each account is an asset, a liability, or a stockholders’ equity account, and whether it would have a normal debit or credit balance.

  1. Accounts Receivable.
  2. Accounts Payable.
  3. Equipment.
  4. Dividends.
  5. Supplies.

12. For the following transactions, indicate the account debited and the account credited.

  1. Supplies are purchased on account.
  2. Cash is received on signing a note payable.
  3. Employees are paid salaries in cash.

13. For each account listed here, indicate whether it generally will have debit entries only, credit entries only, or both debit and credit entries.

  1. Cash.
  2. Accounts Receivable.
  3. Dividends.
  4. Accounts Payable.
  5. Salaries and Wages Expense.
  6. Service Revenue.

14. What are the normal balances for the following accounts of Apple? (a) Accounts Receivable, (b) Accounts Payable, (c) Sales, and (d) Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses.

15. What are the basic steps in the recording process?

16.

  1. When entering a transaction in the journal, should the debit or credit be written first?
  2. Which should be indented, the debit or the credit?

17.

  1. Should accounting transaction debits and credits be recorded directly in the ledger accounts?
  2. What are the advantages of first recording transactions in the journal and then posting to the ledger?

18. Journalize these accounting transactions.

  1. Stockholders invested $12,000 in the business in exchange for common stock.
  2. Insurance of $800 is paid for the year.
  3. Supplies of $1,800 are purchased on account.
  4. Cash of $7,500 is received for services rendered.

19.

  1. What is a ledger?
  2. Why is a chart of accounts important?

20. What is a trial balance and what are its purposes?

21. Brad Tyler is confused about how accounting information flows through the accounting system. He believes information flows in this order:

  1. Debits and credits are posted to the ledger.
  2. Accounting transaction occurs.
  3. Information is entered in the journal.
  4. Adjusting entries are entered, adjusted trial balance is prepared, and financial statements are prepared.
  5. Trial balance is prepared.

Indicate to Brad the proper flow of the information.

22. Two students are discussing the use of a trial balance. They wonder whether the following errors, each considered separately, would prevent the trial balance from balancing. What would you tell them?

  1. The bookkeeper debited Cash for $600 and credited Salaries and Wages Expense for $600 for payment of wages.
  2. Cash collected on account was debited to Cash for $800, and Service Revenue was credited for $80.

Brief Exercises

Determine effect of transactions on basic accounting equation.

BE3.1 (LO 1), C Presented below are three economic events. On a sheet of paper, list the letters (a), (b), and (c) with columns for assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. In each column, indicate whether the event increased (+), decreased (−), or had no effect (NE) on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity.

  1. Purchased supplies on account.
  2. Received cash for performing a service.
  3. Expenses paid in cash.

BE3.2 (LO 1), AP During 2025, Manion Corp. entered into the following transactions.

Determine effect of transactions on basic accounting equation.

  1. Borrowed $60,000 by issuing bonds.
  2. Paid $9,000 cash dividend to stockholders.
  3. Received $13,000 cash from a previously billed customer for services performed.
  4. Purchased supplies on account for $3,100.

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to revenues or expenses in the right-hand margin. For Retained Earnings, use separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends if necessary. Use Illustration 3.4 as a model.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
    Accounts       Accounts   Bonds   Common   Retained
Cash + Receivable + Supplies = Payable + Payable + Stock + Earnings

BE3.3 (LO 1), AP During 2025, Rostock Company entered into the following transactions.

Determine effect of transactions on basic accounting equation.

  1. Purchased equipment for $286,176 cash.
  2. Issued common stock to investors for $137,590 cash.
  3. Purchased inventory of $68,480 on account.

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to revenues or expenses in the right-hand margin. For Retained Earnings, use separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends if necessary. Use Illustration 3.4 as a model.

Assets = Liabilities   + Stockholders’ Equity
            Accounts     Common   Retained
Cash + Inventory + Equipment = Payable   + Stock + Earnings

Indicate debit and credit effects.

BE3.4 (LO 2), K For each of the following accounts, indicate the effect of a debit or a credit on the account and the normal balance.

  1. Accounts Payable.
  2. Advertising Expense.
  3. Service Revenue.
  4. Accounts Receivable.
  5. Retained Earnings.
  6. Dividends.

Indicate debit and credit effects.

BE3.5 (LO 2), K For each of the following accounts, indicate the effect of a debit or credit on the account and the normal balance.

  1. Bonds Payable.
  2. Unearned Service Revenue.
  3. Depreciation Expense.
  4. Common Stock.
  5. Buildings.
  6. Rent Revenue.

Identify accounts to be debited and credited.

BE3.6 (LO 2), C Transactions for Jayne Company for the month of June are presented below. Identify the accounts to be debited and credited for each transaction.

June1   Issues common stock to investors in exchange for $5,000 cash.
2   Buys equipment on account for $1,100.
3   Pays $740 to landlord for June rent.
12   Sends Wil Wheaton a bill for $700 after completing welding work.

Journalize transactions.

BE3.7 (LO 3), AP Use the data in BE3.6 and journalize the transactions. (You may omit explanations.)

Journalize transactions.

BE3.8 (LO 3), AP Journalize the following transactions for Matt’s Carpentry, Inc. (You may omit explanations.)

Sept.1   Purchased supplies for $910 cash.
5   Paid $300 cash dividend to stockholders.
7   Received $4,600 down payment from customer for services to be provided in the future.
16   Received $675 cash from a previously billed customer for payment of services provided in the prior month.
22   Purchased equipment for $1,900 by paying $600 cash and issued a note payable for the balance.

Identify steps in the recording process.

BE3.9 (LO 3), C Rae Mohlee, a fellow student, is unclear about the basic steps in the recording process. Identify and briefly explain the steps in the order in which they occur.

Indicate basic debit–credit analysis.

BE3.10 (LO 3), C Tilton Corporation has the following transactions during August of the current year. Indicate (a) the basic analysis and (b) the debit–credit analysis as shown in Illustrations 3.22 to 3.32.

Aug. 1   Issues shares of common stock to investors in exchange for $10,000.
4   Pays insurance in advance for 3 months, $1,500.
16   Receives $900 from clients for services rendered.
27   Pays the secretary $620 salary.

Journalize transactions.

BE3.11 (LO 3), AP Use the data in BE3.10 and journalize the transactions. (You may omit explanations.)

Post journal entries to T-accounts.

BE3.12 (LO 4), AP Selected transactions for Montes Company are presented below in journal form (without explanations). Post the transactions to T-accounts.

Date Account Title Debit Credit
May5 Accounts Receivable 3,800  
  Service Revenue   3,800
12 Cash 1,600  
  Accounts Receivable   1,600
15 Cash 2,000  
  Service Revenue   2,000

Prepare a trial balance.

BE3.13 (LO 5), AP From the ledger balances below, prepare a trial balance for Peete Company at June 30, 2025. All account balances are normal.

Accounts Payable $ 1,000 Service Revenue $8,600
Cash 5,400 Accounts Receivable 3,000
Common Stock 18,000 Salaries and Wages Expense 4,000
Dividends 1,200 Rent Expense 1,000
Equipment 13,000    

Prepare a corrected trial balance.

BE3.14 (LO 5), AN An inexperienced bookkeeper prepared the following trial balance that does not balance. Prepare a correct trial balance, assuming all account balances are normal.

Birellie Company
Trial Balance
December 31, 2025
    Debit   Credit
Cash   $20,800    
Prepaid Insurance       $ 3,500
Accounts Payable       2,500
Unearned Service Revenue   1,800    
Common Stock       10,000
Retained Earnings       6,600
Dividends       5,000
Service Revenue       25,600
Salaries and Wages Expense   14,600    
Rent Expense       2,600
    $37,200   $55,800

DO IT! Exercises

Prepare tabular analysis.

DO IT! 3.1 (LO 1), AP Transactions made by Mickelson Co. for the month of March are shown below. Prepare a tabular analysis that shows the effects of these transactions on the expanded accounting equation, similar to that shown in Illustration 3.4.

  1. The company performed $20,000 of services for customers on account.
  2. The company received $20,000 in cash from customers who had been billed for services [in transaction (1)].
  3. The company received a bill for $1,800 of advertising but will not pay it until a later date.
  4. Mickelson Co. paid a cash dividend of $3,000.

Identify account type, normal balance, and debit effect.

DO IT! 3.2 (LO 2), C Tracy has the following selected accounts.

  1. Unearned Service Revenue.
  2. Accounts Payable.
  3. Common Stock.
  4. Salaries and Wages Expense.
  5. Dividends.

Indicate whether each of the above accounts is an asset, liability, or stockholders’ equity account, and identify the normal balance. Also, indicate whether a debit would increase or decrease each account.

Record business activities.

DO IT! 3.3 (LO 3), AP Boyd Docker engaged in the following activities in establishing his photography studio, SnapShot!:

  1. Opened a bank account in the name of SnapShot! and deposited $8,000 of his own money into this account in exchange for common stock.
  2. Purchased photography supplies at a total cost of $950. The business paid $400 in cash, and the balance is on account.
  3. Obtained estimates on the cost of photography equipment from three different manufacturers.

Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions.

Post transactions.

DO IT! 3.4 (LO 4), AP Boyd Docker recorded the following transactions during the month of April.

Apr.3 Cash 3,400  
  Service Revenue   3,400
16 Rent Expense 500  
  Cash   500
20 Salaries and Wages Expense 300  
  Cash   300

Post these entries to the Cash account of the general ledger to determine the ending balance in cash. The beginning balance in cash on April 1 was $1,900.

Prepare a trial balance.

DO IT! 3.5 (LO 5), AP The following accounts are taken from the ledger of Chillin’ Company at December 31, 2025.

Notes Payable $20,000 Cash $6,000
Common Stock 25,000 Supplies 5,000
Equipment 76,000 Rent Expense 2,000
Dividends 8,000 Salaries and Wages Payable 3,000
Salaries and Wages Expense 38,000 Accounts Payable 9,000
Service Revenue 86,000 Accounts Receivable 8,000

Prepare a trial balance in good form.

Exercises

Analyze the effect of transactions.

E3.1 (LO 1), C Selected transactions for Thyme Advertising Company, Inc. are listed here.

  1. Issued common stock to investors in exchange for cash received from investors.
  2. Paid monthly rent.
  3. Received cash from customers when service was performed.
  4. Billed customers for services performed.
  5. Paid dividend to stockholders.
  6. Incurred advertising expense on account.
  7. Received cash from customers billed in (4).
  8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.
  9. Purchased equipment on account.

Instructions

Describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. For example, the first answer is (1) Increase in assets and increase in stockholders’ equity.

Analyze the effect of transactions on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity.

E3.2 (LO 1), AP Brady Company entered into these transactions during May 2025, its first month of operations.

  1. Stockholders invested $40,000 in the business in exchange for common stock of the company.
  2. Purchased computers for office use for $30,000 from Ladd on account.
  3. Paid $4,000 cash for May rent on storage space.
  4. Performed computer services worth $19,000 on account.
  5. Performed computer services for Wharton Construction Company for $5,000 cash.
  6. Paid Western States Power Co. $8,000 cash for energy usage in May.
  7. Paid Ladd for the computers purchased in (2).
  8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $1,300 on account.
  9. Received $12,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in (4).

Instructions

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to revenues or expenses in the right-hand margin. Use Illustration 3.4 as a model.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
    Accounts       Accounts   Common   Retained Earnings
Cash + Receivable + Equipment = Payable + Stock + Revenues Expenses Dividends

Determine effect of transactions on basic accounting equation.

E3.3 (LO 1), AP During 2025, its first year of operations as a delivery service, Persimmon Corp. entered into the following transactions.

  1. Issued shares of common stock to investors in exchange for $100,000 in cash.
  2. Borrowed $45,000 by issuing bonds.
  3. Purchased delivery trucks for $60,000 cash.
  4. Received $16,000 from customers for services performed.
  5. Purchased supplies for $4,700 on account.
  6. Paid rent of $5,200.
  7. Performed services on account for $10,000.
  8. Paid salaries of $28,000.
  9. Paid a dividend of $11,000 to stockholders.

Instructions

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to Stockholders’ Equity in the right-hand margin. Use Illustration 3.4 as a model.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
    Accounts       Equip-   Accounts   Bonds   Common   Retained Earnings
Cash + Receivable + Supplies + ment = Payable + Payable + Stock + Revenues Expenses Dividends

Analyze transactions and compute net income.

E3.4 (LO 1), AP A tabular analysis of the transactions made during August 2025 by Wolfe Company during its first month of operations is shown as follows. Each increase and decrease in stockholders’ equity is explained.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity  
                Accounts Payable   Common Stock   Retained Earnings  
Cash + A/R + Supp. + Equip. = + + Rev. Exp. Div.  
1. +$20,000                   +$20,000              
2. −1,000           +$5,000   +$4,000                  
3. −750       +$750                          
4. +4,100   +$5,400                   +$9,500         Serv. Rev.
5. −1,500               −1,500                  
6. −2,000                               −$2,000  
7. −800                           −$ 800     Rent Exp.
8. +450   −450                              
9. −3,000                           −3,000     Salar. Exp.
10.                 +300           −300     Util. Exp.

Instructions

  1. Describe each transaction.
  2. Determine how much stockholders’ equity increased for the month.
  3. Compute the net income for the month.

Prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet.

E3.5 (LO 2), AP The tabular analysis of transactions for Wolfe Company is presented in E3.4.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for August and a classified balance sheet at August 31, 2025.

Identify normal account balance and corresponding financial statement.

E3.6 (LO 2), K The following accounts, in alphabetical order, were selected from recent financial statements of Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, Inc.

Accounts Payable Interest Income
Accounts Receivable Inventories
Common Stock Prepaid Expenses
Depreciation Expense Property and Equipment
Interest Expense Revenues

Instructions

For each account, indicate (a) whether the normal balance is a debit or a credit, and (b) the financial statement—balance sheet or income statement—where the account should be presented.

Identify normal balances and statement classifications.

E3.7 (LO 2), C You are presented with the following alphabetical list of items, selected from the financial statements of Saputo Inc.:

Accounts receivable Income taxes payable
Bank loans payable Income tax expense
Buildings Interest expense
Cash Interest revenue
Depreciation expense Inventories
Dividends Service revenue
Equipment  

Instructions

For each of the above accounts, identify the following.

  1. The type of account (asset, liability, stockholders’ equity).
  2. The normal balance of the account.
  3. The financial statement (income statement, retained earnings statement, or balance sheet) on which Saputo would report the account.

Indicate debit and credit effects and normal balances.

E3.8 (LO 2), C Wood Renew Corp. incurred the following selected transactions during the month of April.

Apr.2   Paid monthly rent, $800.
3   Completed floor refinishing on account for $1,000.
5   Received $1,250 cash for floor sanding and polishing.
6   Purchased additional refinishing equipment for $3,000. The company paid cash of $500, and the balance was due on account in 20 days.
12   Collected amount owed by customer for April 3 transaction.
15   Declared and paid $150 of dividends to stockholders.
16   Purchased sandpaper for $500 on account. (Hint: Use the Supplies account.)
19   Paid $200 to repair equipment.

Instructions

For each transaction, indicate (1) the basic type of account debited or credited (asset, liability, or stockholders’ equity), (2) the specific account debited or credited, and (3) whether the specific account is increased or decreased to record this transaction. Use the following format.

    Account Debited   Account Credited
Transaction   (1) Basic Type   (2) Specific Account   (3) Effect   (1) Basic Type   (2) Specific Account   (3) Effect
Apr. 2   Stockholders’ equity   Rent Expense   Increase   Asset   Cash   Decrease

Analyze transactions and determine their effect on accounts.

E3.9 (LO 2), C This information relates to McCall Real Estate Agency.

Oct.1   Stockholders invest $30,000 in exchange for common stock of the corporation.
2   Hires an administrative assistant at an annual salary of $36,000.
3   Buys office furniture for $3,800, on account.
6   Sells a house and lot for E. C. Roads; commissions due from Roads, $10,800 (not paid by Roads at this time).
10   Receives cash of $140 as commission for acting as rental agent renting an apartment.
27   Pays $700 on account for the office furniture purchased on October 3.
30   Pays the administrative assistant $3,000 in salary for October.

Instructions

Prepare the debit–credit analysis for each transaction, as shown in Illustrations 3.22 to 3.32.

Identify debits, credits, and normal balances and journalize transactions.

E3.10 (LO 2, 3), AP Selected transactions for Front Room, an interior decorator corporation, in its first month of business, are as follows.

  1. Issued stock to investors for $15,000 in cash.
  2. Purchased used car for $10,000 cash for use in business.
  3. Purchased supplies on account for $300.
  4. Billed customers $3,700 for services performed.
  5. Paid $200 cash for advertising at the start of the business.
  6. Received $1,100 cash from customers billed in transaction (4).
  7. Paid creditor $300 cash on account.
  8. Paid dividends of $400 cash to stockholders.

Instructions

  1. For each transaction indicate (a) the basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, stockholders’ equity); (b) the specific account debited and credited (Cash, Rent Expense, Service Revenue, etc.); (c) whether the specific account is increased or decreased; and (d) the normal balance of the specific account. Use the following format, in which transaction (1) is given as an example.
      Account Debited   Account Credited
      (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d)
    Transaction Basic Type Specific Account Effect Normal Balance Basic Type Specific Account Effect Normal Balance
    1 Asset Cash Increase Debit Stock-holders’equity CommonStock Increase Credit
  2. Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

Journalize transactions.

E3.11 (LO 3), AP Transaction data for McCall Real Estate Agency are presented in E3.9.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

Journalize selected transactions.

E3.12 (LO 3), AP Selected transactions for Decorators Mill during its first month of operations are as follows.

Mar.2   Issued common stock for $11,000 cash.
4   Purchased used car for $1,000 cash and $9,000 on account, for use in the business.
10   Billed customers $2,300 for services performed.
13   Paid $225 cash to advertise business opening.
25   Received $1,000 cash from customers billed on March 10.
27   Paid amount owed for used car purchased on March 4.
30   Received $700 cash from a customer for services to be performed in April.
31   Declared and paid $300 of dividends to stockholders.

Instructions

Journalize each transaction. Do not provide explanation.

Analyze effects of transactions.

E3.13 (LO 3), AP Wong Computer had the following transactions during the month of May.

  1. Purchased equipment on account for $8,000.
  2. Paid $1,600 for rent for the month of May.
  3. Performed computer services for $3,800 on account.
  4. Paid Buffalo Hydro $300 cash for utilities used in May.
  5. Borrowed $20,000 from the bank.
  6. Paid supplier for equipment purchased in transaction (1).
  7. Purchased a one-year insurance policy for $500 cash.
  8. Received $3,000 cash in partial payment of the account owed in transaction (3).
  9. Declared and paid $500 of dividends to stockholders.
  10. Paid incomes taxes of $250 for the month.

Instructions

Journalize the above transactions. Do not provide explanations.

Journalize a series of transactions.

E3.14 (LO 3), AP The May transactions of Chulak Corporation were as follows.

May4 Paid $700 due for supplies previously purchased on account.
7 Performed advisory services on account for $6,800.
8 Purchased supplies for $850 on account.
9 Purchased equipment for $1,000 in cash.
17 Paid employees $530 in cash.
22 Received bill for equipment repairs of $900.
29 Paid $1,200 for 12 months of insurance policy. Coverage begins June 1.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

Journalize a series of transactions.

E3.15 (LO 3), AP Selected transactions for Sophie’s Dog Care are as follows during the month of March.

March1   Paid monthly rent of $1,200.
3   Performed services for $140 on account.
5   Performed services for cash of $75.
8   Purchased equipment for $600. The company paid cash of $80 and the balance was on account.
12   Received cash from customers billed on March 3.
14   Paid wages to employees of $525.
22   Paid utilities of $72.
24   Borrowed $1,500 from Grafton State Bank by signing a note.
27   Paid $220 to repair service for plumbing repairs.
28   Paid balance amount owed from equipment purchase on March 8.
30   Paid $1,800 for six months of insurance.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

Record journal entries.

E3.16 (LO 3), AP On April 1, Adventures Travel Agency, Inc. began operations. The following transactions were completed during the month.

  1. Issued common stock for $24,000 cash.
  2. Obtained a bank loan for $7,000 by issuing a note payable.
  3. Paid $11,000 cash to buy equipment.
  4. Paid $1,200 cash for April office rent.
  5. Paid $1,450 for supplies.
  6. Purchased $600 of advertising in the Daily Herald, on account.
  7. Performed services for $18,000: cash of $2,000 was received from customers, and the balance of $16,000 was billed to customers on account.
  8. Paid $400 cash dividend to stockholders.
  9. Paid the utility bill for the month, $2,000.
  10. Paid Daily Herald the amount due in transaction (6).
  11. Paid $40 of interest on the bank loan obtained in transaction (2).
  12. Paid employees’ salaries, $6,400.
  13. Received $12,000 cash from customers billed in transaction (7).
  14. Paid income tax, $1,500.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

Identify key terms.

E3.17 (LO 1, 2, 3, 4, 5), K The following is a list of terms or phrases discussed in the chapter.

  1. Credit
  2. Journal
  3. Ledger
  4. Chart of accounts
  5. Posting
  6. Account
  7. Trial balance
  8. Accounting transactions
  9. Debit

Instructions

Match each term or phrase to its description below.

  1. ______ A list of accounts and their balances at a given time.
  2. ______ An accounting record in which transactions are initially recorded in chronological order.
  3. ______ A record of all accounts maintained by a company and their amounts.
  4. ______ An individual accounting record of increases and decreases in specific asset, liability, stockholders’ equity, revenue, or expense items.
  5. ______ A list of the names of a company’s accounts.
  6. ______ The right side of an account.
  7. ______ The procedure of transferring journal entry amounts to the ledger accounts.
  8. ______ The left side of an account.
  9. ______ Events that require recording in the financial statements because they affect assets, liabilities, or stockholders’ equity.

Post journal entries and prepare a trial balance.

E3.18 (LO 4, 5), AP Transaction data and journal entries for McCall Real Estate Agency are presented in E3.9 and E3.11.

Instructions

  1. Post the transactions to T-accounts.
  2. Prepare a trial balance at October 31, 2025.

Analyze transactions, prepare journal entries, and post transactions to T-accounts.

E3.19 (LO 1, 3, 4), AP Selected transactions for Therow Corporation during its first month in business are presented below.

Sept.1   Issued common stock in exchange for $20,000 cash received from investors.
5   Purchased equipment for $9,000, paying $3,000 in cash and the balance on account.
8   Performed services on account for $18,000.
14   Paid salaries of $1,200.
25   Paid $4,000 cash on balance owed for equipment.
30   Paid $500 cash dividend.

Therow’s chart of accounts shows Cash, Accounts Receivable, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, and Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

  1. Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions. The column headings should be Cash + Accounts Receivable + Equipment = Accounts Payable + Common Stock + Revenues − Expenses − Dividends. For transactions affecting stockholders’ equity, provide explanations in the right margin, as shown on Illustration 3.4.
  2. Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.
  3. Post the transactions to T-accounts.

Journalize transactions from T-accounts and prepare a trial balance.

E3.20 (LO 3, 5), AN The T-accounts below summarize the ledger of Salvador’s Gardening Company, Inc. at the end of the first month of operations.

Cash   Unearned Service Revenue
Apr. 1 15,000 Apr. 15 800       Apr. 30 900
12 700 25 3,500          
29 800              
30 900              
Accounts Receivable   Common Stock
Apr. 7 3,400 Apr. 29 800       Apr. 1 15,000
Supplies   Service Revenue
Apr. 4 5,200           Apr. 7 3,400
              12 700
Accounts Payable   Salaries and Wages Expense
Apr. 25 3,500 Apr. 4 5,200   Apr. 15 800    

Instructions

  1. Prepare the journal entries (including explanations) that resulted in the amounts posted to the accounts. Present them in the order they occurred.
  2. Prepare a trial balance at April 30, 2025. (Hint: Compute ending balances of T-accounts first.)

Post journal entries and prepare a trial balance.

E3.21 (LO 4, 5), AP Selected transactions from the journal of Baylee Inc. during its first month of operations are presented here.

Date Account Titles Debit Credit
Aug.1 Cash 8,000  
  Common Stock   8,000
10 Cash 1,700  
  Service Revenue   1,700
12 Equipment 6,200  
  Cash   1,200
  Notes Payable   5,000
25 Accounts Receivable 3,400  
  Service Revenue   3,400
31 Cash 600  
  Accounts Receivable   600

Instructions

  1. Post the transactions to T-accounts.
  2. Prepare a trial balance at August 31, 2025.

Journalize transactions from T-accounts and prepare a trial balance.

E3.22 (LO 3, 5), AN Here is the ledger for Kriscoe Co.

Cash   Common Stock
Oct. 1 7,000 Oct. 4 400       Oct. 1 7,000
10 980 12 1,500       25 2,000
10 8,000 15 250          
20 700 30 300          
25 2,000 31 500          
Accounts Receivable   Dividends
Oct. 6 800 Oct. 20 700   Oct. 30 300    
20 920              
Supplies   Service Revenue
Oct. 4 400 Oct. 31 180       Oct. 6 800
              10 980
              20 920
Equipment   Salaries and Wages Expense
Oct. 3 3,000       Oct. 31 500    
Notes Payable   Supplies Expense
    Oct. 10 8,000   Oct. 31 180    
Accounts Payable   Rent Expense
Oct. 12 1,500 Oct. 3 3,000   Oct. 15 250    

Instructions

  1. Reproduce the journal entries for only the transactions that occurred on October 1, 10, and 20, and provide explanations for each.
  2. Prepare a trial balance at October 31, 2025. (Hint: Compute ending balances of T-accounts first.)

Journalize transactions, post transactions to T-accounts, and prepare trial balance.

E3.23 (LO 3, 4, 5), AP Beyers Corporation provides security services. Selected transactions for Beyers are presented below.

Oct.1   Issued common stock in exchange for $66,000 cash from investors.
2   Hired part-time security consultant. Salary will be $2,000 per month. First day of work will be October 15.
4   Paid 1 month of rent for building for $2,000.
7   Purchased equipment for $18,000, paying $4,000 cash and the balance on account.
8   Paid $500 for advertising.
10   Received bill for equipment repair cost of $390.
12   Provided security services for event for $3,200 on account.
16   Purchased supplies for $410 on account.
21   Paid balance due from October 7 purchase of equipment.
24   Received and paid utility bill for $148.
27   Received payment from customer for October 12 services performed.
31   Paid employee salaries and wages of $5,100.

Instructions

  1. Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.
  2. Post the transactions to T-accounts.
  3. Prepare a trial balance at October 31, 2025. (Hint: Compute ending balances of T-accounts first.)

Analyze errors and their effects on trial balance.

E3.24 (LO 5), AN The bookkeeper for Birmingham Corporation made these errors in journalizing and posting.

  1. A credit posting of $400 to Accounts Receivable was omitted.
  2. A debit posting of $750 for Prepaid Insurance was debited to Insurance Expense.
  3. A collection on account of $100 was journalized and posted as a debit to Cash $100 and a credit to Accounts Payable $100.
  4. A credit posting of $300 to Income Taxes Payable was made twice.
  5. A cash purchase of supplies for $250 was journalized and posted as a debit to Supplies $25 and a credit to Cash $25.
  6. A debit of $395 to Advertising Expense was posted as $359.

Instructions

For each error, indicate (a) whether the trial balance will balance; if the trial balance will not balance, indicate (b) the amount of the difference and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error 1 is given as an example.

  (a) (b) (c)
Error In Balance Difference Larger Column
1 No $400 Debit

Prepare a trial balance and financial statements.

E3.25 (LO 5), AP The accounts in the ledger of Rapid Delivery Service contain the following balances on July 31, 2025.

Accounts Receivable $13,400 Prepaid Insurance $ 2,200
Accounts Payable 8,400 Service Revenue 15,500
Cash ? Dividends 700
Equipment 59,360 Common Stock 40,000
Maintenance and Repairs Expense 1,958 Salaries and Wages Expense 7,428
Salaries and Wages Payable 820
Insurance Expense 900 Retained Earnings (July 1, 2025) 5,200
Notes Payable (due 2028) 28,450    

Instructions

  1. Prepare a trial balance with the accounts arranged as illustrated in the chapter, and fill in the missing amount for Cash.
  2. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet for the month of July 2025.

Classify transactions as cash-flow activities.

E3.26 (LO 5), AP Review the transactions listed in E3.1 for Thyme Advertising Company. Classify each transaction as either an operating activity, investing activity, or financing activity, or if no cash is exchanged, as a noncash event.

Classify transactions as cash-flow activities.

E3.27 (LO 5), AP Review the transactions listed in E3.3 for Persimmon Corp. Classify each transaction as either an operating activity, investing activity, or financing activity, or if no cash is exchanged, as a noncash event.

Problems

Analyze transactions and compute net income.

An icon shows an encircled rightward pointing arrow with a text beside reads, Excel.

P3.1 (LO 1), AP On April 1, Wonder Travel Agency Inc. was established. These transactions were completed during the month.

  1. Stockholders invested $30,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.
  2. Paid $900 cash for April office rent.
  3. Purchased office equipment for $3,400 cash.
  4. Purchased $200 of advertising in the Chicago Tribune, on account.
  5. Paid $500 cash for office supplies.
  6. Performed services worth $12,000. Cash of $3,000 is received from customers, and the balance of $9,000 is billed to customers on account.
  7. Paid $400 cash dividend.
  8. Paid Chicago Tribune amount due in transaction (4).
  9. Paid employees’ salaries $1,800.
  10. Received $9,000 in cash from customers billed previously in transaction (6).

Instructions

  1. Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using these column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends). Include margin explanations for revenues and expenses.
    Cash $34,800
    Total assets $38,700
  2. From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.

Analyze transactions and prepare financial statements.

P3.2 (LO 1, 2), AP Nona Curry started her own consulting firm, Curry Consulting Inc., on May 1, 2025. The following transactions occurred during the month of May.

May 1   Stockholders invested $15,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.
2   Paid $600 for office rent for the month.
3   Purchased $500 of supplies on account.
5   Paid $150 to advertise in the County News.
9   Received $1,400 cash for services performed.
12   Paid $200 cash dividend.
15   Performed $4,200 of services on account.
17   Paid $2,500 for employee salaries.
20   Paid for the supplies purchased on account on May 3.
23   Received a cash payment of $1,200 for services performed on account on May 15.
26   Borrowed $5,000 from the bank on a note payable.
29   Purchased office equipment for $2,000 paying $200 in cash and the balance on account.
30   Paid $180 for utilities.

Instructions

  1. Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format. Assume the note payable is to be repaid within the year.
      Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’Equity
          Accounts           Notes   Accounts   Common   Retained Earnings
    Date Cash + Receivable + Supplies + Equipment = Payable + Payable + Stock + Revenues Expenses Dividends

    Include margin explanations for revenues and expenses.

    Cash $18,270
    Total assets $23,770
  2. Prepare an income statement for the month of May 2025.
    Net income $2,170
  3. Prepare a classified balance sheet at May 31, 2025.

Analyze transactions and prepare an income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet.

An icon shows an encircled rightward pointing arrow with a text beside reads, Excel.

P3.3 (LO 1, 2), AP Bindy Crawford created a corporation providing legal services, Bindy Crawford Inc., on July 1, 2025. On July 31 the balance sheet showed Cash $4,000, Accounts Receivable $2,500, Supplies $500, Equipment $5,000, Accounts Payable $4,200, Common Stock $6,200, and Retained Earnings $1,600. During August, the following transactions occurred.

Aug. 1   Collected $1,100 of accounts receivable due from customers.
4   Paid $2,700 cash for accounts payable due.
9   Performed services worth $5,400, of which $3,600 is collected in cash and the balance is due in September.
15   Purchased additional office equipment for $4,000, paying $700 in cash and the balance on account.
19   Paid salaries $1,400, rent for August $700, and advertising expenses $350.
23   Paid a cash dividend of $700.
26   Borrowed $5,000 from American Federal Bank; the money was borrowed on a 4-month note payable.
31   Incurred utility expenses for the month on account $380.

Instructions

  1. Prepare a tabular analysis of the August transactions beginning with July 31 balances. The column heading should be Cash + Accounts Receivable + Supplies + Equipment = Notes Payable + Accounts Payable + Common Stock + Retained Earnings + Revenues − Expenses − Dividends. Include margin explanations for revenues and expenses.
    Cash $7,150
  2. Prepare an income statement for August, a retained earnings statement for August, and a classified balance sheet at August 31.
    Net income $2,570
    Ret. earnings $3,470

Journalize a series of transactions.

P3.4 (LO 3), AP Bradley’s Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Bob Dean. These selected events and transactions occurred during March.

Mar.1   Stockholders invested $50,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock of the corporation.
3   Purchased Snead’s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land $23,000, building $9,000, and equipment $6,000. (Record this in a single entry.)
5   Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising expenses of $1,200 cash.
6   Paid cash $2,400 for a 1-year insurance policy.
10   Purchased golf clubs and other equipment for $5,500 from Tahoe Company, payable in 30 days.
18   Received golf fees of $1,600 in cash from customers for golf services performed.
19   Sold 100 coupon books for $25 each in cash. Each book contains 10 coupons that enable the holder to play one round of miniature golf or to hit one bucket of golf balls. (Hint: The revenue should not be recognized until the customers use the coupons.)
25   Paid a $500 cash dividend.
30   Paid salaries of $800.
30   Paid Tahoe Company in full for equipment purchased on March 10.
31   Received $900 in cash from customers for golf services performed.

The company uses these accounts: Cash, Prepaid Insurance, Land, Buildings, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Retained Earnings, Dividends, Service Revenue, Advertising Expense, and Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

Journalize the March transactions, including explanations. Bradley’s records golf fees as service revenue.

Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance.

P3.5 (LO 3, 4, 5), AP Ayala Architects incorporated as licensed architects on April 1, 2025. During the first month of the operation of the business, these events and transactions occurred:

Apr.1   Stockholders invested $18,000 cash in exchange for common stock of the corporation.
1   Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $375 per week, payable monthly.
2   Paid office rent for the month $900.
3   Purchased architectural supplies on account from Burmingham Company $1,300.
10   Completed blueprints on a carport and billed client $1,900 for services.
11   Received $700 cash advance from M. Jason to design a new home.
20   Received $2,800 cash for services completed and delivered to S. Melvin.
30   Paid secretary-receptionist for the month $1,500.
30   Paid $300 to Burmingham Company for accounts payable due.

The company uses these accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Rent Expense.

Instructions

  1. Journalize the transactions, including explanations.
  2. Post to the ledger T-accounts.
  3. Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2025.
    Cash $18,800 Tot. trial balance $24,400

Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance.

P3.6 (LO 3, 4, 5), AP This is the trial balance of Lacey Company on September 30.

Lacey Company
Trial Balance
September 30, 2025
    Debit   Credit
Cash   $19,200    
Accounts Receivable   2,600    
Supplies   2,100    
Equipment   8,000    
Accounts Payable       $ 4,800
Unearned Service Revenue       1,100
Common Stock       15,000
Retained Earnings       11,000
    $31,900   $31,900

The October transactions were as follows.

Oct.5   Received $1,300 in cash from customers for accounts receivable due.
10   Billed customers for services performed $5,100.
15   Paid employee salaries $1,200.
17   Performed $600 of services in exchange for cash.
20   Paid $1,900 to creditors for accounts payable due.
29   Paid a $300 cash dividend.
31   Paid utilities $400.

Instructions

  1. Prepare a general ledger using T-accounts. Enter the opening balances in the ledger accounts as of October 1. (Hint: The October 1 beginning amounts are the September 30 balances in the trial balance above.) Provision should be made for these additional accounts: Dividends, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Utilities Expense.
  2. Journalize the transactions, including explanations.
  3. Post to the ledger accounts.
  4. Prepare a trial balance on October 31, 2025.
    Cash $17,300
    Tot. trial balance $35,700

Prepare a correct trial balance.

An icon shows an encircled rightward pointing arrow with a text beside reads, Excel.

P3.7 (LO 5), AN This trial balance of Washburn Co. does not balance.

Washburn Co.
Trial Balance
June 30, 2025
    Debit   Credit
Cash       $ 3,090
Accounts Receivable   $ 3,190    
Supplies   800    
Equipment   3,000    
Accounts Payable       3,686
Unearned Service Revenue   1,200    
Common Stock       9,000
Dividends   800    
Service Revenue       3,480
Salaries and Wages Expense   3,600    
Utilities Expense   910    
    $13,500   $19,256

Each of the listed accounts has a normal balance per the general ledger. An examination of the ledger and journal reveals the following errors:

  1. Cash received from a customer on account was debited for $780, and Accounts Receivable was credited for the same amount. The actual collection was for $870.
  2. The purchase of a printer on account for $340 was recorded as a debit to Supplies for $340 and a credit to Accounts Payable for $340.
  3. Services were performed on account for a client for $900. Accounts Receivable was debited for $90 and Service Revenue was credited for $900.
  4. A debit posting to Salaries and Wages Expense of $700 was omitted.
  5. A payment on account for $206 was credited to Cash for $206 and credited to Accounts Payable for $260.
  6. Payment of a $600 cash dividend to Washburn’s stockholders was debited to Salaries and Wages Expense for $600 and credited to Cash for $600.
  7. The amounts for two accounts with normal balances were listed in the wrong column.

Instructions

Prepare the correct trial balance. (Hint: All accounts should have normal balances. Your first step, therefore, should be to move all amounts to the column of their normal balance.)

Tot. trial balance $16,900

Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance.

P3.8 (LO 3, 4, 5), AP The Triquel Theater Inc. was recently formed. It began operations in March 2025. The Triquel is unique in that it will show only triple features of sequential theme movies. On March 1, the ledger of The Triquel showed Cash $16,000, Land $38,000, Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $22,000, Equipment $16,000, Accounts Payable $12,000, and Common Stock $80,000. During the month of March, the following events and transactions occurred.

Mar.2   Rented the first three Star Wars movies (Star Wars®, The Empire Strikes Back, and The Return of the Jedi) to be shown for the first three weeks of March. The film rental was $10,000; $2,000 was paid in cash and $8,000 will be paid on March 10.
3   Ordered the first three Star Trek movies to be shown the last 10 days of March. It will cost $500 per night.
9   Received $9,900 cash from admissions.
10   Paid balance due on Star Wars movies’ rental and $2,900 on March 1 accounts payable.
11   The Triquel Theater contracted with R. Lazlo to operate the concession stand. Lazlo agrees to pay The Triquel 15% of gross receipts, payable monthly, for the rental of the concession stand.
12   Paid advertising expenses $500.
20   Received $8,300 cash from customers for admissions.
20   Received the Star Trek movies and paid rental fee of $5,000.
31   Paid salaries of $3,800.
31   Received statement from R. Lazlo showing gross receipts from concessions of $10,000 and the balance due to The Triquel of $1,500 ($10,000 × .15) for March. Lazlo paid half the balance due for rental of the concession stand and will remit the remainder on April 5.
31   Received $20,000 cash from customers for admissions.

In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts includes Accounts Receivable, Service Revenue, Rent Revenue, Advertising Expense, Rent Expense, and Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

  1. Using T-accounts, enter the beginning balances to the ledger.
  2. Journalize the March transactions, including explanations. The Triquel records admission revenue as service revenue, concession revenue as rent revenue, and film rental expense as rent expense.
  3. Post the March journal entries to the ledger.
  4. Prepare a trial balance on March 31, 2025.
    Cash $32,750
    Tot. trial balance $128,800

Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance.

P3.9 (LO 3, 4, 5), AP On July 31, 2025, the general ledger of Hills Legal Services Inc. showed the following balances: Cash $4,000, Accounts Receivable $1,500, Supplies $500, Equipment $5,000, Accounts Payable $4,100, Common Stock $3,500, and Retained Earnings $3,400. During August, the following transactions occurred.

Aug.3   Collected $1,200 of accounts receivable due from customers.
5   Received $1,300 cash for issuing common stock to new investors.
6   Paid $2,700 cash on accounts payable.
7   Performed legal services of $6,500, of which $3,000 was collected in cash and the remainder was due on account.
12   Purchased additional equipment for $1,200, paying $400 in cash and the balance on account.
14   Paid salaries $3,500, rent $900, and advertising expenses $275 for the month of August.
18   Collected the balance for the services performed on August 7.
20   Paid cash dividend of $500 to stockholders.
24   Billed a client $1,000 for legal services performed.
26   Received $2,000 from Laurentian Bank; the money was borrowed on a bank note payable that is due in 6 months.
27   Agreed to perform legal services for a client in September for $4,500. The client will pay the amount due after the services have been performed.
28   Received the utility bill for the month of August in the amount of $275; it is not due until September 15.
31   Paid income tax for the month $500.

Instructions

  1. Using T-accounts, enter the beginning balances to the ledger.
  2. Journalize the August transactions.
  3. Post the August journal entries to the ledger.
  4. Prepare a trial balance on August 31, 2025.
    Cash $6,225
    Tot. trial balance $20,175

Journalize transactions, post, and prepare trial balance.

P3.10 (LO 3, 4, 5), AP Pamper Me Salon Inc.’s general ledger at April 30, 2025, included the following: Cash $5,000, Supplies $500, Equipment $24,000, Accounts Payable $2,100, Notes Payable $10,000, Unearned Service Revenue (from gift certificates) $1,000, Common Stock $5,000, and Retained Earnings $11,400. The following events and transactions occurred during May.

May1   Paid rent for the month of May $1,000.
4   Paid $1,100 of the account payable at April 30.
7   Issued gift certificates for future services for $1,500 cash.
8   Received $1,200 cash from customers for services performed.
14   Paid $1,200 in salaries to employees.
15   Received $800 in cash from customers for services performed.
15   Customers receiving services worth $700 used gift certificates in payment.
21   Paid the remaining accounts payable from April 30.
22   Received $1,000 in cash from customers for services performed.
22   Purchased supplies of $700 on account. All of these were used during the month.
25   Received a bill for advertising for $500. This bill is due on June 13.
25   Received and paid a utilities bill for $400.
29   Received $1,700 in cash from customers for services performed.
29   Customers receiving services worth $600 used gift certificates in payment.
31   Interest of $50 was paid on the note payable.
31   Paid $1,200 in salaries to employees.
31   Paid income tax payment for the month $150.

Instructions

  1. Using T-accounts, enter the beginning balances in the general ledger as of April 30, 2025.
  2. Journalize the May transactions.
  3. Post the May journal entries to the general ledger.
  4. Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2025.
    Cash $5,100
    Tot. trial balance $34,800

Analyze errors and their effects on the trial balance.

P3.11 (LO 5), AN The bookkeeper for Roger’s Dance Studio made the following errors in journalizing and posting.

  1. A credit to Supplies of $600 was omitted.
  2. A debit posting of $300 to Accounts Payable was inadvertently debited to Accounts Receivable.
  3. A purchase of supplies on account of $450 was debited to Supplies for $540 and credited to Accounts Payable for $540.
  4. A credit posting of $680 to Interest Payable was posted twice.
  5. A debit posting to Income Taxes Payable for $250 and a credit posting to Cash for $250 were made twice.
  6. A debit posting for $1,200 of Dividends was inadvertently posted to Salaries and Wages Expense instead.
  7. A credit to Service Revenue for $450 was inadvertently posted as a debit to Service Revenue.
  8. A credit to Accounts Receivable of $250 was credited to Accounts Payable.

Instructions

For each error, indicate (a) whether the trial balance will balance, (b) the amount of the difference if the trial balance will not balance, and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error 1 is given as an example.

        (a)   (b)   (c)
    Error   In Balance   Difference   Larger Column
    1   No   $600   Debit

3. a. Yes; b. None; c. N/A

Continuing Case

Cookie Creations

(Note: This is a continuation of the Cookie Creations from Chapters 1 and 2.)

CCC3 In November 2023, after having incorporated Cookie Creations Inc., Natalie begins operations. She has decided not to pursue the offer to supply cookies to Biscuits. Instead, she will focus on offering cooking classes. The following events occur.

Nov.8 Natalie cashes in her U.S. Savings Bonds and receives $520, which she deposits in her personal bank account.
8 Natalie opens a bank account for Cookie Creations Inc.
8 Natalie purchases $500 of Cookie Creations’ common stock.
11 Cookie Creations purchases paper and other office supplies for $95. (Use Supplies.)
14 Cookie Creations pays $125 to purchase baking supplies, such as flour, sugar, butter, and chocolate chips. (Use Supplies.)
15 Natalie starts to gather some baking equipment to take with her when teaching the cookie classes. She has an excellent top-of-the-line food processor and mixer that originally cost her $550. Natalie decides to start using it only in her new business. She estimates that the equipment is currently worth $300, and she transfers the equipment into the business in exchange for additional common stock.
16 The company needs more cash to sustain its operations. Natalie’s grandmother lends the company $2,000 cash, in exchange for a two-year, 9% note payable. Interest and the principal are repayable at maturity.
17 Cookie Creations pays $900 for additional baking equipment.
18 Natalie schedules her first class for November 29. She will receive $100 on the date of the class.
25 Natalie books a second class for December 5 for $150. She receives a $60 cash down payment, in advance.
29 Natalie teaches her first class, booked on November 18, and collects the $100 cash.
30 Natalie’s brother develops a website for Cookie Creations Inc. that the company will use for advertising. He charges the company $600 for his work, payable at the end of December. (Because the website is expected to have a useful life of two years before upgrades are needed, it should be treated as an asset called Website.)
30 Cookie Creations pays $1,200 for a one-year insurance policy.
30 Natalie teaches a group of elementary school students how to make Santa Claus cookies. At the end of the class, Natalie leaves an invoice for $300 with the school principal. The principal says that he will pass it along to the business office and it will be paid some time in December.
30 Natalie receives a $50 invoice for use of her cell phone. She uses the cell phone exclusively for Cookie Creations Inc. business. The invoice is for services provided in November, and payment is due on December 15.

Instructions

  1. Prepare journal entries to record the November transactions.
  2. Post the journal entries to the general ledger accounts.
  3. Prepare a trial balance at November 30, 2023.

Expand Your Critical Thinking

Financial Reporting Problem: Apple Inc.

CT3.1 The financial statements of Apple Inc. in Appendix A contain the following selected accounts, all in thousands of dollars.

Common Stock $ 50,779
Accounts Payable 42,296
Accounts Receivable 16,120
Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses 19,916
Inventories 4,061
Net Property, Plant, and Equipment 36,766
Net Sales 274,515

Instructions

  1. What is the increase and decrease side for each account? What is the normal balance for each account?
  2. Identify the probable other account in the transaction and the effect on that account when:
    1. Accounts Receivable is decreased.
    2. Accounts Payable is decreased.
    3. Inventories is increased.
  3. Identify the other account(s) that ordinarily would be involved when:
    1. Interest Expense is increased.
    2. Property, Plant, and Equipment is increased.

Comparative Analysis Problem: Columbia Sportswear Company vs. Under Armour, Inc.

CT3.2 The financial statements of Columbia Sportswear Company are presented in Appendix B. Financial statements of Under Armour, Inc. are presented in Appendix C.

Instructions

  1. Based on the information contained in these financial statements, determine the normal balance for:
    Columbia Sportswear   Under Armour
    (1) Accounts Receivable   (1) Inventories
    (2) Net Property, Plant, and Equipment   (2) Income Taxes
    (3) Accounts Payable   (3) Accrued Liabilities
    (4) Retained Earnings   (4) Common Stock
    (5) Net Sales   (5) Interest Expense
  2. Identify the other account ordinarily involved when:
    1. Accounts Receivable is increased.
    2. Notes Payable is decreased.
    3. Equipment is increased.
    4. Interest Revenue is increased.

Comparative Analysis Problem: Amazon.com, Inc. vs. Walmart Inc.

CT3.3 Amazon.com, Inc.’s financial statements are presented in Appendix D. Financial statements of Walmart Inc. are presented in Appendix E.

Instructions

  1. Based on the information contained in the financial statements, determine the normal balance of the listed accounts for each company.
    Amazon   Walmart
    1. Interest Expense
    2. Cash and Cash Equivalents
    3. Accounts Payable
     
    1. Product Revenues
    2. Inventories
    3. Cost of Sales
  2. Identify the other account ordinarily involved when:
    1. Accounts Receivable is increased.
    2. Interest Expense is increased.
    3. Salaries and Wages Payable is decreased.
    4. Service Revenue is increased.

Interpreting Financial Statements

CT3.4 Chieftain International, Inc., is an oil and natural gas exploration and production company. A recent balance sheet reported $208 million in assets with only $4.6 million in liabilities, all of which were short-term accounts payable.

During the year, Chieftain expanded its holdings of oil and gas rights, drilled 37 new wells, and invested in expensive 3-D seismic technology. The company generated $19 million cash from operating activities and paid no dividends. It had a cash balance of $102 million at the end of the year.

Instructions

  1. Name at least two advantages to Chieftain from having no long-term debt. Can you think of disadvantages?
  2. What are some of the advantages to Chieftain from having this large a cash balance? What is a disadvantage?
  3. Why do you suppose Chieftain has the $4.6 million balance in accounts payable, since it appears that it could have made all its purchases for cash?

Real-World Focus

CT3.5 This activity provides information about career opportunities for CPAs.

Instructions

Search the Internet for “start here go places” to access free accounting resources for future CPAs and then answer the following questions.

  1. Where do CPAs work?
  2. What skills does a CPA need?
  3. What is the salary range for a CPA at a large firm during the first three years? What is the salary range for chief financial officers and treasurers at large corporations?

CT3.6 The New York Times published an article by Richard Sandomir that discusses the fact that the Green Bay Packers are the only NFL team that publicly publishes its annual report.

Instructions

Search online for “NFL Finances, as Seen Through Packers’ Records,” read the article, and then answer the following questions.

  1. Why are the Green Bay Packers the only professional football team to publish and distribute an annual report?
  2. Why is the football players’ labor union particularly interested in the Packers’ annual report?
  3. In addition to the players’ labor union, what other outside party might be interested in the annual report?
  4. Even though the Packers’ revenue increased in recent years, the company’s operating profit fell significantly. How does the article explain this decline?

Decision-Making Across the Organization

CT3.7 Saira Morrow operates Dressage Riding Academy, Inc. The academy’s primary sources of revenue are riding fees and lesson fees, which are provided on a cash basis. Saira also boards horses for owners, who are billed monthly for boarding fees. In a few cases, boarders pay in advance of expected use. For its revenue transactions, the academy maintains these accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Unearned Service Revenue, and Service Revenue.

The academy owns 10 horses, a stable, a riding ring, riding equipment, and office equipment. These assets are accounted for in the following accounts: Horses, Buildings, and Equipment.

The academy employs stable helpers and an office employee, who receive weekly salaries. At the end of each month, the mail usually brings bills for advertising, utilities, and veterinary service. Other expenses include feed for the horses and insurance. For its expenses, the academy maintains the following accounts: Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, Salaries and Wages Expense, Advertising Expense, Utilities Expense, Maintenance and Repairs Expense, Supplies Expense, and Insurance Expense.

Saira’s sole source of personal income is dividends from the academy. Thus, the corporation declares and pays periodic dividends. To account for stockholders’ equity in the business and dividends, two accounts are maintained: Common Stock and Dividends.

During the first month of operations, an inexperienced bookkeeper was employed. Saira asks you to review the following eight entries of the 50 entries made during the month. In each case, the explanation for the entry is correct.

May1 Cash 15,000  
  Unearned Service Revenue   15,000
  (Issued common stock in exchange for $15,000 cash)    
5 Cash 250  
  Service Revenue   250
  (Received $250 cash for lesson fees)    
7 Cash 500  
  Service Revenue   500
  (Received $500 for boarding of horses beginning June 1)    
9 Supplies Expense 1,500  
  Cash   1,500
  (Purchased estimated 5 months’ supply of feed and hay for $1,500 on account)    
14 Equipment 80  
  Cash   800
  (Purchased desk and other office equipment for $800 cash)    
15 Salaries and Wages Expense 400  
  Cash   400
  (Issued check to Saira Morrow for personal use)    
20 Cash 145  
  Service Revenue   154
  (Received $154 cash for riding fees)    
31 Maintenance and Repairs Expense 75  
  Accounts Receivable   75
  (Received bill of $75 from carpenter for repair services performed)    

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

  1. For each journal entry that is correct, so state. For each journal entry that is incorrect, prepare the entry that should have been made by the bookkeeper.
  2. Which of the incorrect entries would prevent the trial balance from balancing?
  3. What was the correct net income for May, assuming the bookkeeper originally reported net income of $4,500 after posting all 50 entries?
  4. What was the correct cash balance at May 31, assuming the bookkeeper reported a balance of $12,475 after posting all 50 entries?

Communication Activities

CT3.8 Klean Sweep Company offers home cleaning service. Two recurring transactions for the company are billing customers for services performed and paying employee salaries. For example, on March 15 bills totaling $6,000 were sent to customers, and $2,000 was paid in salaries to employees.

Instructions

Write a memorandum to your instructor that explains and illustrates the steps in the recording process for each of the March 15 transactions. Use the format illustrated in the text under the heading “The Recording Process Illustrated.”

Ethics Cases

CT3.9 Vanessa Jones is the assistant chief accountant at IBT Company, a manufacturer of computer chips and cell phones. The company presently has total sales of $20 million. It is the end of the first quarter and Vanessa is hurriedly trying to prepare a trial balance so that quarterly financial statements can be prepared and released to management and the regulatory agencies. The total credits on the trial balance exceed the debits by $1,000.

In order to meet the 4 p.m. deadline, Vanessa decides to force the debits and credits into balance by adding the amount of the difference to the Equipment account. She chose Equipment because it is one of the larger account balances; percentage-wise, it will be the least misstated. Vanessa plugs the difference! She believes that the difference is quite small and will not affect anyone’s decisions. She wishes that she had another few days to find the error but realizes that the financial statements are already late.

Instructions

  1. Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
  2. What ethical issues are involved?
  3. What are Vanessa’s alternatives?

CT3.10 The August 5, 2020, issue of the Wall Street Journal includes an article by Tomio Geron entitled “Former Trustify CEO’s Indictment Highlights Due Diligence Dilemma.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

  1. What is the crime the chief executive is accused of, and what were some of the fraudulent activities and statements intended to deceive investors?
  2. Many early state companies do not have audited financial statement or a chief financial officer. What risks does this present to investors?
  3. Despite the apparent lack of audited financial statements or other hard data, approximately 90 investors provided funds to the company. What explanation does the company give to explain why investors might be willing to provide funds despite the lack of hard data?

All About You

CT3.11 In their annual reports to stockholders, companies must report or disclose information about all liabilities, including potential liabilities related to environmental clean-up. There are many situations in which you will be asked to provide personal financial information about your assets, liabilities, revenues, and expenses. Sometimes you will face difficult decisions regarding what to disclose and how to disclose it.

Instructions

Suppose that you are putting together a loan application to purchase a home. Based on your income and assets, you qualify for the mortgage loan, but just barely. How would you address each of the following situations in reporting your financial position for the loan application? Provide responses for each of the following questions.

  1. You signed a guarantee for a bank loan that a friend took out for $20,000. If your friend doesn’t pay, you will have to pay. Your friend has made all of the payments so far, and it appears he will be able to pay in the future.
  2. You were involved in an auto accident in which you were at fault. There is the possibility that you may have to pay as much as $50,000 as part of a settlement. The issue will not be resolved before the bank processes your mortgage request.
  3. The company at which you work isn’t doing very well, and it has recently laid off employees. You are still employed, but it is quite possible that you will lose your job in the next few months.

A Look at IFRS

International companies use the same set of procedures and records to keep track of transaction data. Thus, the material in this chapter dealing with the account, general rules of debit and credit, and steps in the recording process—the journal, ledger, and chart of accounts—is the same under both GAAP and IFRS. The following are the key similarities and differences between GAAP and IFRS as related to the recording process.

Similarities

  • Transaction analysis is the same under IFRS and GAAP.
  • Both the IASB and the FASB go beyond the basic definitions provided in the text for the key elements of financial statements, that is assets, liabilities, equity, revenues, and expenses. The implications of the expanded definitions are discussed in more advanced accounting courses.
  • As shown in the text, dollar signs are typically used only in the trial balance and the financial statements. The same practice is followed under IFRS, using the currency of the country where the reporting company is headquartered.
  • A trial balance under IFRS follows the same format as shown in the text.

Differences

  • IFRS relies less on historical cost and more on fair value than do FASB standards.
  • Internal controls are a system of checks and balances designed to prevent and detect fraud and errors. While most public U.S. companies have these systems in place, many non-U.S. companies have never completely documented the controls nor had an independent auditor attest to their effectiveness.

IFRS Practice

IFRS Self-Test Questions

1. Which statement is correct regarding IFRS?

  1. IFRS reverses the rules of debits and credits, that is, debits are on the right and credits are on the left.

  2. IFRS uses the same process for recording transactions as GAAP.

  3. The chart of accounts under IFRS is different because revenues follow assets.

  4. None of the answer choices is correct.

2. The expanded accounting equation under IFRS is as follows:

  1. Assets = Liabilities + Common Stock + Retained Earnings + Revenues − Expenses + Dividends.

  2. Assets + Liabilities = Common Stock + Retained Earnings + Revenues − Expenses − Dividends.

  3. Assets = Liabilities + Common Stock + Retained Earnings + Revenues − Expenses − Dividends.

  4. Assets = Liabilities + Common Stock + Retained Earnings − Revenues − Expenses − Dividends.

3. A trial balance:

  1. is the same under IFRS and GAAP.

  2. proves that transactions are recorded correctly.

  3. proves that all transactions have been recorded.

  4. will not balance if a correct journal entry is posted twice.

4. One difference between IFRS and GAAP is that:

  1. GAAP uses accrual-accounting concepts and IFRS uses primarily the cash basis of accounting.

  2. IFRS uses a different posting process than GAAP.

  3. IFRS uses more fair value measurements than GAAP.

  4. the limitations of a trial balance are different between IFRS and GAAP.

5. The general policy for using proper currency signs (dollar, yen, pound, etc.) is the same for both IFRS and this text. This policy is as follows:

  1. Currency signs only appear in ledgers and journal entries.

  2. Currency signs are only shown in the trial balance.

  3. Currency signs are shown for all compound journal entries.

  4. Currency signs are shown in trial balances and financial statements.

International Financial Reporting Problem: Louis Vuitton

IFRS3.1 The complete annual report of Louis Vuitton, including the notes to its financial statements, is available at the company’s website.

Instructions

Describe in which statement each of the following items is reported, and the position in the statement (e.g., current asset).

a. Other operating income and expense.

b. Cash and cash equivalents.

c. Trade accounts payable.

d. Cost of net financial debt.

Answers to IFRS Self-Test Questions

1. b2. c3. a4. c5. d

CHAPTER 4 Accrual Accounting Concepts

CHAPTER 4
Accrual Accounting Concepts

Chapter Preview

As indicated in the Feature Story, making adjustments is necessary to avoid misstatement of revenues and expenses such as those at Groupon. In this chapter, we introduce you to the accrual accounting concepts that make such adjustments possible.

Feature Story

Keeping Track of Groupons

Who doesn’t like buying things at a discount? That’s why it’s not surprising that three years after it started as a company, Groupon, Inc. was estimated to be worth $16 billion. This translates into an average increase in value of almost $15 million per day.

Now consider that Groupon had previously been estimated to be worth even more than that. What happened? Well, accounting regulators and investors began to question the way that Groupon had accounted for some of its transactions. Groupon sells coupons (“Groupons”). How hard can it be to account for coupons? It turns out that it is not as easy as you might think.

First, consider what happens when Groupon makes a sale. Suppose it sells a Groupon for $30 for Highrise Hamburgers. When it receives the $30 from the customer, it must turn over half of that amount ($15) to Highrise Hamburgers. So should Groupon record revenue for the full $30 or just $15? At one time, Groupon recorded the full $30. But, in response to an SEC ruling on the issue, Groupon now records revenue of $15 instead. This caused Groupon to restate its previous financial statements. This restatement reduced annual revenue by $312.9 million.

A second issue is a matter of timing. When should Groupon record this $15 revenue? Should it record the revenue when it sells the Groupon, or must it wait until the customer uses the Groupon at Highrise Hamburgers? The accounting becomes even more complicated when you consider the company’s loyalty programs. Groupon offers free or discounted Groupons to its subscribers for doing things such as referring new customers or participating in promotions. These Groupons are to be used for future purchases, yet the company must record the expense at the time the customer receives the Groupon.

Finally, Groupon, like all other companies, relies on many estimates in its financial reporting. It notes that “actual results could differ materially from those estimates.” Maybe accounting for coupons is not so easy.

Chapter Outline

LEARNING OBJECTIVES REVIEW PRACTICE
LO 1 Explain the accrual basis of accounting and the reasons for adjusting entries.
  • Revenue recognition principle
  • Expense recognition principle
  • Accrual vs. cash basis
  • Need for adjusting entries
  • Types of adjusting entries
DO IT! 1 Timing Concepts
LO 2 Prepare adjusting entries for deferrals.
  • Prepaid expenses
  • Unearned revenues
DO IT! 2 Adjusting Entries for Deferrals
LO 3 Prepare adjusting entries for accruals.
  • Accrued revenues
  • Accrued expenses
  • Summary of basic relationships
DO IT! 3 Adjusting Entries for Accruals
LO 4 Prepare an adjusted trial balance and closing entries.
  • Preparing the adjusted trial balance
  • Preparing financial statements
  • Quality of earnings
  • Closing the books
  • Summary of the accounting cycle

DO IT! 4a Trial Balance

4b Closing Entries

Go to the Review and Practice section at the end of the chapter for a targeted summary and practice applications with solutions.
Visit Wiley Course Resources for additional tutorials and practice opportunities.

4.1 Accrual-Basis Accounting and Adjusting Entries

Businesses need feedback about how well they performed during a period of time. For example, management usually wants monthly reports on financial results, most large corporations are required to present quarterly and annual financial statements to stockholders, and the Internal Revenue Service requires all businesses to file annual tax returns. Accounting divides the economic life of a business into artificial time periods. Recall that this is the periodicity assumption. Accounting time periods are generally a month, a quarter, or a year (see Helpful Hint). Companies often report using the calendar year (i.e., January 1 to December 31) but sometimes choose a different 12-month period (e.g., August 1 to July 31).

However, many business transactions affect more than one time period. For example, a new building purchased by Citigroup or a new airplane purchased by Delta Air Lines will be used for many years.

Determining the amount of revenues and expenses to report in a given accounting period can be difficult. Proper reporting requires an understanding of the nature of the company’s business. Two principles are used as guidelines: the revenue recognition principle and the expense recognition principle.

The Revenue Recognition Principle

When a company agrees to perform a service or sell a product to a customer, it has a performance obligation.

  • The revenue recognition principle requires that companies recognize revenue in the accounting period in which the performance obligation is satisfied.
  • A company satisfies its performance obligation by performing a service or providing a good to a customer.
An illustration of revenue recognition. An arrow illustrates that once a customer requests service, the company satisfies the performance obligation, after which the cash is received for the service performed. The description reads, Revenue is recognized when the performance obligation is satisfied.

To illustrate, assume Conrad Window Cleaners performs cleaning services for $100 on June 30, but customers do not pay until July 5. Under the revenue recognition principle, Conrad records revenue on June 30 when it satisfies its performance obligation, which is when it performs the service, not in July when it receives the cash. At June 30, Conrad would report a receivable on its balance sheet and revenue in its income statement for the service performed. The journal entries would be as follows.

June 30 Accounts Receivable 100  
  Service Revenue   100
July5 Cash 100  
  Accounts Receivable   100

Five-Step Revenue Recognition Process—Sierra Corporation Example

Revenue recognition results from a five-step process. This process can best be illustrated with an example. Assume that Sierra Corporation signs a contract with the Lewis family to provide guide services for a one-week backpacking trip for $1,500. Illustration 4.1 shows the five steps that Sierra follows to recognize revenue.

ILLUSTRATION 4.1 Five steps of revenue recognition

An illustration displays the five steps of revenue recognition on the left and corresponding text on the right as follows: Step 1: Identify the contract with customers, A contract is an agreement between two parties that creates enforceable rights or obligations. Sierra has a contract with the Lewis family to provide guide services; Step 2: Identify the separate performance obligations in the contract, Sierra has only one performance obligation—to provide guide services. If Sierra also agreed to sell the customer camping equipment, a separate performance obligation would exist for this promise; Step 3: Determine the transaction price, The transaction price is the amount of consideration that a company expects to receive from a customer in exchange for transferring a good or service. The transaction price for Sierra is $1,500; Step 4: Allocate the transaction price to the separate performance obligations, Sierra has only one performance obligation—to provide guide services to the Lewis family; Step 5: Recognize revenue when each performance obligation is satisfied, Sierra recognizes revenue of $1,500 for providing guide services to the Lewis family when it satisfies its performance obligation—the completion of the guide trip.

As indicated, Step 5 is when Sierra recognizes revenue related to providing the guide services to the Lewis family. At this point, Sierra completes the trip and satisfies its performance obligation.

The Expense Recognition Principle

In recognizing expenses, a simple rule is followed: “Let the expenses follow the revenues.” Thus, expense recognition is tied to revenue recognition. Applied to the Conrad Window Cleaners example, this means that the salary expense Conrad incurred in performing the cleaning service on June 30 should be reported in the same period in which it recognizes the service revenue.

  • The critical issue in expense recognition is determining when the expense makes its contribution to revenue.
  • This may or may not be the same period in which the expense is paid. If Conrad does not pay the salary incurred on June 30 until July, it would report salaries and wages payable on its June 30 balance sheet.
  • The practice of expense recognition is referred to as the expense recognition principle. It requires that companies recognize expenses in the period in which they make efforts (consume assets or incur liabilities) to generate revenue.
An illustration shows the timing of expense recognition. Costs incurred include advertising, delivery, and utilities. The text below the illustration reads: Recognize expenses in the period when the company makes efforts to generate revenue.

The term matching is sometimes used in expense recognition to indicate the relationship between the effort expended and the revenue generated.

Illustration 4.2 summarizes the revenue and expense recognition principles (see Decision Tools).

ILLUSTRATION 4.2 GAAP relationships in revenue and expense recognition

A diagram illustrates the relationship between the time period assumption and the revenue and expense recognition principles. The diagram begins with a box labeled as Periodicity Assumption, which includes the following text: Economic life of a business can be divided into artificial time periods. Two arrows lead from the Periodicity Assumption box, one to the Revenue Recognition Principle box, and a separate arrow to the Expense Recognition Principle box. The Revenue Recognition principle includes the following text: Recognize revenue in the period in which the performance obligation is satisfied. The Expense Recognition principle states: Recognize expenses in the period that efforts are made to generate revenue. An arrow points from the Expense Recognition Principle box to the Revenue Recognition Principle box to illustrate the matching of expenses with revenues. Two more arrows lead to the Revenue and Expense Recognition box at the bottom of the diagram, one from the Revenue Recognition Principle box and the other from the Expense Recognition Principle box to support the statement in the Revenue and Expense Recognition box: In accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (G A A P).

Accrual versus Cash Basis of Accounting

Accrual-basis accounting means that transactions that change a company’s financial statements are recorded in the periods in which the events occur, even if cash was not exchanged (see International Note).

  • Using the accrual basis means that companies recognize revenues when they perform the services (the revenue recognition principle), even if cash was not received.
  • Likewise, companies recognize expenses when incurred (the expense recognition principle), even if cash was not paid.

An alternative to the accrual basis is the cash basis.

Under cash-basis accounting, companies record revenue at the time they receive cash. They record an expense at the time they pay out cash. The cash basis seems appealing due to its simplicity, but it often produces misleading financial statements. For example, it fails to record revenue for a company that has performed services but has not yet received payment. As a result, the cash basis may not reflect revenue in the period that a performance obligation is satisfied. Cash-basis accounting is not in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).

Illustration 4.3 compares accrual-based numbers and cash-based numbers. Suppose that Fresh Colors paints a large building in 2024. In 2024, it incurs and pays total expenses (salaries and paint costs) of $50,000. It bills the customer $80,000 but does not receive payment until 2025.

  • On an accrual basis, Fresh Colors reports $80,000 of revenue during 2024 because that is when it performed the service. The company matches expenses of $50,000 to the $80,000 of revenue. Thus, 2024 net income is $30,000 ($80,000 − $50,000). The $30,000 of net income reported for 2024 indicates the profitability of Fresh Colors’ efforts during that period.
  • If Fresh Colors instead used cash-basis accounting, it would report $50,000 of expenses in 2024 and $80,000 of revenues during 2025. It would therefore report a loss of $50,000 in 2024 and net income of $80,000 in 2025.

Clearly, the cash-basis net income measures are misleading because neither a loss of $50,000 or net income of $80,000 is a faithful representation of the profitability of the painting project.

ILLUSTRATION 4.3 Accrual-basis versus cash-basis accounting

A table has three columns, and the column headers are: No data, 2024, and 2025. The data are as follows: Activity: 2024, Purchased paint, painted building, paid employees is illustrated by a car parked in front of a building being painted by two people; 2025, Received payment for work done in 2024 illustrated a man paying an amount to a woman; Accrual basis: 2024, revenue of $80,000, expense of 50,000, and net income of $30,000; 2025, revenue of $0, expense of 0, and net income of $0; Cash basis: 2024, revenue of $0, expense of 50,000, and net loss of negative $50,000 shown in parenthesis; 2025, revenue of $80,000, expense of 0, and net income of $80,000.

The Need for Adjusting Entries

In order for revenues to be recorded in the period in which related the performance obligations are satisfied and for expenses to be recognized in the period in which they are incurred, companies make adjusting entries. Adjusting entries ensure that the revenue recognition and expense recognition principles are followed.

Adjusting entries are necessary because the trial balance—the first pulling together of the transaction data—may not contain up-to-date and complete data. This is true for several reasons:

  1. Some events are not recorded daily because it is not efficient to do so. Examples are the use of supplies and the earning of wages by employees.
  2. Some costs are not recorded during the accounting period because these costs expire with the passage of time rather than as a result of recurring daily transactions. Examples are charges related to the use of buildings and equipment, rent, and insurance.
  3. Some items may be unrecorded because documents giving rise to an entry have not yet been received. An example is a utility service bill that will not be received until the next accounting period.

Adjusting entries are required every time a company prepares financial statements. The company analyzes each account in the trial balance to determine whether it is complete and up-to-date for financial statement purposes. Every adjusting entry will include one income statement account and one balance sheet account.

Types of Adjusting Entries

Adjusting entries are classified as either deferrals or accruals. As Illustration 4.4 shows, each of these classes has two subcategories.

ILLUSTRATION 4.4 Categories of adjusting entries

Deferrals:
  1. Prepaid expenses: Expenses paid in cash before they are used or consumed.
  2. Unearned revenues: Cash received before services are performed.
Accruals:
  1. Accrued revenues: Revenues for services performed but not yet received in cash or recorded.
  2. Accrued expenses: Expenses incurred but not yet paid in cash or recorded.

Subsequent sections give examples of each type of adjustment. Each example is based on the October 31 trial balance of Sierra Corporation from Illustration 3.35. It is reproduced in Illustration 4.5. Note that Retained Earnings has been added to this trial balance with a zero balance. We will explain its use later.

ILLUSTRATION 4.5 Unadjusted trial balance

Sierra Corporation
Trial Balance
October 31, 2025

      Debit   Credit  
  Cash   $15,200      
  Supplies   2,500      
  Prepaid Insurance   600      
  Equipment   5,000      
  Notes Payable       $ 5,000  
  Accounts Payable       2,500  
  Unearned Service Revenue       1,200  
  Common Stock       10,000  
  Retained Earnings       0  
  Dividends   500      
  Service Revenue       10,000  
  Salaries and Wages Expense   4,000      
  Rent Expense   900      
      $28,700   $28,700  

We assume that Sierra uses an accounting period of one month. Thus, monthly adjusting entries are made. The entries are dated October 31.

4.2 Adjusting Entries for Deferrals

A flow diagram shows nine steps involved in the accounting cycle as follows: Analyze, journalize, post, trial balance, journalize and post adjusting entries (Deferrals and accruals), adjusted trial balance, financial statements, closing entries, and post-closing trial balance. Step 5, titled "journalize and post adjusting entries (Deferrals and accruals)" is highlighted and enlarged.

To defer means to postpone or delay. Deferrals are expenses or revenues that are recognized at a date later than the point when cash was originally exchanged.

The two types of deferrals are prepaid expenses and unearned revenues.

Prepaid Expenses

Companies record payments of expenses that will benefit more than one accounting period as assets. These prepaid expenses or prepayments are expenses paid in cash before they are used or consumed. When expenses are prepaid, an asset account is increased (debited) to show the service or benefit that the company will receive in the future. Examples of common prepayments are insurance, supplies, advertising, and rent. In addition, companies make prepayments when they purchase buildings and equipment.

  • Prepaid expenses are costs that expire either with the passage of time (e.g., rent and insurance) or through use (e.g., supplies).
  • The expiration of these costs does not require daily entries, which would be impractical and unnecessary. Accordingly, companies postpone the recognition of such cost expirations until they prepare financial statements.
  • At each statement date, they make adjusting entries to record the expenses applicable to the current accounting period and to show the remaining amounts in the asset accounts.

Prior to adjustment, assets are overstated and expenses are understated. Therefore, as shown in Illustration 4.6, an adjusting entry for prepaid expenses results in an increase (a debit) to an expense account and a decrease (a credit) to an asset account.

<